PageDNA Site Configuration


Table of Contents

PageDNA Site Configuration Menu
1. Introduction
Categories
Menu Views
2. Overview of Site Configuration Process
Basic Guide for New PageDNA Builders
3. Site Mode Switch
4. Configuring General "Site Info"
Site Title
Customer Service Information
Technical Contact:
Order Delivery Configuration
5. Configuring "Site Variables"
About Proofs, Reorders and Never Cache Reorders:
6. Upgrading to the User Manager
7. User Admin Tool
Administration of Site Users with User Admin
Administering Hub Users with User Admin
8. Configuring Look and Feel
Color Selection
Width Settings
Page Margins
Fonts
Miscellaneous Settings
Upload Site Banner Logo
9. Tips to Improve Site Look and Feel
Using Page Background Image
Using Progress Bar Background Images
Create Custom Buttons with Optional Roll-over Images
Improving the Look of Forms
Cascading Style Sheets (CSS)
Defining and Using Your Own CSS Classes
Case Study: Customizing the Progress Bar
Referencing Links in the Site Header
10. Configuring Site Header
11. Configuring Site Footer
12. Item Management
Item Editor
Managing Inventory
An Overview of Custom Jobs and PageDNA
Product Info
Overview of Item Types
SosStaticItem - How to Create and Configure a Static, Non-Inventoried Item
SosItem - Single Sided Variable Imprint Item
SosBackItem - Two Sided Variable Imprint Item
DualItems - Items that change price, weight, and/or more... based on user input
SosFlexItem - "Flex Items" - Variable HTML proofs for pre-printed items
SosSpecialRequestItem - How to Create a Special Request (Custom Artwork Upload) Item
SosMultiSizeItem - Multi-Size Items (clothing, etc)
SosStockingItem - Inventory Controlled Items
SosRestockItem - Inventory Controlled Items
SosBundleItem - How to Configure Kitted or Bundled Items
Multi-Page Variable Items
Note on Changing Item Types
Custom Item Forms
Shared Section Forms
13. Guide to Item Quantities and Pricing
Item Quantities - NO PRICING Shown or Stored
Item Quantities WITH PRICING
Item Quantities with buy (wholes sale) and sell prices
Legacy Code Input for Quantities
14. Item Wizard
Using the Item Wizard
Item Creation
Product Info
Quantities
Style Chooser
Artwork Upload
Block Editor
Style Preview
Display Info
Catalog Preview
Form
Custom Item Fields
Confirmation
15. Overview of Style Editor Gold
16. About PageDNA Web Templates
Locked Templates.
Web Page Templates Frequently Asked Questions
17. Configuring the "Welcome" (index) page
18. Configuring the "Authorization" page
Authorization
Billing Codes
19. Configuring the "Profile Page"
20. Using "Divisions" in your site
Overview
Divisions List tab
Preview tab
Filtering tab
Setup tab
Divisions Page tab
Indent Examples
Extra Vars
21. Catalog Admin
Catalog Administration
Using Catalog Admin WITH Shopping Carts Enabled
Using Catalog Admin WITHOUT Shopping Carts Enabled
22. Overview of File Uploader
23. Edit Dropdown Lists
24. Editing Item Password Page
25. Imprint Page - Overview
Configuring the "Imprint" page - Form Header
Understanding Personal Forms, Shared Forms and Item Forms
Configuring the "Imprint" page - 'Personal' section
User Instructions
Address Information
Phones
E-mail
Using the Multiple Personal Feature
Configure "Imprint" form: Item Forms and Shared Forms
Form Editor - Dynamic Form Editor
generic_gold - Generic Form Builder, Gold
translation - Translation Form
sublogo - Sublogo Selection Field
Sublogo Selection with Thumbnails Using a Drop-Down List
include - link to other item forms
custom - Custom HTML Form
Converting to Form Editor
Using In-Line Images and "Call Outs" to Improve your Custom Item Forms
Configuring the "Imprint" page - Form Footer
Configuring the File Upload Popup Window
26. Address Lists configuration
Overview
Address List Editor Screen
Address Fields
Sorting Addresses
Filtering Addresses by Division
Filter Addresses By Item
Uploading an Address List with "Mass Upload"
Need multiple imprint addresses on a product?
27. Configuring the "Preview" (Proofs) page
Preview Header Page
Preview Footer Page
Preview Zoom Popup
Proofs - Tips and Tricks
Skip Proof for Static Items with the Shopping Cart
Skip Proof for Static Items without the Shopping Cart
28. Configuring the "Shipping" page
29. Multiple Shipping Feature
Overview
Procedure for Configuring Multiple Shipping Pages
30. Shipping Rate Editor
Tab: edit_list
Checking realtime rates
Tab: items
Tab: setup
Handling
Markup
Test
31. About the Bill Page
Page Header and Intro
Items List and Pricing
Credit Card Information
Non-Credit Card Information
32. Multiple Bill Feature
Overview
Procedure for Configuring Multiple Bill Pages
33. Credit Card AUTH Notification Email
34. Credit Card POST Notification Email
35. Credit Card Manager
36. Configuring the "Review" Page
37. Configuring the "Order Accepted" page ('Done')
38. Configuring the Reorder Search and Result Pages
39. Configuring Cancel Page
40. Configuring Customer Service Contact Page and Information
41. Order Approval Setup and Management
42. Order Delivery Options
Order Delivery Overview
Email Delivery of Orders
Imposition
FTP - Pull from PageDNA
FTP - Push to External Site
Order Delivery via e-Delivery
About Ad Resizing
Order Delivery via TopForm Integration
Order Delivery via Covalent Integration
43. Shipping Label - Information and Setup
44. Reports: How to Create, Run, Save and Schedule your Reports.
Available Reports
Running a Report
Saving Reports
Scheduling Reports (Automatic Email)
45. Routing Orders to Manufacturing / Picking:
Overview
Setting up Manufacturers on your site
Editing Manufacturer Settings
Multiple Shipping Origins by Manufacturer
Email Manufacturers
Imposition Manufacturers
Export Manufacturers
46. Turnaround Levels
Turnaround Levels Overview
Configuring the Turnaround Levels Menu Item
Estimated Ship Date
Quotes Rush Charge Overview
Quotes or Quotes Plus Rush Charge Shared Option as a Surcharge
Configuring an Item's Rush Surcharge Pricing Option:
Configuring a Rush Option INSTEAD of an Item's "Normal" Pricing:
Item Custom Settings Turnaround Level (optional):
47. Email Templates: How to Edit Emails Sent by the System
Editing Email Templates Using the Email Template Builder
Order Confirmation Email
Shipment Notification Email
Vendor Email
Profile Password Reminder Email
Approval Notification Email
Approval Granted Email
Approval Denied Email
Discount Notification Email
Inventory Change Notification Email
Low Inventory Stock Notification Email
Email Configuration Problem
48. Order Action Console
49. Order Regeneration
50. Saved Orders (Without Profiles)
51. Restricting Site Access by IP Address or Usernames and Passwords
52. Button Uploader
53. Button Designer
54. Final Words
55. Global Site Info: Catalog Item/Tab Settings
56. Tax Settings
Typical Tax Scenario: Business in U.S. calculate tax based on ZIP code
Typical Tax Scenario: Calculate taxes based on Origin
Typical Tax Scenario: Canada Tax
Typical Tax Scenario: Outside US or Other
Typical Tax Scenario: Flat Tax per State
Migration of Tax Settings
57. Order Manager
Order Manager tabs
Quotes||Waiting
Quotes||Finished
Approval||Waiting
Approval||Denied
Production
Shipping||Unshipped
Shipping||Shipped
Shipping||All
Billing||Credit
Billing||No Credit
Production||Unshipped
Production||All
Order Manager Details
Order Manager filters
Approval Filtering
Production Filtering
Shipping Filtering
Shipping All Filtering
Credit Card Filtering
Order Manager actions
Enter Quote
Deny Order
Send Approval Reminders
Resend Confirmation Email
Approve Order
Reassign to New Approver
Undo cancellation/denial
Block Re-orders
Confirm Receipt
Redeliver Orders
Regenerate Items
Send Items to Different Manufacturer
Cancel Whole Orders
Create Shipment
Resend Shipping Notifications
Cancel Item Shipments
POST Orders
Manually Charge Orders
58. Coupons and Discounts
59. Storefront Language Translation
60. How to Test Your Site
Guide to Placing Test Orders
Troubleshooting Common Issues
61. Theme Manager
Previewing a Theme
Saving a Theme
Using Themes
Copying Themes Between Sites
62. Deep Linking to an Item, Catalog Tab or Division
63. Site Translation
64. PageDNA-Promail Bridge
65. PageDNA-EPMS Bridge
66. PageDNA-PressWise Bridge
A. Order Management Frequently Asked Questions
B. Shipping Frequently Asked Questions
C. Site Management Frequently Asked Questions

List of Figures

2.1. Basic "Walk-Up" Corporate Stationery Ordering Site
4.1. Site Technical Contact Settings
4.2. Organization-Level Technical Contact
4.3. Manufacturer_tech_contact
5.1. Remove Button Form Action
6.1. Upgrade User Manager
6.2. User Manager Upgrade Tool
7.1. Storefront User Admin Links
7.2. User Admin Site Menu Link
7.3. Site Level User Admin tool
7.4. Configure Columns
7.5. User Update tool
7.6. Editing Storefront Permissions
7.7. New Site User Window
7.8. New Hub User Window
8.1. Color Selector
9.1. Final Results
9.2. Sizing Background Image in Photoshop
9.3. Uploading Background Image in Site Header
9.4. Showing Need for Transparency
9.5. Showing Typical Sizing Issues
9.6. Fixing Sizing Issues
9.7. Further Sizing Changes
9.8. Logo in Place, Sized Correctly
9.9. Turning Off Header Title Option
9.10. Final Result showing "Logo Only" Header
9.11. Desired Result, Showing 3D Progress Bar
9.12. Crop Screenshot
9.13. Drawing Gradient
9.14. Converting to Greyscale
9.15. Lightening Up Unselected Background
9.16. Masking the Corner off on Original Background Image
9.17. Rounding and Cropping
9.18.
9.19. Uploading the Progress Bar Bookend Images
9.20. Uploading the Progress Bar Background Images
9.21. Picking Separation Bar Colors
9.22. Sample of a 3D-looking Button
9.23. ...Hover or "Mouse Over" version
9.24. Css header
9.25. Csschart1
9.26. Csschart2
9.27. Csschart3
9.28. Css .catlabel defined
9.29. Css .catlabel example
9.30. Customized Progress Bar
10.1. Progress Bar Auto-Configure Steps
12.1. Item Editor - List View
12.2. Column Headers
12.3. Item Import
12.4. Item Editor - ItemView
12.5. Managing Inventory
12.6. Special Request Item - Catalog View
12.7. Special Request Item - Configuration Form and Uploading File
12.8. Special Request Item - Configuration Form and Uploading File
12.9. Special Request Item - Item in Basket
12.10. Special Request Item - Checking Out
12.11. Staticepsfile and Staticpdffile fields
12.12. Dual Item Example
12.13. File Upload Document Button Field for Special Request Item
12.14. Custom artwork upload
12.15. Include custom fields
12.16. Sample Vendor Email
12.17. Item Inventory Configuration
12.18. Bundle Options
12.19. Here's an example of what you may see in Multiple Personal Feature:
12.20. Desired Product Type Setting
12.21. Fileinfoprovider and Fileselector
12.22. Example Configuration
12.23. PDF files in con/ Directory
12.24. Basicfileselector
12.25. Drop-Down List Setup
12.26. Section Forms
12.27. Sample Errors
13.1. Drop-down list, no pricing
13.2. Free-test input, no pricing
13.3. Drop-down list with prices (prices shown)
13.4. Drop-down list hidden prices
13.5. Free-free text input, flat price
13.6. Free-text input, stair step pricing
13.7. Drop-down list allow other and show calculate button
13.8. Tiered Pricing, User Choosing Standard Pricing Level in Drop-Down
13.9. Tiered Pricing, User Choosing Custom Price and Clicking Calculate Button for Quote
13.10. Tiered Pricing, Hidden List
13.11. Legacy code editor
13.12. Free entry of item prices
13.13. Drop-down list with price and buy price
13.14. Drop-down list with buy price and no sell price
13.15. Code editor with 'other' and hide drop-down list
13.16. Code editor with start_stop_step function
14.1. Item Creation
14.2. Choosing The Item Type
14.3. Product Info
14.4. Quantities
14.5. Choose a Style
14.6. EPS Egg Upload
14.7. Block Editor
14.8. Display Info
14.9. Catalog Preview Image
14.10. Form Selection
14.11. Custom Item Fields
14.12. Meta Data Fields
14.13. Confirmation Step
16.1. "Select Edit Messages" to Edit Text on the Page
16.2. "Stop Editing" to Turn Off Message Editing
16.3. Text Area with Message Editing Enabled
16.4. Empty Text Area when Editing Messages
20.1. Indent Examples
20.2. Sample showing editing of Extra Vars
21.1. Catalog Admin on the Storefront Menu
21.2. Catalog Admin with Shopping Carts Enabled
21.3. Text box before Catalog Search
21.4. Catalog Admin Color Picker
21.5. Catalog Admin - Tab Manager
21.6. Catalog Admin without Shopping Carts Enabled
22.1. File Uploader
23.1. Edit Dropdown Lists Unsorted
23.2. Edit Dropdown Lists Sorted
25.1. Create New Personal Form
25.2. A screenshot of Item Editor's "Forms" tab
25.3. Item Editor's "Forms" tab with Item Form links
25.4. Form Editor - Field Selection
25.5. generic_gold_form selection
25.6. How the form looks to the user
25.7. Spell Check pop-up window
25.8. File Upload Document Button Field
25.9. File Upload To Style Button Field
25.10. Primary Address Drop-Down List
25.11. Second Address Drop-Down List Field
25.12. Date and Time Options
25.13. Canned blurb
25.14. generic_gold_form selection
25.15. How the form looks to the user
25.16. Spell Check pop-up window
25.17. Example of sub logos on a business card
25.18. Sublogo Setup Tab
25.19. All sub logos uploaded
25.20. New Photo Block Dialog Box
25.21. New Photoblock Placed within Style
25.22. All three photo blocks in position on style
25.23. Storefront Menu List of Item/Shared Forms
25.24. List of Item/Shared Forms
25.25. Sublogo Selection Field Using Checkboxes
25.26. Sublogo Select List Configuration
25.27. A Preview of the item form
25.28. Sublogo_1
25.29. Sublogo_2
25.30. Sublogo_3
25.31. Sublogo_4
25.32. Sublogo_5
25.33. Sublogo_6
25.34. Activating Include form in Item Editor
25.35. Configuring linked-to item form in "include" Item Form
25.36. A screenshot showing Item Form conversion notice
25.37. A screenshot showing Item Form conversion notice with warnings
25.38. A screenshot of Convert Shared Form link
25.39. Before converting a generic_gold with labelspan
25.40. After converting a generic_gold with labelspan
25.41. Before converting a Generic Gold form with "Place Profile Search Box On Separate Line"
25.42. After converting a Generic Gold form with "Place Profile Search Box On Separate Line"
25.43. Form with an image above an input
25.44. Form with "color bars" breaking up sections
26.1. Mass Upload
26.2. Downloading...
26.3. 1
26.4. Choose file
26.5. Adding a new address...
26.6. Auto-increment setting...
26.7. Description options:
26.8. Edit addresses in Excel
26.9. Mass Upload
27.1. Disabling Personal Form Sections
27.2. Catalog Admin Setting to Skip Proof for Static Items
27.3. Configure the Personal Page to be Skipped
27.4. Disabling Personal Form Sections
27.5. Configure the Personal Page to be Skipped
27.6. Preview Header Configuration
28.1. Residential / Commercial Address
30.1. DHL Account
30.2. Test Tab in the Shipping Rate Editor
41.1. Approval Setup on the Storefront Menu
41.2. Approval Setup Activation
41.3. Approval Setup Routing
41.4. Approval Email Options
41.5. Multi-level Approval
41.6. Approval Setup Options
41.7. Approval Setup Reminders
41.8. Manage Order Approvals
41.9. Manage Approvers
41.10. Approver List
41.11. Product List
41.12. Item Editor Custom Tab
41.13. Approval Email
41.14. Attach Uploaded File to Vendor Email
41.15. Order Approval Page
42.1. eDelivery File Types
42.2. e-Delivery Admin Control Panel
43.1. Before Activating Shipping Labels
43.2. Editing Shipping Label Settings
45.1. Editing Shipping Origination
45.2. XML Export Extra Form Variables
46.1. Turnaround Settings Menu Item
46.2. Adding a Shared Option in Quotes Plus Config
46.3. Configuring an Item's Rush Charge
46.4. Override Turnaround Time in an Item's Custom Settings
47.1. Email Template List
47.2. Email Template Builder Example
47.3. Attachment Types
47.4. Link_types
47.5. Include_custom
49.1. Redeilver and Regenerate options in Order Manager
50.1. Enable Saved Orders Feature
50.2. Change the Button Text from "Save This Order"
50.3. Configure Saved Orders
50.4. Saved Orders Webpage
51.1. IP Restriction / Basic Auth
52.1. Viewing Buttons for one page
56.1. A screenshot or the Tax Settings menu item
56.2. Tax Based on Zip Code Lookup
56.3. Flat Tax per State
56.4. Tax Settings with a "Fix" button shown
58.1. Discount Menu Editor
58.2. Discount Name Tab
58.3. Discount Active Tab
58.4. Discount Calculations Tab
58.5. Discount Notify Tab
58.6. Discount Product Tags Tab
58.7. Discount Restrictions Tab
58.8. Discount Subkey Tab
58.9. Discount Value Tab
63.1. Filter Item by Language

List of Tables

10.1.
12.1.
18.1.

List of Examples

45.1. Example Order

This document gives a detailed overview of the Site Configuration Menu, or "Menu", for short. The audience for this document is anyone who builds and/or maintains PageDNA ordering sites. We assume you already have an overview of our software – see PageDNA Software Overview for more information.

The term ‘Partners’ in this document refers to PageDNA software development allies – such as you – who build and maintain ordering sites. We will refer to the company a particular ordering site is built for as the ‘Customer’, and we will denote a generalized employee using the site to order products as the ‘End User’.

Lastly, the templatesPageDNA software uses to generate pages shown to the end user are referred to in UPPER CASE throughout this document.

Introduction

Table of Contents

Categories
Menu Views

Stated simply, the Site Configuration Menu gives you the power to customize ordering sites to fit the needs of each of your customers, the end user. The Menu is the tool to get to know if you want to be able to efficiently maintain sites. To access the Menu for a particular site, visit the following URL:

http://www.nationsprint.com/clients/[site]/menu.cgi

[Tip]Tip

PageDNA site URLs can be 'branded' to feature your company's URL (ie, http://orders.yourdomain.com/[site] or http://[site].yourdomain.com). For more information on branding your PageDNA sites, contact support at support@PageDNA.com

Replace "[site]" with the directory name of an existing site. Note that you might be asked to log in using your Production Hub password. (see PageDNA Site Dev Primer for more details).

After logging in, you will be presented with a list of menu options. Depending on which menu items PageDNA has granted you access to, you may see only a few options or you may see the full complement of more than 25 options!

Choose an option by clicking on its name in the list. Once you are inside a page, you can make changes and then click the "Save Changes" button to have the changes take effect immediately.

There are multiple "Save Changes" buttons placed throughout Menu items. Wherever you are in the page you are likely never far from one. Longer forms include helpful 'Quick Navigation' features, including an index of page contents and links to help you jump around. Learning to use these links will greatly reduce the amount of scrolling you do while editing sites. We recommend using a mouse with a 'roller wheel' to help you move around quickly.

Categories

Menu items are grouped into several categories:

  • Popular — Most used and/or important menu items, including a page that gives access to "Web Templates", which had it's own category in the past

  • Recently Viewed — The five most recent visited menu items not in "Popular"

  • Site Content — Menu items related to changing content, except Item Editor, which is used so much it is in "Popular"

  • Site Settings — Menu items related to changing setting of the site, including a page that gives access to "Email Templates", which had it's own category in the past

  • Shipping — All things related to tracking of shipments

  • Users — Managing users

  • Credit Cards — Managing credit card use on the site

  • Integration — Menu items related to integration with outside systems

  • Legacy — Either tools that are usually accessed in another way or obsolete menu items

This document will jump around a bit through various menu options, in order to introduce concepts in a logical order.

Menu Views

In the past there used to be three different view options: "Normal View", "Compressed View", and "Quick Search View". If you had a certain view selected in the past, this view will be used whenever you work in the menu, even if you log in on another computer.

These days the Quick Search View is the default view and unless you have selected the Compressed or the Normal View the Quick Search View is the only option. Except for some users that have a very small number of items they can see, like guest admins.

In the Quick Search View, there is a search box at the top. Typing into this search box will dynamically limit the menu list. If there is only one item in the menu list, pressing the Enter or Return key will take your browser to that menu item. To temporarily hide the menu list, click the triangle directly left of the "Quick Search". This triangle works as a toggle.

[Tip]Tip

All Web Templates and the Email Templates now have their own page. The Web Templates menu item is in the "Popular" category and the Email Templates are in "Site Settings". Note that the quick search will not find you these templates.

Overview of Site Configuration Process

There are myriad options available when configuring sites. The following documents give a run through of each Menu Item which should prove useful as you build your site.

When you start a site, you will find that it is already configured. Most of the process in configuring your site involves making various edits off this base configuration specific to your customer.

The general process followed when building sites is described below. For more information on the specific actions required for each step, refer to the subsequent documentation or perform a search.

Procedure 2.1. The Site Configuration Process

  1. Site Wizard

    A good first step is to start a 'clean' site and walk through the site using the Site Wizard. This will give you the chance to make the majority of site configuration steps in a step-by-step guided process.

  2. Upload Logo

    When manually updating a site, a nice starting point is to upload your customer's logo using the "Upload Logo". This provides easy identification for this site for you and your customer. Use the 'Upload Logo' Menu Item. Recommended widths are 200 pixels wide by 100 pixels tall for half-width banners, or 600 points of width for full width banners. NOTE: For full width banners use the "Site Header" menu item to "Hide" the Banner Text.

  3. Update Site Info

    Next, update site information using the "Site Info" menu item. This changes the site name. It is also strongly recommended you change the customer service contact information using "Edit Customer Service Info".

  4. Define Items

    Add items to your site using Item Wizard. Exhaustive details can be found elsewhere in these docs.

  5. Add Divisions Step, If Required

    If your site requires divisions, you will need to perform several actions. First, define your divisions using the "Divisions Editor" in the "Divisions Page" tab. Next, activate the Divisions step in the ordering process using the "Divisions Editor" menu item in the "Setup Tab". Lastly, use the "Site Header" menu item to add the "Divisions" step to the navigation bar.

  6. Configure Web Page Templates

    Next, walk through the pages in your website, using the Menu to make changes as you step through. For example, the opening page of the site can be edited using "Index Page". This may be useful if you wish to change the text on the opening page. Below are all the steps optional in the PageDNA workflow, ordered in the sequence they appear to users:

    This is intended as a brief overview only. For a more in-depth coverage of each section on the site, you will need to search or browse the documentation for the subject of interest.

    Here is a diagram that shows the ordering process through a basic "Walk-Up" PageDNA ordering site.

    Figure 2.1. Basic "Walk-Up" Corporate Stationery Ordering Site

    Basic "Walk-Up" Corporate Stationery Ordering Site


    Of course, this is a basic example and the ordering process can have many more extra steps in it, depending on what you want to do.

    The Welcome page first encountered by users on your site is edited using the "Index Page" menu item. You will be able to edit the welcome message as well as configure different options such as Admin Login buttons or - for users with the PageDNA Shipping System, the ability to add a "Track Your Order" button.

    The Authorization page - which asks for information on the person placing the order - is edited using the "Authorization Page" page. You may wish to change the billing codes collected from users ordering on your site. Of course, you can also remove the requirement that users enter a billing code entirely.

    The Divisions page is used optionally to break users into different ordering catalogs. This is often used to show different products to different 'brands' ordering on a single site. This also can be used to keep different types of products from being ordering together. ... The Divisions page copy itself is configured and edited using the "Divisions Editor" in the Menu. To activate this page in your ordering workflow, visit the "Setup" tab, and change the 'login_next_page' variable from 'choose' to 'corp', then click Change. ...

    The Divisions page copy is edited using the Divisions Editor, under the "Divisions Page" tab. The list of divisions is edited also using the "Divisions List" tab. The 'tab' in the navigation bar for Divisions pages (which is not included by default in new sites) is activated using "Site Header".

    The "Catalog" page - which can be thought of as the user's Shopping Basket - is configured using the "Catalog Admin" menu item. There are a variety of catalog display options available to you using this menu item as well as associated items available in tabs, such as "Layout Styles", "Visual Settings". A partial list of options include: tabs across the top of the page, filtering of products by division, showing product thumnails in-line or as a link, ability to show catalog images shown in-line... the list goes on.

    The "Imprint" page is composed of several sections, some of which may appear for some items, and not for others. Complicating things further (to your advantage), you can have multiple "Imprint" pages for different products on your site. The 'core' form for this page is edited using the "Personal Page" menu item. The information at the bottom of the page ('Please be patient') is edited using "Form Header/Footer" menu item. Addresses shown in drop-down lists on the "Imprint" form are edited using the "Address List Editor" menu.

    In addition to the "Personal" form - which can be shared by 1 or more items on your site, you may have custom forms for items, which would be editable in specific menu items created for these forms. New forms are created by editing an item in the Item Editor and choosing a form type from the "custom" tab, then saving. This creates a new menu item in the "Item Forms" section where you can configure that custom form. These custom forms are useful for fields not covered by the "Personal" form or for fields that are specific to only one product.

    Custom forms are useful for complex products as well as for when you need to collect additional information from the user for a particular item - such as a Translated Business card. Custom forms can include a wide variety of inputs, all controled by you using our simple web-based editing tools.

    The "Proofs" page shows users ordering variable imprint items a digital representation of how their items will look when they come off the press. PageDNA’s VIPER engine produces extremely accurate proofs for the user to review - and approve - sending the order downstream. ... The text at the top and bottom of the "Proofs" page is edited using "Preview Header/Footer" menu item. The proofs for the Variable Items are edited using "Style Editor Gold" - style building is covered in the "Style Building" book found in the top level of the docs. Static item previews are configured by uploading a GIF or JPEG in the Item Editor menu item under the "Catalog Preview" link.

    The Shipping page is edited using the "Shipping Page" menu item. There are many options available, including the ability to let the user order ONLY from inventory on hand, the ability for users to have a 'rush' or 'expedite' option on their orders, the ability to let the user choose from a list of shipping methods, and so on.

    The Review page is an optional step that allows users one final chance to review their order 'receipt' before submitting the order to production. This is often extremely useful on sites with real-time credit card billing, where you wish to be sure the user understands the total cost. This cost can optionally include tax, handling fees, or actual shipping rates, drawn from UPS. These features are described in the "Shipping System" and "Tech Notes" areas of our documentation.

    The review page also is available as an option to display on the "Accept" page, which gives the user the same receipt once their order is completed. This is nice because it gives the users a printable receipt for their items. The review page is edited using the "Review Page" menu item. You need to check the box in this form to activate this step in the ordering process, and then add a new tab to the navigation bar using the "Site Header" menu item.

    The "Done" page (shown to users following order submission) is edited using the "Accept Page" Menu Item. You can edit this message and tailor it to your particular site's needs. Options include the ability to show an order receipt or to even show the proofs / thumbnails for the items ordered.

    The "Approval" page is encountered by administrators who need to approve an order in the system. PageDNA offers a robust Order Approval module, activated and controlled using the "Approval Setup and Management" menu item. This menu item gives you the ability to configure order approval rules, view and act on the total list of orders awaiting approval, re-assign order approval from one contact to another, and more. The approval page itself is edited using the "Approval Page" menu item.

    For information on editing other aspects of the site not covered above or in the following documentation, please contact support. We are constantly improving the software and depend partly on the sharp eyes of our customers for new features.

Basic Guide for New PageDNA Builders

The following is designed to provide new PageDNA customers with a framework for "getting started". This is not a substitute for our documentation, which goes into greater detail for configuring options and settings. It is something you can print and keep at your side.

We strongly recommend that you have participated in the free training sessions. You can register for them in the PageDNA Hub under the Learning tab in the Training sub-tab.

If you will be building variable items, aside from the free training sessions, we recommend that you have watched the Video Tutorials. Use the Search Docs tool with the search word: video.

Based on our past experience and successful customers, PageDNA Support recommends you focus on getting your new storefront to function correctly with one or two items, and then begin configuring the Look and Feel. A storefront that "looks great" but does not work correctly will not generate orders or pay for itself. The information below covers the most important things you need to do or consider to get your site working. It does not cover Look and Feel.

Step 1 - Choosing the Correct Site Type:

The first step is to decide what type of system or site to build. Search our documentation using the search words: correct site or see the documentation for the Site Wizard: Chapter 1 "Choosing the Correct Site."

Step 2 - Prepare Artwork:

You will need to prepare artwork for variable items and thumbnails for static items, if you want to display thumbnails for them. Documentation for artwork preparation can be found using the search words: artwork.

Step 3 - Site Wizard:

Now, you should be ready to create your site using the Site Wizard, enable features, and do some of the site's basic configuration. Documentation for the Site Wizard can be accessed from the Site Wizard's Welcome screen, or by using the Search Docs tool with the search words: site wizard. The Site Wizard documentation covers basic information about each step and guides you through the decision making process.

In using the Site Wizard, you should have configured or done the following:

  • The site name, title and system type

  • The technical and customer service information (required)

  • Uploaded a logo for the Site Header

  • Added at least one manufacturer in Manufacturer Setup (required)

  • If using Divisions, you have added at least one, preferably two, divisions

  • Enabled Approval, if needed. You will need to finish configuring it later

  • Set up your address list, if needed, and populated one record

  • Enabled the Profile feature and created Profile fields, if needed (you can do this later)

  • Configured the phones to be used for variable items (you can do this later)

  • Enabled Shipping and selected shipping methods to be used on the storefront, if needed. You will need to complete the configuration later.

  • Configured Sales Tax settings if you will be displaying a total cost to the user and need to collect and display sales tax

  • Enabled credit card collection, if needed (you can do this later)

  • Enabled collection of Bill Codes, most often used to collect PO numbers and cost centers (you can do this later)

  • Selected whether to enable the PageDNA Shopping Cart Feature. You can enable the Shopping Cart feature later, if you want. Enabling the Shopping Cart Feature is a one way change. it can not be reversed.

Step 4 - Divisions:

If you need Divisions or have a Mega-Site, you need to add at least one division if you did not do this while using the Site Wizard. We recommend you add at least two divisions for testing purposes. Documentation search word: divisions

If you have a Mega-Site, do not delete the [notlinked] Unlinked User division or the item with the item tag of donotdelete. These two things are needed to prevent new users who have not been assigned a division from shopping and seeing your other customers (in other divisions) and their associated items.

Step 5 - Item Creation:

Create and add at least one item, preferably two, to the site. If using Divisions, make sure the item is available to the correct division(s). If using Real Time Shipping (UPS and FedEx), you need to assign an accurate weight to the item along with pricing. The documentation search word for pricing is: quantities.

Step 6 - Item Proofing/Testing:

Start an ordering session and proof the item you created to make sure the forms used to collect information and the style are working correctly. You can add a thumbnail to the Catalog for variable items at the Proof step in the ordering process by clicking on the gold link for "Use as catalog preview". If you are working with static items, make sure they get added to your shopping basket and appear correctly.

Step 7 - Shipping:

Configure both the Shipping Page and Shipping Rate Editor. Documentation search words are: shipping rate editor, or shipping

Step 8 - Billing:

Configure the Bill Page, if you are using it, to collect credit card information and/or a PO number and display shipping methods when using Real Time Shipping. The documentation search word for the Bill Page is: bill page

Step 9 - Test Mode:

Set the site to Test Mode (in the menu under the Site Settings Section in Site Mode) so the site will send email and orders. The documentation search word is: mode

Step 10 - Place Test Orders:

Place test orders. By default, at least two email will be sent: the Order Confirmation Email and the Vendor Email. Check both email for content and originating email address. Check the files attached to the Vendor Email to make sure you are receiving everything you need to produce the job. Documentation for testing can be found using the search word: test. You will be most interested in How to Test Your Site and Guide to Placing Test Orders.

Step 11 - Approval:

If you have enabled and configured Approval (documentation search word: approval), you need to check the Approval Notification Email sent to the approver and the Approval Granted and Approval Denied email sent to the user based on the approver's decision. You also need to check the Approval Page to make sure the approver can access all the options they need.

Profiles or Mega Site Testing:

If you have enabled and configured Profiles or are working on a Mega-Site:

  1. Use a different browser to test as users with different roles or permissions.

  2. If the site allows for users with different roles, login as users with different roles. Roles is the term PageDNA uses for users with differnt levels of permissions related to the Profile feature.

  3. If using roles, users should be able to see and edit only what they have been granted permission in regard to themselves and other users on the Profile Page. Login as users with different roles, if you are using roles or are on a Mega-Site.

  4. As you proceed with an ordering session, users should not encounter the Divisions Page and they should only see the items that need to be available to just their division.

If you have a Mega-Site, do not delete the [notlinked] Unlinked User division or the item with the item tag of donotdelete. These two things are needed to prevent new users who have not been assigned a division from shopping and seeing your other customers (in other divisions) and their associated items.

Credit Cards:

If you are using Real Time Credit Cards, you will need to have contracted with one of the PageDNA supported gateways, entered a password in the Credit Card Manager, added your gateway's information to Credit Card Activate, and configured the Bill Page to collect credit card information. The documentation search words for Real Time Credit Cards are: real time

If you are using Passive Credit Cards, you will need to have entered a password in the Credit Card Manager and configured the Bill Page to collect credit card information.

The documentation search word for credit cards is: credit card

Site Mode Switch

This menu item gives you the ability to change the status mode of a site. This status mode is displayed on the site using a 'decal' and also changes the way the site behaves with regards to sending orders and email confirmations, approvals, etc. This tool provides an easy, visual way for everyone to stay on the same page as to the site status. Click a mode to change the status of your site.

The site status mode controls more than just 'decals' shown at the top of the page. It also determines whether or not emails are sent from the site (to customers and vendors) and how orders are stored in the database. When you run reports off a site, it is possible to filter 'test' orders from 'live' orders, so you bill your customer only on orders that were real.

Build Mode.

Sites in Build Mode will not generate orders to vendors or confirmation e-mails to requesters. This prevents spurious orders from causing confusion at the client corporation or at the manufacturer. The site will be marked with 'decals' stating that 'This Site is Currently Under Construction', unless the option to Hide Decals is used.

Test Mode.

Sites in Test Mode will generate orders to the manufacturer. The orders will be marked as <b>test</b> orders. The site will be marked with decals stating that "This Site is in Final Testing", unless the option to Hide Decals is used. Any orders placed in "Test" mode are marked as test orders in the database for clear distinction between live orders when running reports.

Live Mode.

Sites in Live Mode will generate orders normally. All decals are removed once the site is live.

Demo Mode.

Sites in Demo Mode will not generate orders or confirmation e-mails. This prevents spurious orders from causing confusion at the client corporation or at the manufacturer. The site will be marked with 'decals' stating that "This Site is for Demonstration Purposes only". Very useful for long-term demo sites, so users understand that their orders will not route to production.

Off Mode.

Turning a site "Off" prevents users from starting new orders, though it leaves the front page for the site so users can see that the site is no longer active. Use this mode if you want to de-activate a site but still wish to keep it around.

RIP Mode.

Marking a site "Rest In Peace" is a trigger to PageDNA administrators to 'pack up' this site and remove it from the system - usually within 45 days. Note that sites can be restored in the future after being packed away. We strongly encourage our customers to mark sites that are 'dead' with the RIP mode so we can free up disk space.

Decals are displayed at the top of each page as part of the Header, as well as on the Index page. If the status is "live" all decals are removed. You can choose to hide decals temproarily (24 hours) or forever. Please be sure not to launch a site live without moving its status to "live", even if decals are hidden. The Menu item shows the current status in square brackets for easy identification at a glance.

Configuring General "Site Info"

The "Site Info" menu item- found in the "Site Settings" section of the menu - lets you specify general information for your site. NOTE: Please keep in mind that to erase a field within a menu item, it is necessary to put a single space into that field before saving - otherwise your changes will not be recorded.

Site Title

Client Name.

The common name of the customer. For instance "Dell" (not "Dell Computer Corporation"). Appears in places including the Confirmation Email.

Site Title.

This is used in the header of the site next to the customer logo, and is also included in confirmation e-mails. Change this to reflect the type of items you sell using your site.

System Type.

This is used to specify the type of ordering system for a particular site. This information is shown in various parts of the site, including emails sent to the customer.

Customer Service Information

Customer service information is edited using a separate menu item called "Edit Customer Service Info" in Web Templates.

[Important]Important

The Customer Service Info must be completed. It is customer facing in three places:

  1. When the user clicks on the Customer Service Link

  2. On the Cancel Page, when a user cancels an order

  3. As part of the address information in the Order Confirmation email.

Company.

Name of partner who maintains this site (i.e., "Acme Press")

Contact.

Personal name of the customer service representative (i.e., "Debbie"). If more than one person is responsible for this account, we recommend that you use the words: "Customer Service"

Email.

Email address for customer service inquiries. In addition to appearing on the "Contact Customer Service" and "Order Received" (Accept) page within the ordering site, this email address will appear in the "From:" line of email order confirmations sent to the end user. This address is important, because if an end user #8216;replies’ to this message (with a question about their order, for example), their message will go to the address you specify in this field. As with ALL e-mail addresses used by PageDNA sites, be sure to enter the full Internet address (e.g. help@yourfirm.com) to ensure proper delivery.

Phone.

Customer service phone number (recommended)

Fax.

Customer service fax (optional)

Custom Text.

This optional field is useful if you need to craft a custom message to customers. Keep in mind that this section will be prefaced by the phrase "For Customer Service, contact (your custom text here)". To erase this field enter a single blank space before saving.

Technical Contact:

Setting Contacts:

If the site-level Technical Contact is not set, the notification will go to the owner organization's Technical Contact. The site-level Technical Contact can be set in "Site Contacts", found under the Site Settings section in the menu. The organization-level Technical Contact can be set in "User Admin" in the Hub. Manufacturer Technical Contacts can be set in "Manufacturer Setup", found under the Integration section in the site's menu, on a per-manufacturer basis. Please see screenshots of each of these below.

To make sure that problems with PageDNA sites don't go unnoticed and don't get fixed, PageDNA has improved its Technical Contact and Notification System. Email notifications will be sent to either the site's Technical Contact only, or to the site's Technical Contact and manufacturer's Technical Contact, depending upon the type of issue. For example, a bad style notification would be sent to the site's Technical Contact only. A problem sending via FTP would send to the site's Technical Contact and the manufacturer Technical Contact.

Some of the types of problems that trigger notifications are:

  • bad or missing styles

  • problem generating PDF/EPS files

  • problem sending files to a manufacturer

  • bad web page templates

  • bad site configuration

Figure 4.1. Site Technical Contact Settings

Site Technical Contact Settings


Figure 4.2. Organization-Level Technical Contact

Organization-Level Technical Contact


Figure 4.3. Manufacturer_tech_contact

Manufacturer_tech_contact


Order Delivery Configuration

Once the End User has placed an order, PageDNA software is configured to immediately send orders and order receipts out via email. These order receipts are standardized to include any fields the user had in their order. If you need to customize these emails, contact PageDNA for support.

Blind-CC.

If you or someone at the customer would like to passively track orders, simply enter an email address here, or multiple e-mails separated by commas. Each email address included on this line will receive email order receipts for every order placed, but this information will be invisible to the end user.

CC manager on Emails.

Checking this box configures the system such that the manager's email address is Carbon-Copied with the receipt for each order. If you wish to do this for your customer, note that you must include (and may wish to require) "Manager's Email Address" information in the AUTHORIZATION template.

Configuring "Site Variables"

The "Site Variables" menu items provides assorted controls for site behavior.

Behavior Flags. These controls affect a variety of site-wide settings, described below.

FeatureDescription
Never Cache Reorders? Checking this box changes how the system displays proofs for prior variable imprint. When checked, re-orders will use the latest style file on the site and will "freshen" the proofs - instead of showing the exact, previous re-order. Please note that turning this on will refresh your own view of old orders when looking up history. Storing a local archive of your files is recommended when using this feature if you wish to track order imprint version history. Read more about Proofs, Reorders and Never Cache Reorders.
Check Password on Reorder: If checked, re-orders will require users to re-complete item- and/or divisions-level passwords to proceed. The password is requested on a sepcial interstitial page users see when requesting a reorder.
Enable Secure Server Checking this box Enables SSL (Secure Sockets Layer) encryption for the user ordering session - in laymans terms, this directs the site to a secure host (https://www...) and adds the "padlock" indicating the session is encrypted. This is required for any sites collecting Credit Cards. Note that non-securely Virtually Hosted sites will redirect users to nationsprint.com out of necessity - this is our default domain. If you want your domain to be preserved throughout the ordering session, you can now request "Secure Virtual Hosting"... read more at: TechNotes: Secure Virtual Hosting. If you are using SSL on a site with pop-up "Site Passwords", please see our note in "Configuring Site Passwords" doc as it relates to SSL.
Date FormatThis control gives you the ability to change the format for dates shown to the user on the site. Setting the date format here affects the site as well as email templates. The code used in our software to display the date (as configured here) is shown as yyyymmdd in some bits of code exposed to you in the administration tools. DO NOT change this code in any way - just change the date display format here to affect a change.
Artwork File Naming Convention This option changes how variable imprint filenames are determined. The filename can include the quantity, item tag, order number, and last name.
Currency SymbolControls the currency symbol used on the site. The well-supported symbols at this time are dollar, pound, and euro.
Artwork File Naming Convention: Sets a format for file naming on artwork items generated by the system.
Currency Symbol: Allows toggling your site's display of currency.
Site start URL: This indicates where "new orders" start on the system. Note that older sites may need the "Index Page", "Cancel Page", "Accept Page" and "Customer Service" pages re-saved to use this variable.

Legacy System Integration Values. Do not change these settings unless instructed by a PageDNA Administrator.

Older sites may require more than just the Site Start URL changed to change the site's starting URL.

Steps to check your site:

  1. Change Site Start URL in "Site Variables"

  2. Now edit the following Web Templates, and check that the settings are correct, resaving if necessary:

    • Index Page

    • Cancel Page

On some older sites, you may find a hard coded URL as shown in the screenshot below. You need to clear the value in the "Form action is" field (login.cgi in the example below) and re-save so the Site Start URL set in Site Variables takes effect:

Figure 5.1. Remove Button Form Action

Remove Button Form Action

About Proofs, Reorders and Never Cache Reorders:

If you have enabled Reorders, please read all of this documentation before enabling Never Cache Reorders because this requires careful planning and understanding as it will affect the function of your site especially inregard to proofs for variable items..

Enabling Reorders allows a user to find and reorder all the items in a specific order. On a site using the Shopping Basket feature, the entire shopping basket is saved and re-ordered together. The user can remove any items in their shopping basket they do not wish to order again, or add new items. They can change the imprint/variable information, quantity and shipping information for the order.

By default the site will cache the original proof. This cached proof is displayed to the user during the reordering process if they do not go through an "edit cycle", i.e. edit the variable information for an item. You can disable this by going to the site's menu > Site Settings > Site Variables and enable the checkbox for Never Cache Reorders.

With Never Cache Reorder Not Enabled:

Two problems with reorders can happen when the site is using the default settings, i.e. Never Cache Reorders is not enabled:

  • When you have made a change to an item and the user reorders the item after you have made a change, unless they go through an edit cycle, the changes will not be reflected in the proof for the reorder because it is using a cached proof.

  • If the site is using Order Approval: When the Approver edits an order, their changes are not reflected because the cached proof is used.

In each of these cases, the original proof from the ordering session will be displayed when you use the Find Order Tool.

It is not possible to force the user to go through an edit cycle when reordering.

With Never Cache Reorders Enabled:

  • When reordering, Never Cache Reorders forces the proof displayed to the user to use the changes made to the item whether by them, the Approver or you, the builder.

  • The proof is regenerated when a PageDNA administrator (you or PageDNA Support) uses the Find Order tool to view the order's history and it's associated proof(s). The proof will reflect any changes to the item. What this means is that you will never be able to view the original proof that was displayed to the user in their ordering session if there were any edits.

To see a proof using the original token and original style if Never Cache Reorders is enabled:

  • When you need to make a change to an item, clone it

  • Delete the old item

  • Enter the old item tag in the Replaces field in the custom link for the new item so it will be "linked" to the old item for reorders

  • Make changes to the new item

This will will force the reorder to use the new style. You may still have the problem of not being able to see the original proof displayed to the user in an ordering session when using the Find Order tool. But, the original style still exists even though you deleted the item. So, if the Approver and user did not make any changes, it may be possible for you to use Style Editor Gold and test the style using the old token to see the original proof.

Upgrading to the User Manager

Before You Begin

The integrated User Administration tool, discussed in the next section, is a unified interface for managing Guest Admins and Site Passwords. However in order to make use of the new tool, sites with old-style Guest Admins and Site Passwords must be upgraded. This Help document was created to assist you with making that upgrade smoothly.

Guest Admins are non-Hub users who have access to certain Storefront menu items on a single site. After upgrading, Guest Admins will have the same login and menu access as before, but will be referred to as Storefront users. Administration of Storefront users is done using the new user management tools that are covered in the next section. They can also be managed from the User Admin console found under the Account tab in the Hub.

Site Passwords are used to limit access to a site. After the upgrade, users will no longer see the popup password dialog asking for site passwords. On non-profile sites, which most commonly user Site Passwords, a new login page will be presented. Access to the site will still require a valid username and password. After login, users will go be presented with the first page of the site and be able to order normally.

For Profile sites, the login page will not change as a result of performing this upgrade. Profile users will log in as normal and will still need to fill in any required fields prior ordering. If you have a Profile site that is also controlling access using a site password users, you should consider removing the site password users before upgrading. In most cases the site password users are redundant with existing profile users.

Since upgrading users is done on a site by site basis, you will need to perform this task for each of your storefronts. However, you will only need to preform this upgrade once per site. After you have converted the Guest Admins, all of your user management will happen using either the new User Manager tool in the Storefront Menu or the User Manager tool in the Hub.

Figure 6.1. Upgrade User Manager

Upgrade User Manager


Begin by going to the Storefront menu for a site you wish to upgrade and click on the link for Guest Admins, found under the Users menu option. At the top of the page will be a link labeled Upgrade User Manager. Click this link to begin the upgrade process.

Using the Upgrade Tool

Upon entering the upgrade tool, you'll be presented with a list of Guest Admins that currently exist on the site. Each of these will become Storefront users and retain their same rights and access as before.

In the lower section of the upgrade tool, you'll find the an area for giving new access to Profile users. Any profile use that has also logged in as a Guest Admin will be listed in this box. This part of the upgrade tool is designed to combine any profile users that are also Guest Admins in to a single user ID. This will mean that profile users who are also Guest Admins will no longer have to log in with different credentials to access the Storefront and the Storefront Menu.

Each Profile user will be listed like this:

    guest_user:profile_userid

The guest_user is the existing Guest Admin account. The profile_userid is the existing profile account.

This box is where the system has matched up any existing Guest Admins that are also profile users. If you wish to edit this information at this point you can simply by making changes in that field. Be sure to keep the exact guest_user:profile_userid layout. Also, you must use only lower case letters and you cannot use spaces. Underscores may be used in place of any spaces. If you have existing user ID's that don't fit those rules, the system will automatically update them to that the do. For example, a user name of Sally Lawson would become sally_lawson.

We consider it a best practice that if you have Guest Admins that are also profile users for the site, that you combine their logins with this tool so that they don't have to maintain two different sets of credentials. This part of the upgrade tool attempts to do that, but in some cases it may not be aware of a Guest Admin that is also a profile user. This is an instance where you will want to manually add that person to the list in the box.

Once you are satisfied that all of the users are listed properly, click the Upgrade User Manager button.

Figure 6.2. User Manager Upgrade Tool

User Manager Upgrade Tool


User Admin Tool

Special Message About User Management Upgrade

With the PageDNA User Admin tool, you are able to manage PageDNA Hub users (site administrators) for your organization or company, storefront users with menu access (formerly Guest Admins) and Profile users for each site in the same tool.

If you are on the old system of user management (still using Guest Admins), please see this Help document that covers the use of our upgrade tool. This tool will migrate your current users to the new user types and allow you to take advantage of the improved user management interface.

Once you have migrated your users with the upgrade tool, you can follow the instructions in the next two sections to manage them using the new interface.

If you access the User Admin tool from the Hub under the Account tab, you will be able to manage both PageDNA Hub users, who have Hub access amd access to all your sites' menus, and Profile users, Site Users with menu access and Site Passwords.

Administration of Site Users with User Admin

To upgrade to User Admin, please see this Help document that covers the use of our upgrade tool. and the previous topic.

[Caution]Caution

When managing a user's profile, you only have access to the "basic required information", i.e. first name, last name, site access (discussed below), email address, user ID, phone, fax and password.

You do not have the ability to set the user's role regarding Profiles, e.g. user, admin or super-admin. You or the user will still need to go to the site, edit their profile and edit any additional fields you created for Profiles on the site. This is a great place to manage the user's password. You should go to the site and edit the user's profile for all else, including user creation.

Depending upon mapping, the phone and fax may not work with the Profile fields you have enabled.

[Important]Important

If you accessed User Admin from the Hub, you will need to click on the link for Associated Sites to administer users with menu access and users' profiles for other sites. However, you cannot assign menu items for access. This must be done from within the User Admin tool in the site's menu.

[Tip]Tip

When in Associated Sites, if you need to access the first site in the drop-down list:

  1. Select another site from the drop-down list (the screen will change accordingly)

  2. Select the first site in the drop-down list (the screen will change accordingly)

User Types and Site Passwords

Managing the amount and types of access users have can be done from two different tools in the system, depending on the type of user and the type of access you wish to grant.

In order to be sure that you grant the proper types of rights to each user who will have access to your system or site(s), you must first understand the different user types in the PageDNA system and what each can do.

  • Hub Users: Hub Users (a.k.a. PageDNA Admins) have access to both the Hub and all of the storefront menus for each of your sites. Because they have the greatest access to your PageDNA account and sites, they are able to perform tasks such as run reports across all of your sites. PageDNA Admins have the most access of any user type. Administration of Hub user accounts via User Admin in the Hub is covered in the next section.

  • Storefront Users with Menu Access: Storefront Users are set up by a PageDNA Admin, and are granted access to various areas of a specific storefront's menu. Each storefront user can be granted broad access to any number of site menu items, or limited to viewing a single report. Storefront users login at the site level but can access the Storefront menu (the parts they have been given access to) through an Admin Login link or the Menu link in the gold box. If the Admin Login link has been enabled, both would appear at the top of all the storefront's webpages.

    Figure 7.1. Storefront User Admin Links

    Storefront User Admin Links


  • Profile Users: Profile sites use our Profile system to provide a level of security to the site by requiring a unique user login to place orders on the site and to store user information in the system, such a titles and phone numbers, etc. You can learn more about the PageDNA Profile system and how to implement it on your storefronts by visiting our Help document. You may find it easier to create or edit user profiles from within the site because you will be able to edit any Profile fields on the site. For instance, you cannot set the user's role or division. Please see the "caution" note at the beginning of this section.

  • Site Passwords: Prior to using the User Admin upgrade tool, you could assign site level passwords that worked similar to Profiles in terms of limiting access to a site. The difference between Site Passwords and Profiles, is that Site Passwords do not store any user information the way that Profiles do. With the User Admin tool, you can limit access to a storefront by requiring a username and password. You would use the User Admin tool to create and manage these accounts.

Managing Storefront Users

There are two different tools that you can use to manage storefront users. The first is the User Admin link in the storefront menu under the Users section. The second is the User Admin tool found in the PageDNA Hub under the Account tab. The User Admin tool in the storefront menu allows you to edit users just for that specific site. The User Admin tool in the Hub gives you the ability to manage both Hub level and Storefront level users on all your sites. If you use the storefront's User Admin tool, you can only assign access to that specific storefront or menu items for that specific storefront. Please see the tip at the beginning of this section on selecting an Associated Site when using User Admin from the Hub.

Figure 7.2. User Admin Site Menu Link

User Admin Site Menu Link


To access the User Admin tool in the Storefront menu, click on the User Admin link found under the Users section in the menu. Doing so will take you to an interface that looks like this.

Figure 7.3. Site Level User Admin tool

Site Level User Admin tool


If your site is not a profile site, then Site Login Required will be shown as the top line. This toggle allows you to turn the Site Password requirement on or off. It can be useful if you have set up Site Passwords in order to restrict access, but then want to open the site to any and all users and no longer require a username and password to access the storefront.

The four tools near the top of the page allow you to add new users, turn all users on or off by marking them active or inactive, and verify all users if you have chosen to require email validation at the time new users sign up for access. If a user is marked as inactive, they cannot log in to the storefront or storefront menu.

A search box allows you to quickly find any given user by entering their name or email address in the search box. If you have many users on the site, this can be a quick way to find specific people.

The list of column headers provides you with the information you wish to be displayed. Most columns give you the ability to sort the table of users by that column simply by clicking on the column header. If you want to reverse the order of the sort, click on the asterisk shown in that column header. You can also customize which column headers are displayed by clicking on the Configure Columns link. Check or uncheck each column as you wish, and click the Save Column Settings button to save your changes.

Figure 7.4. Configure Columns

Configure Columns


Clicking on the Add User link will open up an "Add a new user to the 'site' org" window. Please see the New User section below.

Clicking on the Update link in the Actions column with take you to a screen where you can update a user's information. Each of the fields are labeled.

Site Access

The Access dropdown list is where you can grant access to the site, the Storefront menu, or both.

  • Menu: Storefront Menu access only. There is no access to the ordering site on Storefronts that use Profiles or Site Passwords with this selected.

  • Site: For Profile sites, this is a Profile user who only has access to place orders. For sites that use Site Passwords, this user would only have access to place orders.

  • Menu+Site: Grants access to both the ordering site and also the Storefront Menu.

Figure 7.5. User Update tool

User Update tool


If the user has been granted Menu access, you can click on the Menu link next to their name to select the specific levels of access you want them to have in the Storefront menu. Use the checkboxes to grant or remove access to any tool. The Select All buttons will enable all the checkboxes for each section.

As part of the User Admin upgrade, we've added an option to allow the ability to view hidden items on the storefront (highlighted in the screenshot below).

Once you have made your changes, click save to commit them.

Figure 7.6. Editing Storefront Permissions

Editing Storefront Permissions


Adding a New User:

Clicking on the Add User link will open up an "Add a new user to the 'site name' org" window.

When adding a new user, you will be presented with a window similar to that when editing a user, except there is a User ID field.

After you create a new user, the User ID is no longer editable.

[Important]Important

It is strongly recommended you enter the user's email address in the User ID field for users accessing the site. Please see the next topic for Administering Hub Admins with User Admin for PageDNA Hub Administrators.

Figure 7.7. New Site User Window

New Site User Window

All of these features are available from the PageDNA Hub as well. Click on the Account tab in the Hub and then select User Admin You will need to click on the link for Associated sites. Please see the "important" notes at the beginning of this section.

Administering Hub Users with User Admin

If you are an administrator for your organization or company, you can administer or create new PageDNA Hub administrators, who have access to all your sites and their adminstrative menus.

If your company or organization does not yet have an administrator, you can click the link to Become an Administrator.

If your company or organization has an administrator and you need to also be able to administer other Hub users, ask your company's adminstrator to contact PageDNA Support to have them grant you access.

To access User Admin, go to the PageDNA Hub, select the Account tab and then select User Admin. You will be in the Customer Orgs window. If you select Associated Sites, you can return to Customer Orgs by clicking on its link so you can administer your Hub users. To administer Associated Sites, please see the previous topic.

There is no Access drop-down list. There is a Role drop-down list instead. It has only one option: Hub User. All the other fields are the same as those when administering other users.

[Important]Important

PageDNA Support recommends you use something other than the user's email address as the User ID so the Hub user does not to confuse their Hub account with one they may use for testing. This way, they can be logged in with their Hub account in one browser for administration, e.g. Safari, and test using a different account or profile (with their email address) in another browser, e.g. Firefox. The User ID will need to be unique among all PageDNA Hub users, not just those in your own organization or company.

Figure 7.8. New Hub User Window

New Hub User Window


The required fields are First Name, Last Name, User ID, Email, Password and Re-type Password. Please enter a phone number so PageDNA can contact the Hub user, if needed.

After you create a new user, the User ID is no longer editable.

Editing an existing user can be done by clicking on the Update link. Deleting a user can be done by clicking on the Delete link.

Configuring Look and Feel

The Look and Feel editor - found in a tab in Site-Wide Appearance under the Site Settings section in the menu - lets you change various design elements used throughout a particular site. You can edit the colors, the Form and Page widths, and the Font faces used in your site.

Color Selection

You will most likely want to set these colors to closely match your customer’s corporate identity. Note that corporate ordering sites are usually linked to from a corporate intranet, which may or may not look similar to the customer’s public web site. You may wish to consult your Customer’s Corporate Identity standards for recommended RGB color codes.

Figure 8.1. Color Selector

Color Selector


Change colors by first selecting a radio button next to a page element on the left side, and then simply click the color you want in the Web-Safe Palette found on the right. You will see the color update within the box, showing the new color inside the old.

Alternatively you can enter any RGB hex color code manually to use a custom colors outside this palate into the text box next to a page element. If you do use a color outside the web-safe palette, please note that customers on 256-color computers may experience unsightly dithering.

There are 14 different page elements that can take on different colors, but only a few are commonly modified:

Page Background.

The color behind everything on the page, and is almost always white (#FFFFFF).

Page Text.

The standard color for text on the site, and is almost always pure black (#000000).

Header Title Text.

The color used in your site’s header, next to the site’s banner image. The color can also be changed on the Site Header configuration page.

Banner Background

Practically speaking, this is the only color changed on many sites. Typically, this color is set to match the primary color of in the customer’s logo. We recommend that you take this color directly from a GIF or JPEG of the customer’s logo for accuracy. See "Setting Banner Background Color" below in the "Upload Logo" menu item (below) to learn how to do this with a click of your mouse.

Banner Text.

Chosen to contrast against the Banner Background. The default setting is white (#FFFFFF).

Form Section Header Background.

Used in various forms throughout your site’s ordering pages to indicate where a new form section begins, such as when you have several items being ordered. You may wish to use the same color as the Banner Background, to further strengthen the site’s branding. The default is #CCCCCC.

Form Section Header Text.

The color of text withing a form section header, which will contrast with the Form Section Header Background. Like the Form Top Background, you may wish to use the same color here as used for the Banner Foreground. The default is #000000.

Form Section Subheader Background.

Primarily used in Item and Shared Item forms (typically made using the Form Editor), it indicates a subsection to a form section, so you can further divide and organize the forms. The default is #999999.

Form Input Background.

The counterpart to the Form Label Background, this color is shown behind the various form controls like drop-down lists, text inputs, and check boxes. The default is #EEEEEE.

Form Label Background.

The background color for form labels such as ’First Name’ and ’E-mail Address’. The default is #DDDDDD.

Button Bar

The bottom of the form sometimes includes a button, which the user must click before proceeding to the next page. Default color is white (#DDDDDD). If you use another color, make sure it stands out so that the user can find the button to move to the next step in the ordering process.

Unvisited Link

The default link color. Default is dark blue (#000099).

Selected Link.

The color of a link when you are clicking it, or if your mouse cursor is hovering over it. Default is light blue (#3399FF).

Visited Link.

The color of a link that has been visited. Default is the same as for Unvisited Links, dark blue (#000099)

Note that one other color you may wish to edit is the Footer background color, accessed in the "Site Footer" menu item.

Width Settings

You may change two settings relating to the width of the user interface:

Page Width.

This is the total width of the entire page shown to the user, measured in points. Default width is 100%, to accommodate easy viewing on low- as well as high-resolutions displays. Remember when changing this value, that your customer may have a much smaller monitor than you. Most ordering sites can fit comfortably within 600 pixels in width.

Inner Table Width.

This represents the width of the forms the user is asked to complete during the ordering process. Default value is 90%, and is relative to the width of the Page Width.

Values for both the Page Width and the Inner Table Width can be specified in either pixels or percentage. Use the percent symbol after your number to specify percentage. If you use pixel widths, the Inner Table Width should not be larger than the Page Width. Neither the Page Width nor the Innter Table Width should exceed 100%.

Page Margins

The page margin indicates how many pixels your content is offset from the top left corner of the Web page. Because Internet Explorer uses slightly different means for showing margin offsets, separate values are available so your site shows correctly on all browsers.

Internet Explorer

Margin Height: default is 5

Margin Width: default is 5

Other Browsers

Top Margin: default is 2

Margin Width: default is 2

Fonts

You have four types of fonts to choose from:

Serified

This defaults to Times.

Non-serifed

This defaults to Helvetica, and then tries Arial if the user does not have Helvetica installed.

Verdana

Verdana is a good-looking, compact, sans-serif font developed by Microsoft specifically for the Web. If your customer has standardized to Internet Explorer across the company, this may be a good choice for your site. This selection first tries Verdana, and then reverts to Arial and Helvetica if Verdana is not installed.

Monospaced

This defaults to Courier.

Custom

The Custom field lets you specify your own custom list of fonts, each font name separated by a comma. If the fonts you specify are not found on the user’s computer, the default will be the font specified from the list mentioned above.

Additionally, you can specify a font size with the Size drop-down list. Sizes range from Extra Small to XX-Large. The default is medium.

Sites have three different classes of "real estate", each of which can have it’s own font definition. Generally speaking, sites should use the same font family for each element to ensure consistency. Some end users have reported that sans-serif fonts are easier to read in small point sizes.

Banners.

Choose a font type to be used for all "Banners" (form headers) on the customer site.

Site Text.

For all general text messages on the screen, such as user instructions.

Form Labels.

This specifies the font to be used in forms, appearing in the left side of a form – next to an item the user may complete.

After making changes, click "Save Changes" to return to the Menu. If you wish to see how your colors look, you will need to choose "Edit Colors" again from the Menu. You may also wish to keep another window open with your ordering site, so that you can Reload and see the changes.

Miscellaneous Settings

You may wish to make some form fields on your ordering site required, or indicate that some are optional. The Required setting is the text that will appear by form field labels if you specify that a user must enter data into the corresponding field.

Alternatively, you may want most of the form fields to be required, so that an optional field is the exception. The Optional field lets you indicate this to end-users.

If you are using discounts on your site, it may make it clearer on certain ordering pages, like the shipping page, to indicate a price reduction. Enabling the checkbox for Negative Prices will show discounts and similar reductions in red text.

Upload Site Banner Logo

The site banner logo is edited using the "Upload Logo" Menu item. This lets you change the logo displayed in the upper-left corner of every page on the ordering site. This is most commonly the customer’s logo, but may include your own firm’s identity or anything else you desire. The logo appears above the navigation bar showing progress through the site.

[Tip]Logo Production.

Actually producing the logo file is outside the scope of this document, but let us offer these points:

  • The customer’s public web site may be a good source for the logo image.

  • The file must be in GIF or JPG format. Using the GIF format gives you the ability to ‘eyedropper’ color from the logo, and is recommended.

  • Be careful about color gamut chosen when saving the image in your graphics program (e.g., Photoshop).

  • Keep the width under 200 pixels and the height under 40 pixels. We actually recommend even smaller logos, if possible. Remember that this logo appears at the top of each and every page, and takes up a bit of vertical "real estate". Users dislike ‘scrolling’.

Once you have the logo file ready on your computer in GIF or JPG format, click the "Browse..." button. You will be presented with an "Open File" dialog box. Make sure the "Files of Type" is "All Files" [1], and then browse your system to find the image on your computer; lastly, click "Open" to select this file. After you click "Upload Logo", your browser will upload the image file to our server. This may take a few moments if you have a slow Internet connection – please be patient. Once your logo has been uploaded it will be visible in the "Current Logo" section of this page below.

Your current logo is displayed here, directly above a sample your current Banner colors.

[Tip]Setting Background Color

We have provided a simple short cut to help you choose the Banner Background Color by sampling directly from the Logo you have uploaded. This is recommended for consistent look and feel. Within the "Current Logo" display, move your mouse over the logo and click on the image exactly where the color you want to sample is shown. Once you click, the page will refresh, and the "Current Banner Colors" on the right will immediately reflect the new color. This feature only works for GIF images.

Note: If the text label reading "Current Banner Colors" disappears or is hard to read, you will want to change the Banner Foreground Color in the "Look and Feel" menu item to ensure a smooth end user experience.



[1] This is how Windows does it. Macs and other computers may behave differently.

Tips to Improve Site Look and Feel

The "look and feel" of your ordering site can be enhanced using several simple techniques described below. Please review these tutorials on how to activate more advanced look and feel options.

Using Page Background Image

This section describes how to create and use a tiling background image on your site for a more professional site appearance. A background image can greatly enhance the look of your site, as you will see below.

Below is a sample showing a background image in use on a site. Note the light colored background image behind the acme logo... this is the background image we will create and install in this mini-tutorial.

Figure 9.1. Final Results

Final Results


Creating the image is done in Photoshop. Because the background image tiles, there is no need to make the image terribly wide, but we do need to make the image "tall" so the background pattern only appears at the top of the page... not repeating again in this case until the user is down 4000 pixels on their form (unlikely to happen unless you have VERY long forms).

Note: If you wish to create an effect that tiles more frequently, you can make your background image smaller. In this example, our background image has what looks like a shadow appearing under the 'ledge' created by the light brown background image and then white below that (over which the user will see the actual 'active' part of the ordering site).

Figure 9.2. Sizing Background Image in Photoshop

Sizing Background Image in Photoshop


Next, we need to upload this background image to the site. This is performed in the "Site Header" menu item as shown below. Here we are uploading our GIF file, named gray_bg.gif in this case. The background image will appear on the site immediately after saving.

If you'd like to use our sample image as a starting point, you can download it from here: gray_bg.gif

Figure 9.3. Uploading Background Image in Site Header

Uploading Background Image in Site Header


Because in this case our background image has a non-white color at the top of the page, where we display the customer logo, we need to make the logo a transparent "GIF" file, so the background image shows through. Otherwise, you will see a white square outlining your background image as shown at the top of the screenshot below.

We recommend you fill the background of your logo with the color used in the background before saving as a Transparent GIF, so that the logo looks nice and anti-aliased against the background color. If you did not replace the white background with the light brown before saving, you might see "jaggies" around your logo. Make sure you are editing in RBG mode in photoshop so the anti-aliasing works well.

Figure 9.4. Showing Need for Transparency

Showing Need for Transparency


Its also important that you leave a "buffer" around the logo to reserve the 'real estate' at the top of the header. As you can see below, this logo has no room at the top, and as such the site shows the logo too close to the top of the page:

Figure 9.5. Showing Typical Sizing Issues

Showing Typical Sizing Issues


To fix this, we change the Canvas Size of the image. In this example we are adding another 20 pixels to the bottom of our site logo:

Figure 9.6. Fixing Sizing Issues

Fixing Sizing Issues


You may need to add a buffer above and below the logo itself...

Figure 9.7. Further Sizing Changes

Further Sizing Changes


This updated result shows how the new logo is pushing the site content down the page... our new 'buffer' around the logo ensures this. Also there is now room at the top of the page.

Figure 9.8. Logo in Place, Sized Correctly

Logo in Place, Sized Correctly


Hiding the header text shown at the top of the page ("Online Ordering System Demo" in the screen shot above) is something you can do to make the header image simply a single image - this can often look more clean and opens up new design possibilities.

In the screenshot below, we are turning off the site title in the "Site Header" menu item:

Figure 9.9. Turning Off Header Title Option

Turning Off Header Title Option


...and here is the result. Now just the logo shows up, and in this case it is centered. You could re-upload a banner image that spans, say, 600 pixels and add more custom design to your header graphics.

Figure 9.10. Final Result showing "Logo Only" Header

Final Result showing "Logo Only" Header


Contact support if you need help with any of this.

Using Progress Bar Background Images

This tutorial will show you how to load background images into the cells used in the "Progress Bar". The Progress Bar is configured using the "Site Header" menu item. This mini-tutorial will show you the steps in Photoshop to make a site with the 3D effect shown below. Many other look and feel ideas are possible with these features - this is just one simple example.

Figure 9.11. Desired Result, Showing 3D Progress Bar

Desired Result, Showing 3D Progress Bar


To create an image to load into the background, we start by taking a screenshot of a normal progress bar, and then crop it down to size. Below is a shot from Photoshop showing the banner image just before being cropped.

Figure 9.12. Crop Screenshot

Crop Screenshot


Now that we have a document of the right size, we erase everything in this image and use Photoshop's "Gradient" tool to create a smooth gradient fading from a light green in the middle to a dark green on the top and bottom. We then save this image as a GIF file - this will be our "selected" step background image - shown behind whichever step is highlighted at that time (for samples you can borrow and use, scroll to bottom of this tutorial).

Give this file a name you will be able to recall later, such as "bar_on.gif".

Figure 9.13. Drawing Gradient

Drawing Gradient


Now we need to make a greyed-out version of this image, for the non-selected versions of this step. To do this, convert the image to Greyscale in Photoshop, and then lighten the brightness a bit, before saving this as another image.

Give this file a name you will be able to recall later, such as "bar_off.gif".

Figure 9.14. Converting to Greyscale

Converting to Greyscale


Figure 9.15. Lightening Up Unselected Background

Lightening Up Unselected Background


Lastly, if desired we can create "book-end" images that 'cap' the left and right hand sides of the progress bar. You need to create "active" and "inactive" versions of each bookend, and they need to have the same width. To make this file, we start with the original "selected" GIF we just created above, and convert to RGB mode before erasing one corner.

Figure 9.16. Masking the Corner off on Original Background Image

Masking the Corner off on Original Background Image


Here we have erased that corner (so as to give a rounded look on the bookend) and have cropped the image down in this case to 13 pixels wide. All bookend images need to be the same width.

Figure 9.17. Rounding and Cropping

Rounding and Cropping


Save this file as a GIF image and give it a name you will be able to recall later, such as "right_on.gif". ("right" side image, in "on" state).

Now flip this image horizontally, to create the image for the other side. We might call this "left_on.gif".

Figure 9.18. 


Repeat these steps but now create "off" versions for right and left, using the gray background image this time as your starting point.

Last step is to upload these images in the "Site Header" menu item. First we will upload the bookends - also specifying that each image is 13px wide:

Figure 9.19. Uploading the Progress Bar Bookend Images

Uploading the Progress Bar Bookend Images


Finally, we upload the background images for the selected and unselected steps of the navigation bar.

Figure 9.20. Uploading the Progress Bar Background Images

Uploading the Progress Bar Background Images


Note: are also defining custom colors for the progress bar at this time. Even though the background images will show up and hide this background colors, the colors defined here should be close to the dominant color in our background images, as it takes a moment for the images to load the first time a user visits the site and this smooths out the user experience. So in the example above, we are setting the background color for the "Selected" step to a green color, and the foreground color is set to "White".

If you'd like to use our sample progress bar images as a starting point, you can download them below:

The progress bar's separation bar, the line above the progress bar steps, now contains an option to turn it off, as well as an input to control it's thickness. Additionally, there is now a lower separation bar immediately below the progress bar steps, which has the same color and thickness settings. Both color settings also use the easy-to-use color picker.

Figure 9.21. Picking Separation Bar Colors

Picking Separation Bar Colors


Selected Bar Background: bar_on.gif

Unselected Bar Background : bar_off.gif

Selected Left Bookend : left_on.gif

Unselected Left Bookend : left_off.gif

Selected Right Bookend : right_on.gif

Unselected Right Bookend : right_off.gif

Create Custom Buttons with Optional Roll-over Images

The "stock" buttons on your site can be replaced with images. This feature includes support for optional "roll-over" images... such that when the user moves their mouse over the button it changes to a different version (eg, "lit up").

Figure 9.22. Sample of a 3D-looking Button

Sample of a 3D-looking Button


Figure 9.23. ...Hover or "Mouse Over" version

...Hover or "Mouse Over" version


We've documented how to add buttons to your site elsewhere - please see our: Button Uploader docs.

Improving the Look of Forms

It is often helpful to add images and color separation bars between sections of forms. We've created a dedicated tutorial (click here) to show how this can help your site look better and work more intuitively for your users.

Cascading Style Sheets (CSS)

There are a few places in the Storefront Menu where we allow the insertion of Cascading Style Sheet (CSS) code in order to allow you further customization of the look and feel of your sites.

This is an advanced technique and should only be attempted by experienced builders who have solid CSS skills. PageDNA supports all parts of our software but changes to the CSS are your responsibly.

If you do customize your CSS, limit those changes to look and feel. Attempting to dramatically change the layout of the menus and other page components may break your Storefront.

The most common place to insert your CSS is in the Header Configuration menu option in the Storefront Menu. There you will find a box for inserting additional CSS. Because links are relative to the CSS file, you will need to use the prefix ".." to access other files in your site. For example, "../img/background.gif"

Figure 9.24. Css header

Css header


Below are tables of the major classes and components that we currently use.

Figure 9.25. Csschart1

Csschart1


Figure 9.26. Csschart2

Csschart2


Figure 9.27. Csschart3

Csschart3


Defining and Using Your Own CSS Classes

In addition to manipulating the default PageDNA classes defined above, you can create your own CSS classes to use in you Storefronts.

Since CSS allows you to define a class and then have all parts of the pages that call the class take on any attributes defined in that class, it is a much more efficient way to further customize the look and feel of your Storefronts.

To add your own classes, you will first need to define them in the "Additional CSS Content" section of the page header. In the example below, we have added a class called .catlabel and assigned it a grey color by using the Hex color code #999999. Just as with CSS elsewhere on the web, you could assign additional attributes to the .catlabel class such as a font weight or typeface if you wished. So long as it holds to CSS standards you may use it when defining your custom class.

Figure 9.28. Css .catlabel defined

Css .catlabel defined


To make use of the class that you've defined, simply call the class in any sections of the Storefront that allow for HTML. Use the tag <span class=catlabel> before your text. If you copy this example, replace "catlabel" with your own custom class. Don't forget to close your tag using </span> after the affected text.

Here is an example of using that <span> tag in the Catalog Note section. In this case we are applying all of the attributes of the class catlabel (the color grey) to the word Size:.

Figure 9.29. Css .catlabel example

Css .catlabel example


There are a number of places on the web that can teach you more about CSS. Here are two to get you started:

www.w3schools.com/css

Wikipedia entry on CSS

Remember that while PageDNA allows you to add additional CSS to your storefronts, we are not able to assist you with troubleshooting that code.

Case Study: Customizing the Progress Bar

Before attempting to replicate this case study, it is important you understand the steps needed by reviewing Using Progress Bar Background Images

Here is an example from a storefront along with the settings that were used to make eight rounded tabs for a Progress Bar that looked like this:

Figure 9.30. Customized Progress Bar

Customized Progress Bar


Two files were used for this: one for the Active step and one for the Inactive step. The width was 125 pixels and the height was 47 pixels. (in PhotoShop) for each of the files used.

The files were uploaded in the Site Header for the Selected Step and Unselected Step. The Custom Height (in the Site Header, above where these files are loaded) was the same as the height of the tab (47).

"Bookend" images were not needed in this case.

In Look and Feel, the Page Width was set to 1000, with the Form Table Width set to 90%.

In the Site Header, to get the "steps" or tabs to appear correctly, Additional CSS Content was added as follows:

.steps td {
  width: 125px;
}

You may need to modify the CSS to meet your needs.

Referencing Links in the Site Header

You can reference the links in the Site Header, that appear just above the order Progress Bar, with CSS by referencing 'header-links'. For example, if your site has a solid background color behind the links, you can use the following to make the links legible:

.header-links {
    background-color: white;
}        
      

Configuring Site Header

The HEADER appears at the top of the site menu, and at the top of every page in the site. The header is composed of:

  1. A logo, which you can change using the Upload Logo menu item.

  2. A title for the site, such as "Business Card and Stationery Ordering System". The title can be changed in the Site Info menu item. The size of the font can be made bigger in this menu item, using the "Title size" drop-down. The whole title can be hidden using the drop-down as well. That is useful if the logo for the site includes the Business Card and Stationery text in a nice font, for instance.

  3. The progress bar just below the header:

Table 10.1. 

Welcome >

Authorization >

Select Items >

Imprint >

Proofs >

Shipping >

Done >


Following is a list of options available for the header:

Header Configuration

These options configure if the header appears at all, and if so, which elements to include and how to align these elements within their part of the layout. A commonly elected option is to drop the Header Title and use a full-width gif for Header Logo. This Header Logo might include the Header Title within the GIF in a nice font, for example.

One option that requires some care is the Additional CSS Content. Because links are relative to the CSS file, you will need to prefix ".." to access other files in your site. For example, "../img/background.gif"

Just below the Additional CSS Content field are fields for Meta Description and Meta Keywords. These can be useful if one wishes for the site to be indexed and more properly ranked by search engines like Google.

Site Logo and Title

This section allows you to customize the site title, overriding what is set in Site Info under the Site Settings section in the menu. You can set any site title you want. This title shows in the Web browser's title bar, and is independent of the site's name and title used elsewhere.

Progress Bar Configuration

This section allows you to configure which navigation 'tabs' appear across the Progress Bar in the Header. You will want to change which 'tabs' are active depending on the configuration used on your site. For example, if your site uses the 'Divisions' page option, you will want to activate this 'tab'. If you activate the correct tabs, users will see the current page highlighted on the Progress Bar, cuing them to their place in the ordering process. (Some places call this a 'breadcrumb bar' because it's like following a trail of breadcrumbs.)

There is an "automatic" option for Progress Bar steps that turns them on/off based on the site settings, highlighted in the screenshot below. Enabling this will automatically add steps to the Progress Bar, e.g. a "Division" or "Billing" or "Review" step, if you enable those options. The manual steps selection is still available if the automatic choices are not correct.

[Important]Important

The names of the Progress Bar steps are editable only through the edit links on the site (when in an ordering session as an admin) - not through the Site Header template editor.

Figure 10.1. Progress Bar Auto-Configure Steps

Progress Bar Auto-Configure Steps


Extra Link Configuration

This section provides you with the ability to add text links ABOVE the navigation bar and below the Header Image and Header Title. These links are similar to the links available within the "Site Footer" section, and can be used to link to external or internal destinations.

For example, to add a link to the Customer Service page, you would enter the value

showtmpl.cgi?doc=custsvc

into the 'URL' field. The Link Text might say "Customer Service". If click, this would open a new window with the customer service template on the site, showing your site's contact info (as configured in the 'Edit Customer Service Info' menu item.

Let's say that you wished to link to your own website from navigation bar. In this scenario, you would simply enter

 
http://www.yourdomain.com

into the URL field and "Visit Our Homepage" for the Link Text. This would open your homepage in a new window, if clicked.

The "Popup" option turns the link into a JavaScript window, which provides better control the window which is opened upon clicking. Window dimensions, scrollbar inclusion, and other options are available if necessary.

You can also specify whether to include two standard links above the progress bar: "cancel order" and "logout". The "cancel order" link does not show up on Login, Index, or Accept pages (i.e. before the order starts or after it finishes). The "logout" link is only active on profile sites, after the user logs in.

Another configuration that you may want to use on Profile sites is to provide a link in the site header directly to the Profile Management page. (Click here for those instructions)

Configuring Site Footer

The FOOTER appears at the bottom of every page in the site and is edited using the "Site Footer" menu item. The footer is broken into three areas: left, center and middle. You can choose a logo or text (with or without links) for the left and center areas, and you can choose to include a "Cancel This Order" button in the right hand side.

The background color of the Footer can be changed. Default is "#cccccc" for a light gray look.

The whole footer can be hidden, if desired.

You can enable the display of PageDNA’s credit card certification to assure your users that their orders are secure. The cert logo will only display if your site is in SSL mode (see menu item Site Variables); currently the image is only displayed on the Login/Welcome page.

Item Management

Item Editor

The Item Editor is collection of tools that you can use to manage all of the items you've built within any given Storefront Menu. When you need to edit any aspect of an item, this is the place you'll want to start. You can find the Item Editor in the Storefront Menu under the Popular section. By default, clicking on the Item Editor link in the Storefront Menu will take you to the Item List. However, there are several links across the top of the tool. Each of these link are discussed below.

List View

Figure 12.1. Item Editor - List View

Item Editor - List View


The Item List provides you with a list of all the items in your Storefront, regardless of their display status in the Storefront's catalog. With it you can quickly see all of your items and perform tasks such as editing, cloning or deleting them. Clicking on a column name will cause the table to sort itself based on that column's contents. To reverse the order of the sort within that column, click on the asterisks displayed in the column's header.

Figure 12.2. Column Headers

Column Headers


The columns across the top are customizable. While there are standard columns shown by default, you can add or remove columns by clicking the Configure Column link in the upper right corner. Your column choices are shown in the table below.

Table 12.1. 

Column Name

Description

longname

Name of the item

tag

PageDNA Tag for the item

prodcode

Product Code

template_style

What style file is used for this item (blank means the style name matches the PageDNA tag)?

on_hand

Number of items on-hand (used for inventory control - appears only for SosStockingItem and SosRestocking items)

corp_filter

Which division does this product belong to (if you are using divisions)?

x_item_class

The type of item (like double-sided, or bundled, or static...)

qtyspec

The definition of possible prices and quantities available for this item. Please visit the Item Quantities and Pricing Guide for a comprehensive guide to configuring the item quantities and pricing for your items.

buy_qtyspec

The definition of costs for this item (wholesale price). Uses same formats as qtyspec. Also covered in the item quantities and pricing guide

qtyunit

Name of units of this item (card, envelope, ...)

printer_id

The ID code for the manufacterer that this product is sent to, as configured in the Manufacturer Setup menu item.

unavail

Whether or not this product is visible ('hide' means it is invisible to all users except administrators currently logged in)

choose_info

Detailed information for the catalog

passwd

Password (if required for this product)

tab

Which tab(s) in the Catalog does this item belong to? (if tabs are used)

configure_form

Which "personal" form is being used? (blank is the standard personal form)

sections

Which sections of the personal form should be used? (n=name/title, a=address, c=contact (includes phones 1-8), p=phones (specialized office phones, rarely used))

item_form

Which item form is used for this item? (generic_gold, sublogo,...). These are custom forms that add extra fields that appear below the standard, shared 'personal' form. A custom item form only appears for the product it is linked to, and choosing an item form here will add a new menu item that requires editing later.

prodtypecode

Stay tuned for updates on this feature!


In the Action column of the Item List you have three options. Edit will take you to the Item Edit view, covered in detail below. Delete will remove the item entirely from the system. Clone allows you to make a copy on the item. When clicking on the Clone link, you'll be prompted to provide an Item Tag for the new item since every item must contain a unique identifier.

Besides the Item List, you have additional links across the top of the page that provide you additional functions. They are:

  • Create Item - A short cut way to create an item without using he Item Wizard. If you use this link to create a new item you'll need to go back and fill in information for your item that would normally be populated when using the Item Wizard. The Create Item link is best left to expert users.

  • Sort and Delete Items - Allows you arrange the default order of the items listed in the Item List. You can also remove items from the Storefront from here.

  • Inventory - If you have items that are of an Inventory item type, this is where you can manage those stock levels. For more information about Inventory items please see our Help documents found here and here.

  • Item Uploader - We recommend use of this tool for advanced builders only. This tool allows you to create many static items at once by entering all of the appropriate fields in a spreadsheet and then pasting that spreadsheet in the Item Uploader tool.

    When using the item uploader to quickly copy items from one site to another, the size detail for multi-size items will be included. The size names and size product codes will be uploaded. However, price and inventory information are not included in the download / upload process.

    [Tip]Tip

    It is recommended that you download the items currently on the site and use this file as a template.

    [Tip]Tip

    We also recommend that you retain the original file you download from the site so you can restore the original items on your site should the one you upload fail.

    [Caution]Caution

    This tool is only for static items and does not support uploading Quotes or variable item types.

  • The Import Item option allows the site builder to easily import items - including their styles and, optionally, their forms - from an existing site to another site.

    To use, go to the Item Editor menu item for the site to which you wish to import the items, select Import Items. Choose one of your sites from the Source Site dropdown, then choose an item. Finally check whether or not to import shared forms to your site, and if the forms being imported should overwrite the forms on the present site, if the names are the same.

    Figure 12.3. Item Import

    Item Import


Item View

By clicking on the Edit link of an item in the Action column of the item list, you are taken to the Item View of the Item Editor. From here you can make changes to that specific item. Across the top of the scree is a list of tools that you can use to make changes to the item.

Figure 12.4. Item Editor - ItemView

Item Editor - ItemView


Across the top of the toolbar is a dropdown list containing all of the items on your site. From here you can quickly move from one item to the next without having to go back to the Item List. In the search box to the right you can filter the dropdown list to only show items with certain attributes. Once your selected a new item in the dropdown list, clicking the go button will take you to the Item Editor for that item.

The rest of the links in the toolbar are as follows:

  • Item List - licking this link will take you back to the full list of items on your site.

  • Create Item - A short cut way to create an item without using he Item Wizard. If you use this link to create a new item you'll need to go back and fill in information for your item that would normally be populated when using the Item Wizard. The Create Item link is best left to expert users.

  • Overview - provides a quick "at a glance" look at some of the item's attributes, such as the item tag, product code, catalog note, and more.

  • Product Info - This is the link that you will be taken to by default when entering the item view of the Item Editor. From here you can change things such as the item's Product Name, Tag, Sku, Weight, and Manufacturer. Change these with caution. Making alterations to these fields on live items may result in errors or problems with live orders for this item.

  • Quantities - Here you can alter the quantity and pricing options for your item. For more about this tool, see our Help document found here.

  • Display Info - This page allows you to make changes to how the item listed in the catalog; including the Catalog Note, Catalog Details, Tab, Visibility, Password, and Divisions (if enabled).

  • Catalog Preview - If you want to make changes to the catalog thumbnail or large preview image, you can do so from here.

  • Custom - The Custom page allows you to set several item level attributes that are not part of any other tool in the Item Editor. If you are looking for an attribute and can't find it elsewhere, try looking here.

  • Inventory - If your item is an Inventory item, then this tab can be used to manage all aspects of that, including the actual quantity on hand, a low stock level, and who should be notified when the inventory is getting low. This tab will not appear on items that are not of an Inventory Item Type.

  • Form - Here you can select what (if any) Item, Personal, and/or Shared form your item will use. Any forms that you have enabled will then show up as additional links in this toolbar.

  • Style - If you item has a style, you can edit it here. Depending on the item and how you have set it up you will either be presented with our Visual Style Editor (VSE) or our Style Editor Gold (SEG).

    (Search terms: Item Editor and Item Uploader)

Managing Inventory

This screen allows you to set inventory for multiple items, plus filling backorders when inventory is available.

Figure 12.5. Managing Inventory

Managing Inventory


Click on an item to get an inventory report for the item.

The 'Note' field is optional (it will fill in a default of 'created' or 'updated' if you leave it blank).

The system does not delete inventory when you rename items or if you use shared inventory. The easiest way to delete inventory records is to create a new stocking item with the same tag (the tag is the only bit that matters), set a minimal inventory, then delete the item.

If you have backordered items, a table of orders will show up to the right of the main inventory table. When you have inventory available, you can send the order; if the inventory is not enough to fill the order, a new backorder will automatically be created.

If you enable the Notify checkbox, an email will be sent to the email address entered in the Change Email To field, which is available when you edit an item and go to the Inventory screen for that item. Please see the documentation for Inventory Controlled Items.

An Overview of Custom Jobs and PageDNA

Custom Jobs using PageDNA - Overview

"Web to Print" is a broad category used to describe e-commerce systems that allow a customer to submit a print order over the internet. PageDNA supports "web to print" not only for items having a template, but also for "custom jobs" - items for which no template exists.

A good example of a non-templated job is a situation where a customer wishes to upload a PDF (or other graphic arts file or files) for a quote or simply to have the job printed at a pre-set pricing rate. This document gives an overview on how Custom Jobs work currently on PageDNA.

Want to Learn How to Set Up Special Request Items?

These items use the PageDNA "Product Type" SosSpecialRequestItem. To learn how to setup a "Special Request Item" view our procedural documentation elsewhere. To learn more how this works for your customers, please read on.

How do Special Request Items Work?

We call catalog items designed to handle non-templated items "Special Request Items". This type of item allows the following features at this time:

  • CATALOG DISPLAY / PRICING: items can be listed as standardized items with pricing, or be listed in catalog "zero dollar" items (hold for quote / approval internally). A mix of priced and non-priced items can help if you have standardized pricing for many items but still want customers to be able to submit "off rate sheet" items for quote request.

  • FILES: user to upload one or more graphic file over the web. 50 megs or smaller files work well with this web based process. If you routinely need larger files let us know and we can discuss FTP options

  • JOB SPECS: user can specify one or more (unlimited) job parameters - different specification forms can be configured (and shared) for different item types. User can give name to each job -helpful if they are checking out after submitting multiple custom jobs

  • PROOFING: a GIF proof is shown for PDFs users submit - for other file types, a link to the file uploaded is shown to help users confirm they indeed uploaded the correct information.

  • DOWNSTREAM WORKFLOW: Artwork and job specifications (if any) are sent to production for review and offline (at this time) quoting process. In other words, our recommendation is that any item requiring a quote be put on hold for internal approval using our Approval System.

Features not supported at this time:

  • "Matrix" based pricing for generating quotes interactively

  • Pre-flighting of uploaded files

  • Print Driver-based job upload (PDF JobReady or similar)

  • Online Quote Approval Process (eg, where customer approves a quote online and pays then)

Some of the above features (Matrix-based pricing, Quote Approval Process) have been added to our Quotes Modules, see documentation here.

End-User Experience: Custom Job Workflow

Here is a typical workflow example showing how PageDNA handles custom items.

A customer visits the catalog, and does not find a template for the item they wish to have printed. Accordingly, in this case the customer can visit the "Custom Collateral" tab and finds a special request item:

Figure 12.6. Special Request Item - Catalog View

Special Request Item - Catalog View


Note there is no pricing shown for this item. You could have a list of items with standardized pricing, and/or items without pricing as shown (requiring quote). See the setup docs for details.

When "Adding" this item to the basket, the customer is presented with a custom form. This form contains at minimum a "FIle Upload" field, but in this case also lets the user assign a name to their custom job. Jobs can have more than 1 file and an unlimited set of fields (text boxes, drop down lists, radio buttons, checkboxes) to indicate job specs you may wish to collect. Note that we have found that the more complex of a form you create, the less likely users will want to order online.

Below, the customer is uploading a PDF they have called "Steve's Datasheet" in the configuration form:

Figure 12.7. Special Request Item - Configuration Form and Uploading File

Special Request Item - Configuration Form and Uploading File


Upon proofing, the user sees a GIF of the PDF that was uploaded.

Figure 12.8. Special Request Item - Configuration Form and Uploading File

Special Request Item - Configuration Form and Uploading File


Once added to the basket, the item appears... and in this case it has the name that the user assigned the product:

Figure 12.9. Special Request Item - Item in Basket

Special Request Item - Item in Basket


The user could then add more templated OR custom jobs to the basket before checkout... here in the checkout step the user has added two custom items to the basket - and can configure quantities of each product individually before checkout:

Figure 12.10. Special Request Item - Checking Out

Special Request Item - Checking Out


Want to Learn How to Set Up Special Request Items?

These items use the PageDNA "Product Type" SosSpecialRequestItem. To learn how to setup a "Special Request Item" view our documentation elsewhere.

Product Info

Product Type

This determines the item type for this item. Each product type has special behaviors and "powers", useful in different situations.

Following are some of the most used item classes:

SosItem - Variable Item - Single Sided

An item with variable imprint on one side. This item type requires a variable input template, which we call "Styles". Styles are edited using Style Editor Gold. See our PageDNA Style Building documentation and our Video Tutorial for more information on this process.

SosBackItem - Variable Item - Two Sided

These are items with custom imprint on two sides. You will need to build two styles. This product type causes two artwork files (EPS and/or PDF) to be sent to production - one for the front and one for the back side.

If you need to show a backside option to the user but do not require Postscript files in manufacturing for the back, we recommend you use the SosItem class and then use custom logic to show a special GIF file to the user. Again, see PageDNA Style Building documenation for more information on handling back sides - you can search for "SosBackItem" to find this information quickly.

SosStaticItem - Static Non-Inventoried Item

A static item with NO variable imprint. Note that you can upload a preview image when editing products of this class within this menu item.

For help with this, see our detailed "How to Create and Configure a Static, Non-Inventoried Item" documentation.

SosStockingItem - Static Inventoried Item

Items without variable imprint that keeps track of inventory levels. This item type has been getting more and more use as PageDNA customers continue to expand the usage of the system beyond just business cards and corporate stationery into inventoried items such as datasheets and brochures.

For help with this, see our detailed "How to Create and Configure an Inventory Controlled Item" documentation.

SosMultiSizeItem - Multi-Size Item

An item that can exist in several different 'sizes', each of which can have its own product code, inventory status, and price. Very useful for clothing products. Can be inventoried or non-inventoried.

For help with this, see our detailed How to Create and Configure a "Multi-Size Item" docs.

SosRestockItem - Static Inventory Restocking Item

This item can be used in conjunction with an SosStockingItem but is fairly rarely used in practice. It is used to Increase inventory levels and can be configured to automatically increase the inventory on hand for another product (a paided SosStockingItem or Inventory Controlled item.

This item type is handy where there are two ordering groups: one that purchases bulk orders to restock supplies and others purchase that orders from the "on hand" supply (SosStockingItems). By showing the "stocking" items to the user and the "restocking" items to the admin, these managers can purchase and replenish inventory. Contact support for help with this feature.

SosFlexItem - "Flex" Item

An item that can display a variable preview with variable text, but doesn’t create EPS. Useful for pre-printed, stocked items, where you do not require a unique Postscript file for production (ie, pick and pack).

For help with this, see our detailed How to Create and Configure a "Flex Item" docs.

Dual Items

Dual items are regular items that change some of their regular characteristics when special conditions are met. For example, you could allow admins to order many more than regular users, or you could charge international users a different price. The following dual items are available:

  • SosDualItem

  • SosDualStaticItem

  • SosDualBackItem

  • SosDualStockingItem

Dual items are set up just like regular items. To set up the special dual features, use the item's "custom" tab in Item Editor, "Dual Item" section. The dual item settings will be activated when the expression in "Alt Check Code" is true. Any settings that you leave blank (or set to zero) will automatically use the main settings.

SosBundleItem - Bundle Item or "Kit" Item

An item that - when selected - also selects multiple other items, useful for "kits" or bundles of products. Sub-products can be hidden or visible "a la carte". The kit can either behave as a single item upon checkout, or each product can have its own quantity selection controls. For help with this, see our detailed How to Create and Configure a Kitted Item documentation.

SosSpecialRequestItem - Special Request Item

This is a simple but powerful item type that allows one or more files (artwork, data, etc) to be uploaded and attached to an order. This is not a 'static' nor a 'variable' item in the traditional sense like a business card... this is most useful for custom or "business to consumer" ordering where customers provide their own artwork.

For help with configuring this type of type, see our detailed How to Create and Configure a "Special Request Item" documentation.

Product Name

This is the concise human readable name of the product, as shown in the catalog, emails, and reports.

PageDNA Tag.

The tag is a simple product identification code to be used throughout the site. Each product must have a different, unique tag. We recommend compact names that are easily recognizable at a glance; for example, "bc" for business card, "env" for envelope, "lh" for letterhead, and so on. You might call a postcard 'postcard', or a T-Shirt 'tshirt'. The tag determines which style will be used to create the product image (among other things). For a product with a tag of "bc", the style would be named "bc.sty".

Whatever syntax you choose for your product 'tags', choose something memorable and compact, as you will refer to this elsewhere when configuring your site. If your site features variable imprint products, for example, you will refer to this tag when naming a style file. So, in summary, keep tags short, simple and descriptive. The Item Wizard automatically creates a tag, and uses a compact format.

Product Code/SKU

This optional field is for the end-user part number. This can be shown in the catalog and in email templates. This can also be used for internal purposes such as the 'bin number' for a product's master paper stock.

Quantities - Item Quantity Specification

Determines the quantities the End User is allowed to order for an item, and also is where prices are stored. The qtyspec field can be entered in one of a few different formats, to handle different conditions. These formats can be simple, or complex, depending on the task at hand. Using the Item Wizard or Item Editor are great ways to add prices to your items, but you may need to sometimes edit items in the Item Editor menu item to enable some options, such as Hidden Prices.

We've created a Guide to Item Quantities and Pricing Configuration for your help in learning how to configure your quantities and (optionally) retail / wholesale prices.

Units

The "display" attribute describes the default quantity of measure. Read in conjunction with the user-selected quantity, for example, a user might be allowed o order 250 'cards'. The word 'cards' is the quantity unit and gives both the user and the production department a grasp on exactly what has been ordered.

The "code" attribute is optional and is used with certain 3rd party integrations that specfy quantity units with a formal code.

Weight

Weight of 1000 of the default unit quantity, measured in pounds. This measurement is used exclusively by PageDNA’s real-time shipping rate calculation system and if you are not using that system, you do not need to worry about this value.

Manufacturer

This is the manufacturer linked to this item. You may manage your list of manufacturers in the Menu Item "Manufactuer Setup".

Has Pricing?

When checked, this item will have pricing editing enabled in the Item Editor.

Include Fonts in EPS?

Embeds certain fonts in PageDNA’s EPS files to streamline some production workflows. Does not work with PDF output or with TrueType fonts.

Tiff Preview in EPS?

When checked, EPS files will have a TIFF preview image embedded. This helps certain workflows, for example: if you are using Quark or a similar program to impose PageDNA’s business card EPS files into an N-up, files with this activated will show a bitmap of the product.

Overview of Item Types

[Note]Overview of Item Types

PageDNA provides a wide variety of different Item Types for you to use on items available your online ordering sites. Depending on which Item Type is selected, different item options are made available, changing the way your items behave on your ordering site.

The two most common item types used on ordering sites are SosItem - which is used for Variable Imprint items wherein you wish to send press-ready Postscript files downstream - and SosStaticItem, which is used to host 'static' or non-variable items on your site. PageDNA’s item classes are described in the following pages at length.

SosStaticItem - How to Create and Configure a Static, Non-Inventoried Item

SosStaticItem is used for "pick and pack" items where no user configuration of product options is necessary. Most commonly, this is used for items such as 2nd Sheet Letterhead, non-customizable envelopes, and any other item that does not require personalization or imprint. This type of item has no inventory control.

Note that you CAN send a single EPS or PDF file to production or to PageDNA's Imposition feature for a static item - this is not shown in the proofs to the user, however. To configure this, head into Item Editor and edit an item. In the custom tab, there are two fields named 'staticepsfile' and 'staticpdffile'. Use the upload fields to select your files; don't forget to click the Save button at the bottom of the page to save your changes.

Figure 12.11. Staticepsfile and Staticpdffile fields

Staticepsfile and Staticpdffile fields


A Static item does not require a style to be created in Style Editor Gold. If you select Static or Flex item, you will be able to upload a GIF file as a static proof of the item. This image is shown in the catalog if you've enabled imagery using "Catalog Admin" menu item, and proofs will also optionally be shown in the "Proofs" screen for your site. Note that you can turn off the Proofs page if the user is ordering only static items - this option is enabled in the "Personal Page" menu item.

Note: Unlike a SosItem, static items will show the static catalog image on the proof screen and will not pass to that image to the vender email, even if sending gifs as attachments is enabled.

If production needs specific information about a static product we recommend using the product code field, found in the Product Information section of each item in the Item Editor.

SosItem - Single Sided Variable Imprint Item

SosItem is the most freqently used item class, and provides for a single side of variable imprint on a product.

This is used for variable items such as: business cards, memo pads (from the desk of...) - SOSitem creates unique EPS for each order along with a true proof displayed on the "Proofs" page. You must name your style file with a name referencing the 'tag' of your item... for example, if your SosItem has a 'tag' of 'bc', the corresponding style file needs to be called 'bc.sty'.

SosBackItem - Two Sided Variable Imprint Item

SosBackItem is the most freqently used item class, and provides for a two sides of variable imprint.

This option creates two unique EPS or PDF files for each order along with true proofs displayed on the "Proofs" page. You must name your style files with a name referencing the 'tag' of your item... for example, if your SosItem has a 'tag' of 'bc', the corresponding style file for the front side needs to be called 'bc.sty', and the backside would be 'bc_back.sty'.

Various configuration options are found under the "custom" tab in the Item Editor. One of these is an option to "stack_back_previews" - when enabled, the front and backsides appear on top of each other to the user, versus the default behavior of side-by-side.

Lastly, you can un-check "send_back_eps" if you - for some reason - do not want or need artwork for the backside sent to production.

DualItems - Items that change price, weight, and/or more... based on user input

PageDNA has several special product types called "Dual Items" that take a regular item and add a unique ability - namely, the abiliy to change one or more of the following based on a parameter in an order: Sell Price, Buy Price, Handling Fee, Product Name, Manufacturer, Product Code, Quantity Unit, Vendor Product Code, or Weight.

Item types with this behavior option include: SosDualBackItem, SosDualItem, SosDualMultiSizeItem, SosDualStaticItem, and SosDualStockingItem. Each of these is the "Dual Item" enabled version of the matching product type. For example: SosDualItem is an SosItem (single sided variable item) but with the Dual capabilities added.

The alt_check_code for SosDualBackItem can now check has_back to switch pricing, manufacturer, etc. based on whether the item has two pages. This is useful for items that can optionally have a back side based on imprint form input. Please see below for information about the alt_check_code and associated fields.

Sample usage example: if the user chooses a non-standard color, raise the price.

Procedure 12.1. How to Create and Configure a "Dual Item"

  1. Build a regular item and load the "normal" settings into this item.

  2. Edit the item in Item Editor, looking in the "product_info" area to make sure one of the above item types is selected - as appropriate. Save.

  3. Next, click on the 'custom' area in Item Editor. The "controls" for a dual item are found in this section. This is where you will configure your trigger and what should change should the trigger conditions be met. Scroll down to the "Dual Item" section to find these parameters.

  4. First we need to set an "Alt Check Code". This is the bit that checks something in the order to determine if the "alternate" configuration (eg, alternate pricing level) should be triggered.

    This can be the tricky part - the "Alt Check Code" is a Python expression that is tested for your Dual.... if the expression returns "true", THEN and only then will this item use the 'Alt' settings (see below).

    For example - lets pretend that we want "alternate pricing" to kick in if the ink color a user selects is Blue (instead of Black, the default option). First, you'd build a "custom form" has a drop down list with (for this example) a variable name: "bc2_ink"... with two options: Black or Blue. In this case, you would use the following for your "Alt Check Code":

    
    form.bc2_ink == 'Blue'
    
    

    Note on expressions:

    == means "equal to"

    != means "not equal to"

    So here we are testing that the form input IS equal to Blue - if this is true, then the "Alt" behavior will turn on... read on to learn what can be changed - and how.

  5. The Alt Check Code can trigger an override / change in one or more of the following:

    • Sell Price ("Alt Qtyspec")

    • Buy Price ("Alt Buy Qtyspec")

    • Handling Fee ("Alt Handling Fee")

    • Product Name ("Alt Longname")

    • Manufacturer ("Alt Printer Id")

    • Product Code ("Alt Prodcode")

    • Quantity Unit ("Alt Qtyunit")

    • Vendor Product Code ("Alt Vendor Prodcode")

    • Weight ("Alt Weight Per 1000")

    • Weight ("Alt Qty")

    Enter the "alternate" or "dual" behavior you want to turn on override you want into this list. Here in an example:

    Figure 12.12. Dual Item Example

    Dual Item Example


    In this case - a different pricing level kicks in if the ink is blue. To learn about the format used on the pricing in this case, see our chapter on Item Quantities and Pricing. If you wanted to override the manufacturer (Alt Printer Id) you'd have to get the ID number for the alternate vendor in your "Manufacturer Setup" menu item.

If you have questions about Dual Items, please contact support and we will be happy to assist you. Let us know your site directory and which "tag" you are working on, as well as your goal so we can give you the information you need.

SosFlexItem - "Flex Items" - Variable HTML proofs for pre-printed items

SosFlexItem is an item class designed to show a "quasi-proof" to end users, using a static image but showing variable imprint information as HTML text. This item is somewhere between a static and a variable item - no EPS is generated but the user does see their specific imprint information in the preview. This is often useful when wishing to allow users to order pre-printed 'pick and pack' items that are not changable by the end user - the classic example is pre-printed office letterhead.

The advantage to a "Flex Item" is that you can create a single item that covers all offices, versus having to create individual static items for each office. Following are steps to create and configure a "Flex Item":

Used for Semi-variable or preprinted items: letterhead, envelopes, etc. - Flex items show a static proof in addition to variable HTML. No EPS is generated or sent to manufacturing for static items - but the item is referenced in the Manufacturer Email along with the quantity to 'pick and pack'.

Procedure 12.2. How to Create and Configure a "Flex Item"

  1. Upload a small 'preview' image for the product Item Editor or "Old Item Editor". this will be shown for all proofs, so you may wish to 'blur' the imprint information or put the words 'sample' on the proof. We generally recommend a relatively small preview image (maximum width: 250 points) to prevent user confusion.

  2. Convert your existing item to 'SosFlexItem' class using the Item Editor interface in the Menu. You will need to create the item as a Static or Variable item using the Item Wizard, and then convert the item class using Item Editor. Once you've changed the item class, save and re-edit the item.

  3. In the SosFlexItem fields, you need to define the HTML that will show up next to the item. Put the following information into the 'preview_blurb' field (everything between the dashes):

  4. In the SosFlexItem fields, you need to define the HTML that will show up next to the item. Put this information into the 'preview_blurb' field in the Item Editor interface:

    
      The imprint information for this item will be:
    
      <blockquote><tt>
      %(self.form.card_street1)s<br>
      %(self.form.card_street2)s%(self.form.card_street2 and "<br>")s
      %(self.form.card_city)s,  %(self.form.card_state)s
      <br>
      %(self.form.card_zip)s
      </tt></blockquote>
    
      Image shown below is for reference only.
    
    

    Note that the code shown at the end of the card_street2 line is designed to add a <BR> tag if and only if there is a second street line. You may of course need to vary these fields for your specific needs. You can be very creative with your HTML above... for example, if you have two blocks of text (one with names and titles and the other with the address) on the item, you could create nested tables and show the blocks of text as separate sections:

    
    The imprint information for this item will be:
    
    <table>
    <tr>
    <td>
    <tt>
    %(self.form.name_first)s %(self.form.name_last)<br>
    %(self.form.card_title1)s%(self.form.card_title1 and "<br>")s
    %(self.form.card_title2)s%(self.form.card_title2 and "<br>")s
    %(self.form.card_title3)s%(self.form.card_title3 and "<br>")s
    </tt>
    </td>
    <td>
    <tt>
    %(self.form.card_street1)s<br>
    %(self.form.card_street2)s%(self.form.card_street2 and "<br>")s
    %(self.form.card_city)s,  %(self.form.card_state)s
    <br>
    %(self.form.card_zip)s
    </tt>
    </td>
    </table>
    
    Image shown below is for reference only.
    
    
    

If you have questions about FlexItem, please contact support and we will be happy to assist you.

SosSpecialRequestItem - How to Create a Special Request (Custom Artwork Upload) Item

Special Request items allow user upload of artwork outside the context of a templated product. One common example is a custom upload application where the user uploads a PDF for a front and back of a custom artwork product, or artwork in any other format. Uploads using SpecialRequestItem will show a preview of the front and back sides (first and second pages), if available.

To learn how custom jobs work for customers, please read our detailed overview elsewhere.

This item is different than a product for which you build a template or style - the Special Request Item is designed expressly to receive customer artwork or other files, and then allow the user to proceed with their order, passing that artwork on to you for evaluation / production.

When considering using Special Request Items in general, there are several different approaches for how to create items.

One approach involves the use of the new Quotes or Quotes Plus module. When using Quotes or Quotes Plus, you have the ability to set pricing options which are selectable at the beginning of the ordering session, and adjust the item price on the fly. These can be pricing based upon paper choices, ink choices, paper coating, or generally any selection that can alter the item price. Please read our documentation for Quotes here.

The non-Quotes approach is to design your catalog such that there are separate line items for each size / printing style / per unit cost you offer. For example, if you have a 4 x 6, 4/4 postcard product at 32 cents each and a 4 x 6 4/1 postcard at 30 cents each, you'd want to add these as separate items.

You can also create general items that do not fit a product category, but this precludes giving users a price/quote when ordering. Leave these items with zero cost and setup an order approval process to handle these.

[Caution]*tag*

The previous Item Form, named generic_gold, supported the use of *tag* as a viariable. The Form Editor no longer supports this variable.

Procedure 11.4. How to Create and Configure a Special Request Item

  1. On a Quotes or Quotes Plus site, there are a number of basic generic items that you can clone or alter. To start a brand new item, visit the Menu and use the Item Wizard to create a Generic Static Item. On the next page of the Item Wizard, change the Product Type to Cost based on pricing options (PriceConfigItem) and then name your product and continue with the wizard as you would normally. On a non-Quotes site, you'll want to change the Product Type to Custom - Artwork Upload (SosSpecialRequestItem).

  2. You may wish to upload a generic catalog image, showing some sample artwork so your user gets the idea of what they would be ordering here. You could include product dimensions (including bleed) in your thumbnail. Using Photoshop to create nice preview images can help your user find what they are looking for.

  3. On the form tab of the Item Wizard, enable a form_editor Item Form by choosing this option. We will use this form to allow the user to upload one or more artwork files. On the 'custom' tab you will see some other new fields that reference Special Request - configuring these is not necessary for routine configuration. Complete adding your item and return to the Menu.

  4. Allowing Users to Upload Artwork

    Now we need to build the custom Item Form so we can collect your user's artwork or other files. In the Menu Item Item Editor, edit your new item and then click the Item Form link. This will open the Form Editor Builder in a new window - our task is now to configure 1 or more user inputs for art upload or other input such as item name to use or user notes.

    There are two different file upload options available to you. The File Upload Document Button field, located in the Upload section, is simpler than the File Upload Button field, located in the Advanced section. The File Upload Button field provides you with more control, especially in restricting file types and color space. However, it cannot convert the file to a PDF.

    File Upload Document Button Field

    First, configure an artwork upload input: In your item form, add a new field. Expand the Upload section, and select File Upload Document Button for the field type. Enter a Variable Name of: sr_1front. Enter a Field Label, which will appear beside the field for the user, e.g. Upload your artwork: front

    Parts of the above naming are specific to the special features available with the Special Request item - namely: that the field name starts with 'sr_'. We add '1front' here on the first input to differentiate this file from a possible second file for the (optional) '2back' - which you can add as your second input, which you could call: sr_2back.

    [Caution]Caution

    If the variable for the file upload field does not begin with sr_, you will get the following error: No keys starting with sr_

    The SpecialRequest Item proofs shown to users always sort alphabetically based on this field name - this is why we label these fields with the preceding 1 and 2 - so that the front shows up first when the user proofs. You can have as many artwork components as you want for each SpecialRequest Item.

    Variable Names can be shared on your sites as long as they are using multi-imprint(shopping basket).

    If you enable Convert to PDF, we will send you both the original file uploaded and its PDF conversion.

    Enter the approximate width in points for the width and height of the document in the Bbox Width and Bbox Height fields respectively. (There are 72 points to the inch. An 8.5 x 11 document would be 612 x 792 points.)

    Enter the minimum and maximum number of pages in the converted document in the Min Pages and Max Pages fields respectively.

    Figure 12.13. File Upload Document Button Field for Special Request Item

    File Upload Document Button Field for Special Request Item


    File Upload Button Field

    The File Upload Button field provides you with more control, especially in restricting file types and color space. However, it cannot convert the file to a PDF.

    First, configure an artwork upload input: In your item form, add a new field. Expand the Advanced section, and select the File Upload button for the field type. Give the input the name Upload your artwork: front and a Variable Name of: sr_1front

    Parts of the above naming are specific to the special features available with the special request item - namely: that the field name starts with 'sr_'. We add '1front' here on the first input to differentiate this file from a possible second file for the (optional) '2back' - which you can add as your second input, which you could call: sr_2back.

    [Caution]Caution

    If the variable for the file upload field does not begin with sr_, you will get the following error: No keys starting with sr_

    The SpecialRequest Item proofs shown to users always sort alphabetically based on this field name - this is why we label these fields with the preceding 1 and 2 - so that the front shows up first when the user proofs. You can have as many artwork components as you want for each SpecialRequest Item.

    Variable Names can be shared on your sites as long as they are using multi-imprint(shopping basket).

    Select Use Popup Window.

    For Attach to Emails, make sure Vendor is checked. Checking this box is essential to having the customer artwork files delivered to your production department. You can also add them to the 'Approval' email template to aid with review.

    It is vital that you select Do not convert so the file is not converted upon upload.

    You may wish to add constraints to artwork size, resolution or file type(as show below) but in general we recommend adding All file types and color spaces.

    Figure 12.14. Custom artwork upload

    Custom artwork upload


  5. Allowing Users to Name their Own Items

    Users can be allowed the ability to actually label their product as they order. This helps on baskets sites as users can upload multiple custom jobs - labelling each one as they go - and then upon checkout will be able to see the names for each product, instead of Generic Product names like (Custom Item). To enable this, first create a single line text input, give it a Field Label of Name Your Project or a similar label, and give the field a Variable Name such as the one shown below: custom_longname

    Then, head to the custom tab of your item in Item Editor. Here, you'll see a field called Longname Fmt. You can use this field to determine what shows for the name of the item. For instance, to show the current Product Name, along with the name from field you created on your Item Form, enter this:

    %(longname)s - %(f.custom_longname)s

    If your product name in the catalog is 4 x 6 Postcard, and the user enters Sunshine Postcard into your name field on the form, then the item's name would now display as 4 x 6 Postcard- Sunshine Postcard on the proof page, in your basket, and through checkout.

  6. Allowing Users to Add Other Job Specs(non Quotes sites)

    For sites not using Quotes or Quotes Plus, you may optionally add other product configuration options such as paper stock or user notes. For example, you could create a drop-down list of paper stock options, or a checkbox to include uv coating. In Quotes and Quotes Plus, these options can be added in for user user selection to actually determine pricing for the job before artwork is uploaded. Please read our documentation for Quotes here.

  7. The last step is to add any custom field information to the Vendor Email template. Edit the Vendor Email in the Menu and activate the custom fields section. One at a time, your task will be to enter the Variable Names, using the full Variable Name based on the Item Forms you've built.

    For example, if your item is using the suggested field names above for artwork upload, you'll want to add fields in the Vendor Email for the artwork, so your production department can keep track of which files are linked to which items. In the custom fields section you would enter Field Labels such as Front Artwork and Back Artwork, and both Field Variable names, like this:

    Figure 12.15. Include custom fields

    Include custom fields


The information would show in your Vendor Email like this:

Figure 12.16. Sample Vendor Email

Sample Vendor Email


We recommend activating order approval and making your production department the Master Approver for all orders, so as to act as a gateway with regard to potential artwork issues from bad user artwork.

If you're not using the Quotes or Quotes Plus modules and have other options such as paper stock, you'll need to add those Variable Names in as well.

SosMultiSizeItem - Multi-Size Items (clothing, etc)

SosMultiSize Item is an item class designed to be used for items such as clothing that exist in several sizes, each of which can have it's own part number, inventory status and price.

Procedure 12.3. How to Create and Configure a "Multi-Size Item"

  1. Visit Item Editor and edit a product you wish to convert to have Multi-Size capabilities. Change the Item Type to "SosMultiSizeItem" and save. Then, go to the "Custom" link and look down to the special item fields, stored in the section headed "SosMultiSizeItem Fields".

  2. Multi-size items default with three sizes. Edit the existing sizes by simply adding or removing sizes from the size column to match your needs. If you run out of room in the grid, simply save and re-edit and more fields will be provided for you.

  3. If you wish to override the default Product Code for this item, enter a new code into the "prodcode" column for each size.

  4. Note that prices can be assigned to each price level, as can inventory levels. By default, when items run out of stock they are unable to be ordered until inventory is replenished via hand-editing this matrix.

  5. NOTE: It is necessary to replace your item Quantities (qtyspec) with a free entry option. Paste the code below into your Quantities before leaving the Item Editor interface. The value for 'size' indicates the number of characters the user is allowed to enter:

    
         {'default': 1, 'min': 1, 'size': 4, 'label': ''}
    
    

If you have questions about Multi-Size items, please contact support and we will be happy to assist you.

SosStockingItem - Inventory Controlled Items

SosStockingItem is an item class designed to be used for items linked to inventory control. Each product has its own inventory status and configuration.

This feature allows you to optionally show inventory "on hand" for each product to users while ordering, or to limit users to quantity on hand when ordering. Backorders are another option.

The available quanity can be shown to the user while ordering by enabling the 'compact list' mode in "Catalog Admin" menu item. When the user orders, you may elect to have this quantity automatically decrement so that inventory reflects actual amount on-hand. You can set a level at which the product is actually removed from the online ordering site or marked as "out of stock" to prevent users from ordering out-of-stock items. After an item as an "SosStockingItem" and re-editing this item, new fields will appear, giving you access to the inventory functions.

[Caution]Caution

When Inventory Items are created, they default to no inventory -- meaning that the amount of On Hand is not set and inventory is not tracked.  Only by setting a value for the On Hand is the inventory tracking feature activated. If you do not set an On Hand quantity, users will be allowed to place orders for the item and nothing will be deducted from its inventory.

Procedure 12.4. How to Create and Configure an Inventory Controlled Item (SosStockingItem)

  1. Visit Item Editor through your site's Menu and edit a product for which you enable inventory control capabilities. Change the Item Type to "SosStockingItem" and save. Next, simply re-edit that same item and scroll down to the special item fields, stored in the link labeled "custom".

  2. Each of your items under inventory control will have a wide variety of configuration options, enabled through the custom link in the Item Editor interface. To change an item's inventory settings, simply change the values in this form, then save changes to update this item. The various options are described below.

  3. Each size gets its own "On Hand" quantity, and the global item "On Hand" field is ignored by the system. Edit the Inventory "On Hand" using 'Item Editor'.

  4. EXPLANATION OF INVENTORY FIELDS (as shown in Item Editor):

    Figure 12.17. Item Inventory Configuration

    Item Inventory Configuration


    Currently On Hand: Appears for non Multi-Size items, this is a static field

    backorder: Leave blank to allow unlimited backorder; Enter 0 to not allow more than is in stock; enter a positive number to allow stuff to be backordered. Enter a negative number to keep at least that many in stock.

    bin_number: This is an internal field you can use to indicate where in the warehouse a particular 'pick and pack' item is found. Rarely used.

    buy_qtyspec: Per above, this is the "buy cost" for the item. Note that we do not have "buy" prices available for individual sub-items with Multi-Size items.

    condition_stock_level: This is the level of inventory at which you wish to show the product "unavailable". Some like to keep a few extra products 'on hand' in case orders come in through other mechanisms - nothing worse than taking an order for product that is not in stock! Best Practice: Enter 0. That means the item will show as out when the stock level reaches 0

    condition_unavail: This is the "unavailable text" to show once the inventory level stored in condition_stock_level (above) is hit - most use "out of stock" or "na" in this field.

    def_on_hand: Appears for multi-size items, set to 0. Ignore this setting.

    edit_on_hand: This is the field to use to edit the "On Hand" inventory for regular inventory items. For MultiSize items, you edit the inventories individually using the "on hand" field next to each particular size / configuration option.

    stock_tag: This allows you to share inventory between different items. Any items with the same stock_tag (or where stock_tag matches the item tag for an existing item) will have their inventory pooled.

    Change Email To: The email address to which inventory change notifications should be sent when an order is placed for an item with inventory. This is also the address that will be notified when "Managing Inventory", i.e. making inventory adjustments, using the Inventory link in the Item Editor, and the Notify checkbox has been enabled there for an item. Documentation for Managing Inventory can be found here.

SosRestockItem - Inventory Controlled Items

The SosRestockItem is an item class designed to increase inventory when a purchase is made.

The configuration of an SosRestockItem is very similar to an SosStockingItem. There are a few differences. Typically, the SosRestockItem will be used in conjunction with an SosStockingItem to replenish the SosStockingItem's inventory.

The purchase of a Restock item can INCREASE inventory for the linked Stocking item by the amount purchased. When you edit the Restock item (via the Item Editor) and go to the Custom link, there is a stock_tag field. This is where you can enter the same stock_tag used for the Stocking item so it gets re-stocked when the Restock item is purchased. The stock_tag field ties the Stocking item's inventory and the Restocking item's inventory together.

In some situations, you may not want to have the inventory replenished until after the order for the Restock item has been produced. In that case, there is a special behavior flag you can disable named "will_increment". This flag is edited using the "Custom" link that can be found when you edit a Restock item using the Item Editor. When will_increment is enabled, the Restock item instantly re-stocks the linked inventory item by the amount ordered.

If will_increment is disabled, you will need to manually update the inventory for the linked Stocking item after the Restock item is ordered. You will be notified that the Restock item was ordered via the Vendor email.

Restock items work backwards from normal inventory items. Normal Stocking items can be made non-orderable when inventory is low. Restock items can be configured to not be orderable when inventory levels are high. To override this behavior, edit the Restock item via the Item Editor and go to the Custom link. In the condition_stock_level field, enter a number larger than you will ever have on hand (for the Stocking item) and save. The Restock item will then be orderable by users at all times, even when the inventory for the linked Stocking item is high. If the condition_stock_level is set too low, the Restock item may not be orderable because the Stocking and Restock items are linked together through the stock_tag.

SosBundleItem - How to Configure Kitted or Bundled Items

SosBundleItem is an item class designed to be used for items such as kits that consist of multiple sub-items. In other words, a bundle item will allow the user to order a single item that includes other items.

Sub-items inside a bundle can be hidden from users, or can be shown for "a la carte" selection.

Sub-items can be linked to the master item for quantity selection, or your users can choose quantities for each sub-item in the kit.

You can also create bundles that include multiple instances of the same item.

Bundles that contain optional subitems that have inventory will show those items as out-of-stock if there is not sufficient inventory to order.

Links to bundles on shipping, approval, and basket view allow editing bundle items as a group. This is useful when bundles include variable items that depend on each other's item forms.

Procedure 12.5. Basic Steps to Create and Configure a Bundle Item

  1. Visit Item Editor and edit a product you wish to convert to be the master "Bundle Item" - or create a new "Static" item with Item Wizard. Change the Product Type to "SosBundleItem" and save. Next, you will need to edit that same item and click on the "custom" link to access the special fields needed to configure the items to be incorporated into the bundle.

  2. The Bundled Tags fields control which items are in the bundle. Enter all of the PageDNA itme tags to be included in the Bundled Tags section, one item tag per text input. The item tag for the bundle item itself may also need to be listed (see "Bundled Tags" below). If you need more tags, save and more blank fields will be created automatically.

    Sub-items can exist in multiple bundles. So, you don't have to create additional sub-items if you need them to appear in more than one bundle.

  3. One option for bundled items is the ability to have a single quantity selection for the whole bundle. There is a checkbox beside Single Qtyspec to enable the option to only use a single quantity. This will present users with a single quantity option upon checkout. It will show a quantity for the first item and "same as ablove" for the other items. If it is not enabled, each sub-item in the bundle will be presented to the user for quantity selection.

  4. If you edit each of the sub-items; edit their display_info and set their Product Visability to 'Hide', they will not be visible during an ordering session for a user outside of the bundle.

[Caution]Real Time Shipping for Bundled or Kitted Items

If you are using Real Time Shipping for bundled or kitted items, it is important to know that the bundle is "stripped" from the order by the time the user gets to the Shipping Page so that all that remains are the individual items that comprise the bundle. It is important that you DO NOT assign a weight to the bundle and that you DO assign a weight to the individual items. No item should ever have a weight less than 1 pound per thousand.

Bundle Item Parameters or Options

Many parameters are available to control how a bundle behaves. The options listed below are all accessed in the Custom Page when editing an "SosBundleItem" (Bundle Item).

Display Subitems Checkbox When enabled, this gives users the ability to choose sub-items they want to order as part of their "bundle" by way of checkboxes on the Catalog Page. The items and their checkboxes will appear below the name of the bundle item.

Bundled Tags Enter a list of tags to be included in the bundle. Important: list the 'tag' for the bundle itself (the item you are editing) as the first item in the list - in this example the tag for the bundle item is afm-std-kit . Listing the 'tag' for the bundle is needed for "Single Qtyspec" to work (see below).

[Tip]Locating Item Tags

You can find the tag for an item in the drop down list at the top of the Item Editor... it appears after the name of the product in square brackets.

Bundle Mandatory Tags Enter tags for items that are always included in the bundle. This applies only when using "Display Subitems". This allows you to force some items to be included in a bundle - even when other components of the bundle may be included or removed.

Bundle Default Tags Items that are included by default when using Display Subitems. This pre-checks, or preselects the checkboxes for these items so the user does not have to enable their checkboxes for inclusion in their order.

Bundle Choice Tags This feature lets you create a "multi-select" bundle. For example, you could allow the user to select either a notepad and a mug OR a notepad and a desk fan.

There are three fields that are available by default. Enter one item tag per field and save the Custom Page. After you save, additional fields will become available for the items in the first choice with a gold rule separating three new fields for the items for the second choice. More fields for an additional choice will be added after you save each bundle choice.

Single Qtyspec This popular option forces all sub-items to use the same "quantity specification" (or qtyspec) as the bundle - so the user cannot choose or change the quantities for the sub-items in the bundle. The user will only be able to change the quantity for the bundle itself.

Single Qtyspec Keep price This applies when Single Qtyspec is enabled. This option allows the pricing to "bubble up" from the sub-items, versus looking to the bundle itself for the price.

Single Qtyspec Exclude Tags This applies when Single Qtyspec is enabled. Enter tags, separated by commas, that are to be excluded from the "single input" pricing/quantity selection, and will allow the user to enter a quantity for these excluded items.

Filter Division This is an "expert level" feature and requires planning, especially in regard to Division tags, item tags, filenaming conventions and style configuration for how files will be changed based on Division, before implementing.

The Filter Division checkbox specifies whether the bundle respects your site's Divisions filtering, i.e. the filtering of items in the Catalog by division.

Enabling Filter Division allows you to create one bundle item with sub-items associated with different divisions. When the user places an order for the bundle item, they will only see the sub-items specific to their division.

Filter Division is disabled by default, which forces the bundle's sub-items to acquire the Divisions settings of the bundle item. The assumption is that when you create a bundle and make it available to a division, you would want all its sub-items to also be available.

[Caution]Troubleshooting Filter Division

Enabling Filter Division can lead to some difficulty solving problems in determining why items are, or are not in an order.

Single Prodcode Enabling this will pass the Product Code/SKU for the bundle item to all the bundle's sub-items. The Product Code/SKU field can be found by clicking on the product_info link when you edit an item.

Single Prodcode Exclude Tags This applies when Single Prodcode is enabled. Enter tags, separated by commas, that are to be excluded from having the bundle item's Product Code/SKU applied to them.

Figure 12.18. Bundle Options

Bundle Options


Personal Forms as they relate to Bundle Items

NO form (whether a Personal form or a custom item form (generic gold, form editor, shared form, etc) attached to the bundle item itself will work. Instead, forms need to be linked to a bundle's components, or sub-items. This is due to the fact that when the user advances past the Catalog Page, the bundle "wrapper" is removed so the individual sub-items can be dealt with as needed during the ordering process..

To get the correct Peronal form to appear, it will need to be attached to one of the bundle's sub-items. Personal forms are in a hierarchy. If more than one Personal form is linked to the bundle's sub-items the bundle will use the personal form that sits highest in the list in Multiple Personal Feature ( view docs on this feature ).

Figure 12.19. Here's an example of what you may see in Multiple Personal Feature:

Here's an example of what you may see in Multiple Personal Feature:


In this setup, personal (base) is the form that will show (if any items are using it). You can set Personal Form precedence by moving the one you need to the top of the list.

If you need more inputs than are on any single form, you can try this:

First, clone one item that is always in the bundle. Then use the Multiple Personal Feature to create a new Personal Page using all the fields you need for all items in the bundle, and link the new Personal Page to the cloned item. Replace the "original" item in the bundle with the cloned version of it that is using the complete form. This should give you all the inputs you need.

If you have questions about Bundle items, please contact PageDNA Support and we will be happy to assist you.

Multi-Page Variable Items

Increasingly, customers need products that are a set of pages - such as a brochure. Some of these pages may be "variable" - meaning they vary from order to order... a great example would be having an address, logo - and possibly other contact information such as a photo and name of a sales rep - on the back of a presentation folder.

The previous implementation involved creating an SosBundleItem (A "kit" or bundled item) in PageDNA, with the bundles being static/inventory or variable items... or more commonly sets of "BackItems" - two sided variable items - decreasing the number of items needed in the bundle.

While this works, we've heard from customers and understood this is a lot of work for administrators and customers may be confused seeing a 'set' of items in their basket. We are working on improvements. This document explains the steps to setup our new implementation - SosMultiPageStaticItem - making this better all around.

The new item type allows the previews show one small thumbnail per page and a link to view the entire PDF. A single file is sent to production.

Steps to set up a Multi-Page Item:

1. Edit the item in the Item Editor, select the product_info link and change the Product Type to SosMultiPageStaticItem; see screenshot below.

Figure 12.20. Desired Product Type Setting

Desired Product Type Setting


2. Split the PDF files into separate pages.

3. For static pages, create a PDF in the con/ directory. eg, page1-7 shown below. Upload these using File Uploader.

4. For variable pages, create a style. Use an photo block (EPSWORD) for the background.

5. In Custom Tab, use the "RecipeFileSelector" for Fileselector. (See screenshot)

Then choose a series of StaticFileSelector, StyleGeneratedFileSelector, StaticFileSelector etc. depending on the mix of static/dynamic pages you need. Each StaticFileSelector may create multiple pages. For instance, I could have a StaticFileSelector with 5 files and a StyleGeneratedFileSelector with the style I created for page 6.

6. Copy the other options for fileinfoprovider and filetransformer - as shown in the screenshots below:

Figure 12.21. Fileinfoprovider and Fileselector

Fileinfoprovider and Fileselector


Figure 12.22. Example Configuration

Example Configuration


7. Set Pagesize to your proper page size in points.

8. Set Preview Cols for the number of columns you want the pages to display in.

9. Set Thumbnail Percentage to the percentage you would the like the pages to proof. The larger the percentage, and the more pages you have, the slower the item will proof.

Allowing user choice of static pages:

1. Upload PDF files to be used to the con/ directory, using File Uploader. Filenames cannot contain any spaces.

2. Make note of the file names. Copying and pasting is best. Filenames are case sensitive.

Figure 12.23. PDF files in con/ Directory

PDF files in con/ Directory


3. For one (or more) of your Fileselectors:, choose BasicFileSelector.

4. Enter a variable into the Field field that you will use on the form to select a file.

5. Leave Field Transform field as the default value to enable the user to select from PDF's found in the con/ directory.

Figure 12.24. Basicfileselector

Basicfileselector


6. Create a Drop-down list type field on an input form(Item or Shared form) to allow user selection, using the Variable Name you created for Field above.

7. Under Options, create the user selections, with file names from the con/ directory on the left hand side of a pipe, and the names shown to the user in the drop-down on the right hand side of the pipe, see screenshot. The values on the left need to match the file names exactly.

Figure 12.25. Drop-Down List Setup

Drop-Down List Setup


Note on Changing Item Types

Occassionally you may need to change the item type for existing item on a live site. When making changes like this, it is important to note that the PageDNA system stores "re-orders" using the old item type - so if a user re-orders after the item type has been changed, production may get an order having the wrong properties. For example, a reorder for an item that was formerly one-sided but now has two sides would be sent as a single sided order.

The most elegant way to handle this is to create the new item using a new "tag", and then to use the "replaces" feature to link the new item to re-orders for the old item, lastly removing the previous item from the catalog.

In the example below, we are converting a business card (sample tag name: 'bc') from a single sided variable item (SosItem) into a two-sided product (SosBackItem) with a new tag ('bc_new'):

Procedure 12.6. How to change Item Type and ensure re-orders link to new item type:

  1. Clone the old envelope using the Item Wizard. Do not change information except for: a) changing item type to SosBackItem b) making a new tag ( eg: add "_new" to the old tag - in this case we changed 'bc' to 'bc_new' ) c) make this item "hidden" while we make the changes needed for the new item (new styles, etc), leaving the old item intact on the site for a while longer if possible.

  2. Next, work on the styles for front and back, test, etc. In this case, we would jneed to create a new style for the back of the new product (bc_new_back.sty) and then would want to test carefully to make sure it is working on the site as we intend.

  3. Once ready to launch the new two sided envelope: a) delete the old item from the item list (record the tag carefully before doing so) b) edit the new two-sided item: in the 'custom' tab of the Item Editor, enter the old tag into one of the 'replaces' fields and save (this ensures that reorders point to the new item) c) make the new product visible to users

  4. Test the site carefully.

Custom Item Forms

PageDNA’s technology provides a mechanism by which you can create a custom form for a particular item. This form appears if and only if a particular item is being ordered, and is appended to the Imprint form. Common examples of applications of custom forms are Translation or Backside options for Business Cards, Sublogo forms by which users can choose 'certification logos' for products, and lastly any variable imprint items requiring fields not included in the core PageDNA 'personal' form.

One more helpful suggestion: if you define custom fields in your item forms which need to be passed to Style Files, be sure to define these variables in the "Order" tab of the style (in Style Editor Gold). Failure to define custom variables will cause a fatal error upon preview. The "Order" section of your style acts as the 'bus' between the form and the style - any form variable you wish to reference if your style should be defined in this section.

A recently added feature will automatically add these fields to the "Order" tab of your style automatically, but only when editing and saving the style.

To enable a custom form for an item, first 'edit' the Item using the Item Editor. Then, click the 'form' link and select Form Editor for an Item Form or select a form from the Shared Item Form drop-down list, or create a new Shared Item Form and save. Form options are described below - 'Form Editor' is the most common selection for most purposes. You may also wish to explore 'translation' and 'sublogo' forms if you have needs in this space. Contact PageDNA Support for help with these.

After saving your item, you will see a link to item_form, which you can use to edit it. Or, you can return to the Menu and you will see a new menu option named "List of Item/Shared Forms" under the "Site Content" section of the Menu. The Item Form will be titled something similar to "item_tag form editor".

A list of different form types available with a brief description and instructions is provided elsewhere, in the section of our documentation dealing with the Imprint form.

Shared Section Forms

The Shared Section Forms coverter converts all forms on a site from their various types - Item, Shared Item, Personal, etc - to shared section forms, which are pieces of forms that can be mixed and matched and reordered by any item on the site.

Intermix portions of the personal page, such as the address list section with custom items forms or multiple item forms from many different items in any order on any item. If you would like to try out shared section forms risk free, clone your storefront and give it a whirl.

Figure 12.26. Section Forms

Section Forms


The conversion process can run into errors during conversion, issues will be shown in a highlifghted list.

Figure 12.27. Sample Errors

Sample Errors


Guide to Item Quantities and Pricing

Welcome to the guide for how to configure item quantities and pricing on your site. Each item on your site can have it's own pricing configuration, which is entered in the quantity editor, available in both the Item Editor (Quantities tab) and the Item Wizard (Quantities step). The quantity configuration use to be entered as a bit of 'code' telling the system how users are allowed to select quantities, as well as pricing information. This old UI is still in place for rare and legacy quantity configurations.

It is required that every item has a quantity specification (referred to in our system as the 'qtyspec'). This is configured in the first step of the Item Wizard. You can either choose to show/store prices on your site or not, but it is recommended that you be consistent across all items in your site to prevent user confusion when ordering. Ask yourself if you want to show prices to your users OR hide prices from users but store them in the system for reports. If the answer to either question is 'yes', please use the "WITH PRICING" guide.

Item Quantities - NO PRICING Shown or Stored

Below in bold please note several common configurations, with examples showing how to configure the quantities of your items that don't require pricing. Note that you can select the required quantity editor from the drop-down list.

discrete list of quantities - no pricing shown or stores

Assume you want allow the user to select from a quantity of 250, 500 or 1000 from a Drop-down List presented to the user. You use the "Drop-down list" editor as shown in the next screen shot:

Figure 13.1. Drop-down list, no pricing

Drop-down list, no pricing


You fill in the numbers of the list in the table. Delete a row by clicking the button with the minus and add a row with the button with the plus. Blank input boxes at the end of the list are not saved.

You will see a check box "Allow User to Enter Other Quantity". When this check box is checked, the user can select a price but also enter a quantity in an input box.

Finally, make sure you have the "No Prices" state of the editor. If not the wrong quantity configuration is stored in the system.

[Note]Note

Checking the box "Allow User to Enter Other Quantity" makes a quantity configuration that is internally known as "OtherListQtySpec".

single quantity only - no pricing

The user will only be allowed to order in a single quantity. For instance a name badge might be "1" or business cards might be "500. This is a entered as a list one in the "Drop-down list" editor.

free-text input (let the user type a quantity in)

If you wish to allow the user to type their own quantity into a free-entry text field, you use the "Free-text input editor", as depicted in the screen shot below:

Figure 13.2. Free-test input, no pricing

Free-test input, no pricing


Let us discuss the above example.

  • The triplet Minimum, Maximum and Quantity Step Size will determine whether the user input is valid. Let's say you enter Minimum: 10, Maximum: 50 and for Quantity must be divisible by: 10. Then the user can only enter one of 10, 20, 30, 40, 50.

  • Default: enter the number that you want to be pre-filled into the input box the user sees.

  • Size: this is the size of the text box the user types in. By default this is set to 4 positions, but generally you want to make the 'size' of your free-input box big enough to handle most typical orders. The user can type in more the size is set to.

Again, make sure you have the "No Pricing" state of the editor.

Item Quantities WITH PRICING

Drop-down list of quantities - shown with prices

The PageDNA system can store prices for items, optionally hiding them from the user, useful for accounting and billing purposes. Let's first look at the situation where prices are shown:

Figure 13.3. Drop-down list with prices (prices shown)

Drop-down list with prices (prices shown)


This setup as shown in the figure above would show the end user three available quantities, displayed with a price, as 250 - $20.00', '500 - $30.00', and '1000 - $50.00'. The customer would select the quantity and the price for the product in the "Choose Quantities" section of the Shipping page.

You see a number of check boxes. This is what they mean:

  • Show Price on Storefront: in this example we want to show the price to the user, so this box is checked.

  • Allow User to Enter Other Quantity, we already came across this setting in the section about "No prices". It allows the user to enter a quantity in a input box. See an example below.

  • Show Calculate Button will show the ordering user a calculate button so that she can see what the price is of the user entered quantity.

Make sure the have "Sell Prices" selected as the state of the quantities editors.

Drop-down list of quantities - hidden prices

PageDNA offers many exotic Quantity Specification types that can accommodate elaborate requirements - one example is hidden prices. In this case, you wish to store prices (for invoicing purposes using Reports, perhaps) but not show them to the user. This is accomplished using the same editor as above, but un checking the Show Price on Storefront check box, as shown in the figure below:

Figure 13.4. Drop-down list hidden prices

Drop-down list hidden prices


This example would have three quantity options - 250, 500 and 1000... prices would be stored in the Orders and Items databases - but not shown to users. The prices would be - in this case - $20.00 for 250, $30.00 for 500 and $50.00 for 1000.

"Sell Prices" must selected as the state of the quantities editors in order to save the right configuration for this example.

free-text input, fixed price

Here is an example that shows free-text input with a fixed price:

Figure 13.5. Free-free text input, flat price

Free-free text input, flat price


The above example would create a text input where the user types the quantities... the default quantity will be '1' (already typed in, but they can change it) and the maximum quantity allowed with be 20. The cost of this product above is $13.48 per item ordered.

free-text input, stair stepped pricing

Following is an example of a "qtyspec" (Quantity/Price Specification) for the scenario where price varies at certain quantities, and we want to give the user the ability to enter their quantity as a plain-text input typed into a field on the "shipping" page.

In the example qtyspec below, this item drops in price at certain quantity levels: 500, 1000, and 5000:

Figure 13.6. Free-text input, stair step pricing

Free-text input, stair step pricing


PLEASE NOTE: older sites (shipping page last modified before mid-2004) may need you to re-save the shipping template for this type of pricing specification to work. The symptom of an older page would be a fatal error when items with the above quantity definition is used, so check the "shipping" page on your site to be sure it works when using this format by placing a test order all the way to completion.

drop-down list with free-text input option and 'calculate' button

We can allow the user to choose from a list of quantities or type in their own price, click a button, and view the calculated price in a pop-up window. This is accomplished with the "Drop-down editor:

Figure 13.7. Drop-down list allow other and show calculate button

Drop-down list allow other and show calculate button


For the example above, the price for users ordering between 1 and 3500 count is 35 cents each. Note that we have entered $0.35 ea * 3500 = $1225 as the price level for 3500. All quantities at or below this break will cost $0.35 each. The next price break is 3501-5000 at $0.30 ea. We enter the price for 5000 * $0.30 for this break, or $1500. 10001-49999 cost $0.20 each and the 50000+ unit cost $0.10 each.

[Note]Note

When "Allow User to Enter Other Quantity" is checked, the user is allowed to enter a quantity in the provided box. Although the minimum value the user is allowed to enter cannot be lower then the minimum value in the list, the maximum value in the list value is not enforced.

Users would see this interface when checking out. They can either select a quantity from the list:

Figure 13.8. Tiered Pricing, User Choosing Standard Pricing Level in Drop-Down

Tiered Pricing, User Choosing Standard Pricing Level in Drop-Down


...or they could type a quantity into the provided box and click the "Calculate" button to see the price appear in a pop-up window:

Figure 13.9. Tiered Pricing, User Choosing Custom Price and Clicking Calculate Button for Quote

Tiered Pricing, User Choosing Custom Price and Clicking Calculate Button for Quote


You may also elect to completely hide the list of price break points. To do this, change hide_qty_list to 1 in the example above. When using this option, you may find that the user is forced to order more than the lowest price break provided. For that reason, you may wish to enter a price break for 1 count (or your lowest quantity orderable) when using this option.

Figure 13.10. Tiered Pricing, Hidden List

Tiered Pricing, Hidden List


Free entry of prices

If you want your users to enter any item prices (for example, salespeople ordering promotion merchandise on behalf of clients, where the salespeople have authority to charge pretty much whatever they want), you can use the "Legacy Code input" editor. See more on this "Legacy Code input" editor in the following section: "Legacy Code Input for Quantities".. This editor is available for rare or exotic quantity specifications. Existing exotic quantity specs not covered by the other editors are automatically opened in tis code editor. For entering new exotic quantity specs, like in this example you need to enable this in the "Site Variables" menu. The code editor looks like this:

Figure 13.11. Legacy code editor

Legacy code editor


Back to the example, enter this in the code editor:

{'class': 'UserPriceQtySpec', 
'delegate': {'price': 10.0, 'label': '', 'size': 4}, 
'label': ''}

This will give you a Shipping Page that looks something like this:

Figure 13.12. Free entry of item prices

Free entry of item prices


Notice how the price defaults to the price listed in the qtyspec -- the user can manually change that.

Item Quantities with buy (wholes sale) and sell prices

A capability worth mentioning is that the system can store retail as well as WHOLESALE or "buy" prices. This is useful for many scenarios, including when Distributors desire to run a report and view not only what was charged to the customer, but how much money they owe their suppliers.

You get the right editors by selecting the "Buy & Sell Prices". After that, it mostly work as described in the Item Quantities WITH PRICING section, but with added input for a buy price:

Figure 13.13. Drop-down list with price and buy price

Drop-down list with price and buy price


[Note]Note

If you use prices on your site, you may wish to enable the 'Review' template, which appears after the shipping page. The price for the selected quantity is shown next to the product, and products are totaled... You can even elect to charge tax or add rush charges to the fee. See "Review Page" for more information. Credit card sites replace this step with the payment collection step.

[Note]Note

Internally Buy Prices are stored using a special field called "buy_qtyspec", available in the "custom" tab of the Item Editor. Now the new quantity editors are available this field is obsolete and will be remove in the near future.

In case you want to use buy prices but don't want to show sell prices, you can do that in two ways:

  1. Uncleck the "Show Price on Storefront" check box. This still allows you to enter prices in the "Sell Price" column

  2. Or you can delete all prices in the "Sell Price" column (or not entering anythng in the "Sell Price" column in case you started with quantities only). This looks like the following screen shot:

    Figure 13.14. Drop-down list with buy price and no sell price

    Drop-down list with buy price and no sell price


Legacy Code Input for Quantities

This code editor is almost identical to the old way of entering quantity specifications. By default the code editor is only available when a quantity specification is not supported by one of the other editors, so the code editor is for the more exotic quantity specifications. To enable the code editor, i.e. have it always available in the quantity editor list, you need to go to "Site Variables" in the menu and check the box in from of "Show code input for editing quantities? ".

For instance if you want to allow users to input a quantity and show a calculate button but hide the select list, then you need the code editor and you would do something like the following example:

Figure 13.15. Code editor with 'other' and hide drop-down list

Code editor with 'other' and hide drop-down list


In the example above the code editor behaves as did the old way of entering quantity specifications.

The most important difference is that you cannot use something like "1-25" to enter a long list of quantities, 1 to 25 in this example. However in it's place came a function, "start_stop_step", that allows you to do the same and more. Let's look at some examples of what you can do now:

start_stop_step(1, 25)                   # this makes a list of 1 to 25 (including 25)
start_stop_step(5, 25, step=5)           # this makes a list of 5 to 25 with step 5, i.e. 5, 10, 15, 20, 25
start_stop_step(1, 3, unit_price=0.25)   # in item list it looks like: [(1, '1 - $0.25'), (2, '2 - $0.50'), (3, '3 - $0.75')]

# you can even set the currency:
start_stop_step(1, 3, unit_price=0.25, currency_formatter=CurrencyFormatter(symbol='€'))

In short, the above examples show you can make a long list with and without prices and set the currency in the process. Note that the currency defaults to '$'. Normally you will want to use the regular editors, but for making really long lists this can be a time saver. See below the code editor in action with the currency formatter:

Figure 13.16. Code editor with start_stop_step function

Code editor with start_stop_step function


Item Wizard

Using the Item Wizard

The Item Wizard can be found under the Site Content menu of the Storefront Menu, and is used to add items or clone styles in a step-by-step process. With it you can create new items and then configure product information, pricing, style, and catalog previews. Most of the steps of the Item Wizard are also available individually in the Item Editor, which is the best way to edit an item that has already been added to your site. Depending on the specific item type you select in step 1, some of the subsequent steps may be skipped by the system since they are not applicable.

There is a video tour of the Item Wizard that you an watch by clicking here.

Item Creation

Use this page to select the item type you want to add. You can choose the type of item you want to build by clicking on the "Change" link and selecting from the list of types provided in the pop up window. At the top of the pop up window you can filter the list of available item types using the dropdown menu. That makes it easier to find the specific item type you are looking for or to find a lesser known item types by selecting the option to show all. To learn about the different items types, you can read our Help document here .

You must provide an unique tag for your item before proceeding. Setting the catalog tab and visibility is optional at this point. You can set these options at a later point.

When you select your item type and advance to the next step, your item will be created right away. Each of the remaining steps will assist you in the configuration of the item.

Figure 14.1. Item Creation

Item Creation


Figure 14.2. Choosing The Item Type

Choosing The Item Type


Product Info

Use this page to enter item information like the name and tag.

Product Name: The name of the item displayed to the customer. Use a clear and discriptive name.
Item Tag: An identifier for the item. This must be unique. You may only use numbers, letters, and the underscore. No spaces or other characters are allowed.
Product Code/SKU: This an identifier your company can use to track the item. It's optional and can be displayed in the email sent by PageDNA.
Unit Display:This is how the individual item will be listed in the catalog or on the Shipping Page next to the quantity, such as "cards" for business cards, or "sheets" for letterhead.
Unit Code: An optional code for third party vendors or manufacturers that can be used as an identifier.
Weight: Used for real-time shipping cost calculation.
Manufacturer: Specifies which manufacturer will receive the orders for this item. This list can be edited in the Manufacturer Setup menu.

Figure 14.3. Product Info

Product Info


Quantities

Use this page to enter your quantity and pricing information for the item. You can choose to offer items with no price, with quantity and price, or with buy and sell price. Buy and sell prices can be useful for tracking your own costs, or for internal billing purposes when a distributor is involved. The buy price is available in the Reports section. In all three cases you can also choose to offer a dropdown list the customer can select from or allow them a free text entry field to enter their own quantity value.

See our Guide to Item Quantities and Pricing for a comprehensive guide to item quantity and pricing configuration.

Figure 14.4. Quantities

Quantities


Style Chooser

Use this page to select which style to use for the item. A style represents any variable-imprint data for an item. From this step, you can choose to either create a new style, copy an existing style, or (in rare cases) skip the style building step all-together.

By default, the option to use the Visual Style Editor (VSE) is selected. In some instances you may wish to uncheck this box so that you can use the Style Editor Gold (SEG) interface. The SEG is a strictly code based editor and is best suited for certain advanced builders or tasks.

To use an exsting style, select that radio button and choose the style from the dropdown list.

Figure 14.5. Choose a Style

Choose a Style


Artwork Upload

Use the artwork upload page to send the files necessary to build your style. A style represents three aspects of a printed piece:

The variable data imprint. e.g. name, title, address.
Any static design to be printed at the same time as the variable data.
Any master-printed material. This might be a company logo which is four-color, so is printed in bulk ahead of time.

To help you properly prepare your artwork for use with the PageDNA EGG (Excellent Graphics Grabber) tool, we've provided both a written document and video tutorial on the process. You can find the links to those below. We suggest you review that information and then double check your artwork before continuing beyond this step.

Figure 14.6. EPS Egg Upload

EPS Egg Upload


Upon the successful upload and processing of your artwork by the EGG, you'll pre presented with a success message. If there are any errors, those will be listed. Click the back button in the Item Wizard, correct the errors in your artwork, and repeat the upload process until you get the success message.

Block Editor

The Block Editor step allows you to make edits and adjustments to the item's style at this point.

PageDNA Support considers it a Best Practice to not edit the style at this point. If you make changes here and for some reason the Item Wizard encounters an errorat this point, those changes could be lost. Instead we suggest that you finish working through the Item Wizard, and then go back using the Item Editor to make changes to the style. Our Video Tutorial section has several videos on how to use the Item Editor and Visual Style Editor. You can find those here.

Figure 14.7. Block Editor

Block Editor


Style Preview

Use the Style Preview page to view and edit the preview, or proof, that will be displayed in an ordering session for a variable item. Typically a business card will have only one preview image of the entire item. Larger items may have several images that zoom in on different parts of the item.

Display Info

The Display Info page allows you to configure additional information about how your item will be displayed in the catalog. Again, these are all also editable from the Item Editor after the item had been created with the Item Wizard.

Catalog Note: This is a short message that will be displayed immediately following the Product Name in the catalog.
Catalog Details: This spaces is for a longer note to be displayed in the catalog to help customers ensure they are selecting the right product.
Catalog Image Link: If you want to link to an external catalog image for the catalog preview, you can enter it here.
Tab: Used to set what tab of the catalog will be displayed on. You can also create new tabs here. Tabs can also be controled in the Tab Manager.
Product Visibility: Here you can control if the item is visible or not available. This is useful for hiding items that will have a future availability, or if you are building an item on a live site.
Password: If an item password is required to order this Item, enter it here. Leave blank if no password required.

Figure 14.8. Display Info

Display Info


Catalog Preview

Use the Catalog Preview page to upload an image to be used in the catalog view. The uploaded image must be a web ready JPG or GIF which is no larger than 200x200 pixels and RGB. Catalog preivew images can also be added in the Item Editor and from the gold box links of the Storefront at the proof step in an ordering session.

Figure 14.9. Catalog Preview Image

Catalog Preview Image


Form

If you've created an item that will contain variable imprint information, you'll be presented with the Form step. Here you can select what Item, Personal, or Shared form you want the item to use. If you choose not to assign a form at this point, you can do so later using the Item Editor and Personal Form page.

Figure 14.10. Form Selection

Form Selection


Custom Item Fields

This page handles the custom fields associated with the various Item Types possible on a site. This page looks different depending on which type of item you are creating. For more detailed information, search for Item Types in our Help docs.You can set the shipping/mailing methods needed for the item here, or you can set them in the Shipping Rate Editor and Mail List Setup and Management.

Figure 14.11. Custom Item Fields

Custom Item Fields


Meta Data

The fields in the Meta Data section (shown below) allow meta data to be calculated for the order and then presented on the Review Page, in order emails and in manufacturer transports.

The data is grouped into sections. Multiple sections can be added, click [+] below the last field on the left to add more sections. "Header" should be the title of a section such as "Finishing Details". The "Data" area starts with 3 rows of information. After filling these in, click Save to add more fields for the section. Within the "Data" area, the "Key" is the title or human-readable text explaining the purpose of the entry. The "Type" is either "Static", meaning the text entered into the field to the right will be used directly as the value, or "Form Variable", in which case a variable name such as "card_title1" should be entered (without the quotes) into the field to the right. In both cases, if the resulting value is blank, then the Key will not be included in the order's meta data.

Figure 14.12. Meta Data Fields

Meta Data Fields


Confirmation

Use the Confirmation page to review the most important aspects of your new item. If you need to make changes, you can return to any of the previous steps in the wizard (except for the first step) and make your changes, or simply use the Item Editor. Generally, using the Item Editor is the preferred practice.

Figure 14.13. Confirmation Step

Confirmation Step


Overview of Style Editor Gold

This menu item - found under "Site Content" in the menu - provides access to the Style Editor Gold application, so you can edit the style files for your account. Style Editor Gold is covered in PageDNA Style Building, see that document for more information.

About PageDNA Web Templates

The ordering process in our sites takes place over several discrete steps. The user follows a linear journey through the ordering process by stepping though these pages one at a time. Progress is shown in the top navigation bar, moving from left to right as the user completes each order.

Most menu items under the "Ordering Pages" category are devoted to editing the content, input fields and behavior of a page within the ordering site. These menu items share similar characteristics, but each edits a separate part of the workflow.

When you first enter an "Ordering Pages" Menu item you will be presented with a page filled with checkboxes and text input fields, arranged into functional groups. Almost every aspect of your ordering site can be configured using these controls.

Once you have made any necessary configuration changes on a particular "Ordering Pages" menu item and click the "Save Changes" button, you will see a message stating that "Changes were applied". You can then "Edit Again", or click "Back to Menu" to move on to your next task.

[Tip]Site Building Tip

Experienced site builders generally keep two browser windows open; one with the "Menu" open and the other with the ordering site open to the page being edited. After changes are made in the "Menu" window, the ordering site in the other window can simply be refreshed or ‘reloaded’ to see the changes immediately take effect on the site. Once you are done with a page, you simply move to the next page in the ordering process and begin editing the new templates in the "Menu" window – continuing in this fashion until you are done building your site.

We encourage you to save often and experiment with the different options available. If you need a custom feature – don’t despair. Contact us directly with your feature request. The product has evolved to this point with help from partners such as yourself, and your ongoing feedback is paramount to our joint continued success.

If you are logged into the Hub or the site's menu, you can enter an ordering session with menu access. You will see links to menu items specific to each page you are viewing. You can edit text areas without opening the webpage template. Menu users will see a toggle in the menu bar at the top of the page to "Edit Messages" and "Stop Editing" so you can edit text areas without having to open the webpage template.

Figure 16.1. "Select Edit Messages" to Edit Text on the Page

"Select Edit Messages" to Edit Text on the Page


Figure 16.2. "Stop Editing" to Turn Off Message Editing

"Stop Editing" to Turn Off Message Editing


When messages are being edited, a gold dotted line will show around the message text. Hovering over editable text with the mouse will show a "edit" link to edit that message.

Figure 16.3. Text Area with Message Editing Enabled

Text Area with Message Editing Enabled


Empty messages will show with a "(add text)" indicator.

Figure 16.4. Empty Text Area when Editing Messages

Empty Text Area when Editing Messages


Button text is editable using the same mechanism as long as the buttons are not images.

Locked Templates.

Occassionall you may see an alert stating that the menu item is ‘locked’. This designation stems from the fact that the template has been modified to include custom programming, most likely through a request you or another site builder made. You can still edit the menu item but your changes will not affect the site, as the "lock" protects the custom code from erasure.

Any subsequent changes to a ‘locked’ template need to be configured by PageDNA programmers. Why do locked templates exist? Generally speaking, most commonly requested features can be added to a site through the menu options PageDNA provides, but occasionally custom programming is needed to solve custom tasks.

PageDNA is committed to steadily expanding the number of features available from the Site Configuration Menu. If you have any suggestions on features that might help you build better sites, by all means contact PageDNA directly. We thrive on input from customers such as you, and hope you enjoy our software. Now lets jump into the individual Web Page Template editing pages and learn what is possible with the Menu.

Web Page Templates Frequently Asked Questions

Frequently Asked Questions about Web Page Templates

1. How do I edit the Welcome page?
2. Can my customer see / How do I remove the gold title bars and gold edit links?
3. How do I collect miscellaneous information?
4. How do I sort items?
5. Where do I change the site look and feel?
6. Why do I have to activate a new user's profile?
7. Why are my catalog images pixelated / blurry?
8. Do profiles use the Division Page?
9. Why does searching for a page name in the menu quick search no longer work?
10. Can an item be in more than one tab in the catalog?
11. Why are my Bill Codes not showing up on the Bill Page?
12. How do I add a new user to Profiles?
13. Can I have per item bill codes on my site?
14. How to create a link to download a file
15. How to create a popup window to display an image
16. How to display and image below or next to a radio button or checkbox
17. I see role on some of my profile sites. What is role?
18. How do I add or change the basket icon on the Catalog page?
19. Can a site's webpages appear in a foreign language?
20. How do I turn off reorders?
21. When do I use Shipping Addresses instead of the Address List Editor?
22. Can a user crop an uploaded photo after proofing?
23. Can I create a button linked to a specific tab in the Catalog?
24. Can I Create a Hyperlink to a Tab in the Catalog?
25. How can I prevent character substitution for characters like bullets and em dashes?

1.

How do I edit the Welcome page?

"Welcome" page is the title of the page, but the actual file name is "index", which is found in the Web Page Templates section of the menu.

2.

Can my customer see / How do I remove the gold title bars and gold edit links?

The gold edit links are only available or seen by PageDNA administrators. If you see them, you are logged into the menu. You can click the "hide" button to hide them from view, and the remaining "show" button to make them appear again. Clicking the "Menu Logout" button will log out your administrator account, and remove all gold links, providing you with the exact view a general user will see. We recommend keeping two different browsers open to make this easy (IE/Firefox on Windows or Safari/Firefox on Mac).

3.

How do I collect miscellaneous information?

You can enable a bill code on the Shipping Page or Bill Page and change the label to whatever you want. You can also enable User Comments or a "Survey-type field" on the Shipping Page.

4.

How do I sort items?

Way 1:

Visit "Item Editor" Click Sort and Delete Items at the top. Move items around… then save changes.

Way 2:

Visit "Catalog Admin > Tab Manager" Choose your tab… at the bottom are sort options - you could sort all items by product code or name… easier if you just want to alpha-sort your items to take this route.

Tab Manager also lets you sort your tabs.

5.

Where do I change the site look and feel?

For global site changes, you use the "Site-wide Appearance" (new in May 2009). Also relevant are "Site Info", and "Edit Customer Service Info" in "Web Templates".

You can also change individual pages (including email sent to customers) by visiting each page’s menu item.

6.

Why do I have to activate a new user's profile?

The requirement to activate a user can only be used on a profile site and is always used on a Mega Site. Profiles on a Mega Site have restricted permissions for a number of things. Among these is access to the divisions drop-down list in the user’s profile.

If new users were allowed to start shopping as soon as their account was created, they would not be able to select their Division when they edit their profile because the drop-down list of Divisions has restricted access on a Mega Site and is required to be set. Regular users do not have permission to change this field. So, even if they were to access their profile, they would not be able to shop because this is a required field.

So, it is important that you set the division and any other sensitive fields. Then, you need to activate their profile so they can shop. The new user will receive an email notification that they can now enter the site after you activate their profile.

There may be other instances on sites with the PageDNA Profile feature that require you to activate a new user. Typically, this is to set a sensitive field to which the regular user does not have permission to alter.

7.

Why are my catalog images pixelated / blurry?

One reason they may look pixelated is that you have the catalog settings resizing the image larger than your catalog_previews for the items.

Visit Web Templates, Catalog Admin, Layout Styles to access the Thumbnail Image Options for each layout, and set or remove a thumbnail size constraint. Or, increase your catalog_previews to be equal to or larger than the set constraint.

8.

Do profiles use the Division Page?

That depends on whether the profile has a division field (corp_tag) set up. If it does, then the division page is skipped, and the choice in the users profile is used automatically. This occurs because, at the point when divisions page is shown, if the order information already contains the division, the division page is skipped.

9.

Why does searching for a page name in the menu quick search no longer work?

Our menus have changed. Some links have been combined into groups. Groups have been combined into several catagories.

The search feature will now show you the group under which a specific item is located.

The recently visited feature will show the 4 most recently clicked links.

The popular section allows instant access to the most popular groups by total number of clicks across all PageDNA Sites.

10.

Can an item be in more than one tab in the catalog?

An item can only appear in one tab in the catalog. If you need an item to appear in more than one tab, you will have to either clone the item or create a second item.

11.

Why are my Bill Codes not showing up on the Bill Page?

You need to Enable Non-Credit Card Charging in order to have the bill_code fields show on the Bill Page. They will not appear without this section of the Bill Page enabled.

12.

How do I add a new user to Profiles?

On most sites, the following steps can be followed to add a new user to the PageDNA Profile feature on your Profile Site or Mega-Site:

1) On the Profile Page, select "Other - Name Not Listed" in the drop-down list for "Place order for."

On some sites this may be replaced with a button saying "Add New Person" or similar text. (This option can be enabled by editing the Profile Page in the menu under Web Templates.)

2) Click the Change User button.

3) Fill in the new user’s information and click the Save Profile button.

You may have to click the checkbox to activate the new user so theycan shop if the site requires new accounts be activated.

13.

Can I have per item bill codes on my site?

Yes you can. Follow these steps:

(There are 4 available item_billcodes: item_billcode1 through item_billcode4)

  1. Enable the Shopping Basket/Cart (multi-imprint) feature on the site by using Basket/Shopping Cart Converter link in the site’s menu. Remember, this change is one way.

    Note: The link to the Basket/Shopping Cart Converter is not available if this feature is already enabled.
  2. Add a field to one or more item forms to make an item_billcode available to users. This is typically done in an item form with a free-text entry field or by way of a drop-down list.
  3. Make sure columns for any of the item_billcodes used are enabled in the Items Report.
  4. Edit any email templates on which the item_billcode needs to be visible. You may need to add it to the Custom Fields section of the email template.

It is possible to incorporate the item_billcode variable into the item’s longname. This can be done in the item’s Custom screen, in the Longname Fmt field. There are instructions on the Custom page to do this.

14.

How to create a link to download a file

You can upload an image to your site and create a link in a Personal Form or Item Form that can be used to download a file. The filename should consist of only letters, numbers and underscores. It should not have any spaces. This can be done in two steps:

1) Go to the site’s menu > Site Content > File Uploader. You will be in the con directory by default. Click the Choose File button, and locate your file. Click the Send button.

2) Edit the Personal or Item form with the field that you for which you want the user to be able to click on a link to download a file. The field’s Sub-label is often used for this. Enter something like the following:

Upload your own JPEG, GIF, TIFF or EPS file or click <a href="con/filename.abc" target="_blank">here</a> (right-click to download to Desktop) to download an image you can upload

You will need to change "filename.abc" to match yours. It needs to be an exact match because it is case sensitive.

15.

How to create a popup window to display an image

You can upload an image to your site and create a link in a Personal Form or Item Form that the user can click on to display the image in a popup window. Recommended file types for this are: JPG, GIF or PDF. The filename should consist of only letters, numbers and underscores. It should not have any spaces. This can be done in two steps:

1) Go to the site’s menu > Site Content > File Uploader. You will be in the con directory by default. Click the Choose File button, and locate your file. Then, click the Send button.

2) Edit the Personal or Item form with the field that you for which you want the user to be able to click on a link to see this image. The field’s Sub-label is often used to launch a popup window. Enter the following:

<a href="con/filename" target="_blank">Click Here</a>

You will need to change "filename" to match yours. It needs to be an exact match because it is case sensitive.

16.

How to display and image below or next to a radio button or checkbox

You can upload an image to your site and display the image next to a radio button or checkbox in an Item Form. Recommended file types for this are: JPG or GIF. The filename should consist of only letters, numbers and underscores. It should not have any spaces. This can be done in two steps:

1) Go to the site’s menu > Site Content > File Uploader. You will be in the con directory by default. Click the Choose File button, and locate your file. Then, click the Send button.

2) Edit the Item form with the field that needs an image associated with it. The field’s Sub-label is usually used to display an image. Enter the following:

<img src="con/filename.gif">

This will display the image below the field name. If you need the image beside the field name, enter the img src information in the Label field

You will need to change "filename" to match yours. It needs to be an exact match because it is case sensitive.

17.

I see role on some of my profile sites. What is role?

Role is a setting that can limit access to certain fields and editing capabilities of users on the storefront. You can make certain fields or profile levels only seen or editable by a certain level user. Common user levels are User, Admin, and Super-Admin.

PageDNA Admin users have access to edit or view all profiles on one of their sites.

18.

How do I add or change the basket icon on the Catalog page?

How to add a basket icon:

1) Upload a basket to img directory (File Uploader).

2) Add code to "Catalog Admin" basket section - this includes some CSS for orientation.

Examples:

Basket Title Text:

<div class=left middle><img src=./img/basket_icon.gif> Your Basket</div>

Basket Empty Text:

<div class=left middle><img src=./img/basket_icon.gif> You have no items in your basket</div>

19.

Can a site's webpages appear in a foreign language?

The language toggle is a function that can be added to any storefront. There us a cost per storefront, per language and includes an initial translation into a language. It would then be up to you to verify the translation and make any changes to the text. We have some tools to help with the management, however you should expect to spend some time on each page of the ordering site making edits.

Please note that not all languages are supported for the auto translation. Only what Google currently supports as we use their api for the base translation.

Please contact PageDNA Support for cost and see the Style Building FAQ: "Can PageDNA set type in a foreign language?"

20.

How do I turn off reorders?

You can disable reorders by disabling the Reorder button on the Profile (if Profiles are enabled) Index, Cancel and Accept pages. The Index page may be skipped if Profiles are enabled.

A Reorder button appears on these four webpages. All of them may not be in use on your site.

21.

When do I use Shipping Addresses instead of the Address List Editor?

Each site has two possible address drop-down list databases, found in the menu under Site Content: Address List Editor and Shipping Addresses. You would use both if they differed, e.g. imprint information, coming from the Address List Editor, needed to have the state spelled completely. Real Time Shipping requires the state be abbreviated. Using just the Address List Editor precludes the need to maintain two databases.

The databases on the Shipping Page are referred to as addrlist and shiplist. Please see the chapter "Configuring the Shipping Page" under Site Configuration in our documentation.

22.

Can a user crop an uploaded photo after proofing?

After viewing a proof, a user can edit their imprint information to take them back to the Item Form and click the Upload File button. They can crop the original photo they uploaded again by clicking on the Crop Image button.

23.

Can I create a button linked to a specific tab in the Catalog?

You can create a button that goes to a specific tab in the catalog (e.g. a button on the Index Page linked to tab in catalog) for a tab named "Thank You Cards."

If there is an apostrophe in the name, the apostrophe needs to be preceded by a \ as in Valentine's+Day and used this way in the examples below.

[Tip]Tip

If the + doesn’t work, try replacing it with %20 as in Valentine \'s%20Day

<input type="button" onclick="document.location=catalog.cgi?tab=Thank +You+Cards" value="Thank You Cards">

For a button named Thank You Cards to take the user to a catalog sub- tab named Thank You Cards beneath a general tab named Greeting Cards:

<input type="button" onclick="document.location=catalog.cgi? tab=Greeting+Cards||Thank+You+Cards" value="Thank You Cards">

24.

Can I Create a Hyperlink to a Tab in the Catalog?

This can be provided to a user, e.g. in an email, to take them directly to a specific tab in the catalog

For a tab named Thank You Cards:

[yourfullsitepath]/catalog.cgi?tab=Thank+You+Cards

For a sub-tab named Thank You Cards with a main tab of Greeting Cards:

[yourfullsitepath]/catalog.cgi?tab=Greeting+Cards||Thank+You+Cards

If there is an apostrophe in the name, the apostrophe needs to be preceded by a "\" as in valentine's+day

25.

How can I prevent character substitution for characters like bullets and em dashes?

Imprint forms have traditionally automatically substituted special characters entered by the user with standard characters. E.g. bullets are replaced with asterisks and em dashes with standard dashes. Automatically replacing these characters may not always be desired. So, the option to disable replacement for some or all characters is now available in the Form Header, which can be found in Web Templates in the site’s menu.

Configuring the "Welcome" (index) page

The INDEX template is shown to users when they visit the site as the "Welcome" page. The main purpose of this page is to provide general information to the End User, and is therefore one of the simplest menu items in terms of options available. The user only needs to click a single button to begin placing an order – this button moves them onto the AUTHORIZATION page. This page is configured using the "Index Page" menu item, found under "Web Page Templates" in the Menu for each site.

  1. User Instructions

    Header.

    This is the welcome message, appearing in a large, bold font at the top of the page.

    Main Message.

    The primary message to the user, this appears just below the Header. This message usually includes a brief salutation followed by a description of the process that is to follow.

    Special News.

    An optional field wherein you can enter a special system status message to the user (i.e., ‘Business cards with the new corporate identity are now available’). This message – if included - appears in bold just before the ‘Start Order’ button.

    Footnote.

    An optional field wherein you can enter any additional information, perhaps not as important as the Main Message or Special News content. Information entered into this field appears below the ‘Start Order’ button.

  2. Form Options

    Include ‘Start Order’ button

    Unchecking this checkbox will temporarily disable the ordering site so that users cannot place orders. This may be useful if you are performing a radical site overhaul. We recommend that you provide information regarding why the site is disabled in the Special News part of the User Instructions (above) to prevent unnecessary customer service inquiries regarding site status.

    Include Link to Reorder Page

    The re-order feature provides end-users an easy way to reorder cards without having to retype everything into the Ordering Site. This feature provides users the ability to search through previous orders, whereupon they can re-submit an order exactly as it was placed before (same imprint). After they find their orders, they are taken directly to the "Proofs" page, saving keystrokes. A word of caution: End Users have been known to reorder without carefully reviewing proofs, causing errors due to outdated imprint information. If this idea scares you, leave this button disabled.

    Do NOT Include Link to Contact Customer Service Page

    Checking this link will remove the link to the page containing contact information for Customer Service. Note that the information shown on the Customer Service page is configured in the ‘Provider Info’ section of the ‘Site Info’ menu option. Please ensure that this information is accurate for each site you build.

  3. External Systems Support

    These features are specific to certain legacy systems. Please ignore these features unless you know what you are doing. If you have any questions about custom integration of PageDNA software into your workflow, contact us and we’ll be happy to discuss options.

[Tip]Tip

To add a button that will take the user to a specific tab in the Catalog, please see this FAQ

Configuring the "Authorization" page

Authorization

The Authorization page referenced below has been "deprecated" from the Product - what this means, is it's use is no longer suggested, as its role has been replaced by other pages. New sites started after January 15, 2009 have this step disabled by default.

The Authorization step can actually cause problems because the Authorization page is skipped entirely on reorders. That is a bad thing. Users putting billing codes, manager names and other important "authorization" information don't realize this when they re-order, and then the re-orders may linked to the wrong cost center, or manager, etc. The problems may not even be realized for months.

As such, the Shipping page is the correct page on which to collect authorization (requester name, billing codes, manager info). The Bill Page is another place where you can add these codes.

The AUTHORIZATION page is always the second page on a PageDNA ordering site. Its function is to collect information from the Requestor – the end user placing an order with this online ordering system.

For purposes of conducting sound business on the internet and helping streamline customer service, the PageDNA system requires certain fields from the Requestor: at minimum, their First and last names along with a full email address. Most sites also request some form of billing information on this page, be it a Cost Center or other billing code.

User Instructions

Brief Instructional Message.

The main purpose of this field is to explain to the user that they are to enter imprint information onto the form below. In other words, what is entered on this form will appear on the items.

Requestor Information

Requestor First Name.

Always present.

Requestor Middle Name.

Rarely used. Only recommended if middle name forms part of the e-mail address and Auto-Format feature is used.

Requestor Last Name.

Always present.

Requestor E-mail Address.

Always present. The E-mail can be free text input (with or without Auto-Format enabled – see below for more information) and may include a fixed domain (i.e. ‘@PageDNA.net’) hard-coded after the input field, or a drop-down list of domains to choose from.

Requestor Phone.

Optional. You may choose one of two formats for the phone: US or International/Free-text.

Auto-Format

Auto-Format.

Corporate E-mail accounts almost always follow logical standards. This helps people guess the e-mail of their internal contacts, and keeps detail-oriented system administration managers happy with their configuration. For instance, PageDNA email addresses follow the convention of firstname@.... It’s a small company, so first name works like a charm. The larger the company, generally the more elaborate the e-mail naming convention.

If your customer’s email naming convention follows a logical format that is applied reasonably consistently throughout the corporation, you can utilize a feature of the PageDNA system called "Auto-Format". Auto-Format is a script that takes information provided by the user in the Name fields and then automatically creates a suggested email address in the Email field, according to a previously defined convention. The user can then modify this email address, if necessary. To enable Auto-Format, simply enter an Auto-Format value in the Auto-Format field.

For PageDNA the appropriate Auto-Format value would be "first@example.com". Lets look at some other conventions in common use, using the name "John Q. Doe" as our example:

Table 18.1. 

Example:

Auto-format value:

john.doe@company.com

first.last@company.com

john_doe@company.com

john_doe@company.com

jdoe@company.com

flast@company.com

John.Q.Doe@company.com

First.M.Last@company.com


So why wouldn’t you always use Auto-Format? It’s undeniably a cool feature. The fact is that some people, after seeing the e-mail address automatically entered into the field on their behalf, will NOT check that e-mail address for validity. Perhaps they assume that our system "knows" the correct actual email address, which is incorrect. The fact is – even though the customer follows a logical email naming convention - some e-mail address will not match the pattern because otherwise two people (i.e. Mary Smith and Mark Smith) would end up with the same e-mail address. This is an unsolvable problem, but if you check the "chide" checkbox, the site will display a red warning under the e-mail after it has Auto-Formatted the e-mail address. This feature depends on newer browsers (IE > 4.5 and Netscape > 4.7) to work., but will not crash older software.

Manager Information

Some clients use these fields to effectively "scare off" would-be imposter requestors.

Manager Name.

Free text box for the user to enter their Manager’s Name

Manager E-mail.

Free text box for the user to enter their Manager’s Email. This is a required field if your customer would like to CC: managers on e-mail receipts for orders.

Manager Drop-down List.

This option allows the user to choose from a list of managers appearing in a Drop-down List format. This can be useful for small companies with a small number of managers.

Ship To Codes

Shipping Code

This field allows users to choose a Ship To location from a Drop-down List during the Authorization procedure. This feature is occasionally used on sites for corporations with a relatively small, fixed number of delivery receipt locations (e.g., mail rooms, delivery bays). Most often, shipping information is asked of the user in the SHIPPING template (see below), which is the second to last page during the ordering process.

Billing Codes

Purchasing Card/Credit Card.

This feature allows you to collect credit card information from the End User before they start their order. Far more common is to either request this field on the Shipping page (when the user has their items in their basket) or to use PageDNA’s real-time credit card authorization, which has a different interface.

While PageDNA’s software does not automatically charge credit cards when collecting this information, the system can perform a 'checksum' calculations to verify credit card formats, therefore capturing all the information you need to process the orders using your own internal merchant account system. If you are interested in secure (encrypted) hosting of your ordering site using Secure Sockets Layer (SSL), contact support for more information. If you need real-time credit card authorization, contact support for more information.

Billing Codes 1-6.

You can have up to six billing codes on your site. The highest number of billing codes options we’ve ever seen on a site was 6.

Billing Codes

Cost centers, Accounting units, Divisional billing codes... they take many names but they serve one purpose: to allow your company to bill the appropriate accounting entity within your customer for procured goods. Since bogus cost centers cost everyone time and money, PageDNA has included verification features to help you ensure that End Users enter accurate billing information.

You can verify billing codes in a number of fashions. The Billing Code can be verified against a pattern filter, checked against a list of approved entries, or the user can be presented with a drop-down list of pre-approved billing codes.

Each verification method has merits and drawbacks. Checking against a simple pattern filter does little to stop users from ordering entering bogus cost centers (for example; all 9s). Providing a Drop-down List allows users the ability to quickly find a cost center; however, the End User can choose any cost center they see in the list. Lazy users have been known to ‘guess’ cost centers, causing accounting nightmares downstream.

Overall, the best verification method is to check against a list of approved cost centers. You will need to work closely with your customer to keep this database up to date. To keep the site current, PageDNA provides partners with the ability to upload a simple, carriage return delimited text file of valid codes – you can update these as often as you wish.

[Tip]Creating and Maintaining a Billing Code Database

One way to manage Billing Codes is to create and maintain a database using "Edit dropdown..." Here’s the procedure:

Procedure 18.1. Creating and Maintaining a Billing Code Database

  1. From the site menu, click the link "Authorization Page". Then click the link for "Bill To".

  2. Scroll down to where it says "Billing Code 1". One of the radio buttons is labeled "Provide Drop-down list of valid entries". Click the radio button to use your list from now on.

  3. Immediately under the radio button is a link for "Edit dropdown..."; click "Edit dropdown..." to open a new window. Enter cost centers into the text box, entering one per line as in the example below:

    01000-311
    01000-312 
    

    Alternatively, if you want descriptions to be shown that differ from the billing codes, use the following format with the "pipe" symbol "|" separating the value from the description:

    01000-311|CORPORATE COST CENTER
    01000-312|DESCRIPTIONS GO HERE  
    

    The latter field will be shown to the user but the first value will be sent as the billing code. Once all of your data has been entered, save this information by clicking the "Submit" button at the bottom of the page.

    [Caution]Caution

    Copying and pasting from a word processing or spreadsheet program can yield extraneous characters. If you are working in one of these programs, you can paste the information into a text editor, e.g. Notepad on a PC or TextEdit on a Mac, to eliminate problem characters. When using TextEdit, command+shift+T will convert it to pure text.

  4. The list of codes will now be live on the AUTHORIZATION step of your site. You may edit the list any time by using "Edit dropdown..." again. You can also access the dropdown edit feature directly from the site menu, using "Edit Dropdowns" from the Content Admin section, but only after you've created your initial list from "Authorization Page".

Order Style

‘Ordering for Yourself’ Inquiry.

This adds a box to the AUTHORIZATION form users can check to indicate that they are ordering for themselves. When the user checks this box, the PageDNA system passes the personal information about the requestor downstream to the next page, saving them keystrokes while ordering.

Ordering for Self Instructions

Text appearing next to the "Ordering for Yourself?" inquiry checkbox. The End User is told when and why they may wish to click this box (whenever they are placing an order for themselves).

Use Radio Buttons... .

Checking this box converts the Order Style Inquiry to a toggling Radio Button selection with two fields for the End User to choose from, one if they are ordering for themselves, and one if they are ordering for someone else. Some users report that this is easier to understand than the checkbox alone. Instructions must be modified appropriately.

Ordering for Someone Else Instructions.

These instructions appear next to the second radio button if the "Use Radio Buttons..." checkbox is selected. Users are instructed to select this radio button if they are placing an order for someone else.

Save Requestor Information Checkbox.

This feature allows users to choose to save all information entered on this page for the duration of their surfing session (until they close their web browser window). This feature – often applauded by high-volume users of the PageDNA ordering system – gives users the option of placing multiple orders without having to re-key authorization information at the beginning of the order process. Requestor Information is stored in a "cookie" on the End Users machine. Cookies must be enabled on the end-users machine for the feature to work properly. Otherwise the user has to re-key their information each time.

Save Requestor Information Instructions.

Users are informed of the "Save Requestor Information" option and given the option of saving information in a cookie. This feature is very helpful to End Users who need to place multiple orders in a single sitting.

Configuring the "Profile Page"

The Profile Page is usable only for sites that have been activated to use Profile Technology, which requires PageDNA activation. Editing or saving the Profile Page on a site where Profiles are not enabled will have no result.

User List

These settings control the "User List", which is shown to all PageDNA Admins and also to end-user customer admins if you have enabled user levels on your site. The verbiage and configuration for this part of the form, which appears above the profile options, are controlled in this section.

[Tip]Tip

Note on Profile Search Options: If you use the normal search (not "Quick Search") the system can let users search for profiles using what are known as "wildcards" - special characters that allow you to search for PART of a name. Some examples:

Sm%

...will find names like "Smith" and "Smyth". You can embed the percent sign to further restrict a search: "Ms%i" You can also use the underscore ("_") to match a single character.

Saved Orders

For no cost, PageDNA can turn on the "Saved Orders" feature onto any PageDNA site with Profiles enabled. If activated, some labelling options will be editable here that relate to the "saved orders" list that appears on the Profile step.

Button Bar

This controls the "button bar" or the list of action buttons, that appear directly above the currently selected user profile. You can edit the text, colors, and alignment of buttons on this bar. Where the Shipping Tracking System is enabled you will be able to enable a "Track Orders" link herein.

Profile Display

These settings alter the text labels and display characteristics for the Profile system on your site. You can elect to include fields to include on the right side of the page in the "Fields to put on right" section, but you may need to contact PageDNA Support to learn the canonical fieldnames used on your site.

Error Messages

This section controls error messages that can be displayed to users in various scenarios.

Edit Profile Screen

When a new profile is being created or edited, you can change the copy shown to the users. This can be helpful to provide instructions to users explaining which fields are required, etc. Note there is a checkbox to add an extra "Save Button" at the bottom of the Profile screen... this can help if you have a lot of Profile fields, so users can save without scrolling back to the top of the page.

Using "Divisions" in your site

Overview

The Divisions Editor - found under the "Ordering Pages" section of the menu - is the interface you use to add Divisions to a site. This page is used for a variety of scenarios where you wish to break users apart into different groups. One common usage example is to use this page to allow users to select one of several "brands", which would then show different products on the subsquent "Select Items" page. Other uses of Divisions include breaking users into different categories of products that must be ordered independently from each other.

Another usage scnario is where you have different types of products requiring different configuration forms. You could - for example - have a 'division' for users ordering Business Cards or ordering Stationery. Stationery users would see a separate list of addresses on their imprint form. Products and/or addresses can be optionally filtered by Division.

Procedure 20.1. Configuring Divisions

There are several steps involved in configuring divisions.

  1. Define the list of divisions in the "Divisions" tab. Give each Division a unique 'tag'. We recommend a short tag with no funny characters. You will need to remember and recognize these tags later, so make sure that they make sense to you.

  2. Activate of the divisions page using the "Setup" tab, by setting the "login_next_page" to "corp". This re-routes the user's flow through the site so that they see the Divisions page when ordering.

  3. Add a navigation tab to the header using the "Site Header" menu item. This ensures that users see a navigation tab for "Divisions" when they are on this page.

For a further discussion of the different site types including division and Mega-Sites, please see the Help document found here.

Divisions List tab

This tab lets you edit the division definitions. A division definition is made up of:

  • Indent – this is a number. You can use this to make some divisions appear underneath other divisions, by adding 1 to this number. Take a look at the indent examples below for more info.

  • Tag – This tag is an internal code used to represent this particular division. Internally, the tag of the chosen division is available in the corp_tag variable. It should be lowercase letters only, for instance "abc", "reg", "llc", etc. It can also be "None" which means that this division should not be choosable – it represents a grouping of divisions. You may also leave the tag blank to create a sub heading within your listing of divisions. The division will be non-selectable. Lastly, you can use the "hide" to create a division invisible to everyone... this may be useful if you wish to temporarily hide products on the site. You will refer to this code when defining filtering options, such as showing a list of products or addresses only to one particular division.

  • Title – This is how the division will appear on the page. The title of the division the user chooses can also be used in the styles. You can use HTML fragments in the title, for instance <b>Example Title</b> would appear bold in the CORP page.

  • Subtext – This text is displayed below the division choice, to describe the division more clearly if necessary.

  • Extra Vars – This defines variables that will be associated with the division, generally used for advanced features. Extra Vars are explained in more detail below.

You can add new divisions by clicking 'new'. Edit an existing division by clicking 'edit' next to its name in the list. You may 'move' divisions in the list by clicking the move button and then the new position in the list for the selected item.

You can copy a division by clicking "clone". If you want to automatically copy the item filtering to the copied division, check "Copy item filtering to cloned division" before cloning.

Preview tab

This tab lets you see how the divisions will look in the site. Make sure to enable the Divisions page using the "Divisions Editor" menu item to activate the page.

Filtering tab

See also: Filtering Addresses by Division

This tab lets you associate certain products with one or more divisions. Use the grid to select which items are available in which divisions. If you have a long list of items, you can use the Item(Item Quick Search) field to find an item by long name or tag.

You may also edit product filtering using the Item Editor menu item. Click on Item Editor, edit an item, click on Display Info, and select the divisions in which the item is available by checking the box beside the correct Division Name. If you do not see a list of divisions, you have not yet enabled Divisions on your site.

When the user chooses a division on the Division page, they will only see the products associated with that division.

Setup tab

The setup page shows a couple key system values determining whether or not this feature is active. Another place to edit these settings is in the "Divisions Editor" menu item, where they are explained in more detail. The "login_next_page" option controls whether the CORP page is part of the site flow. If this is set to "corp" then the user will be presented with a list of divisions. If this is set to "choose" then the user will skip the CORP page.

The "choose_corp_filter" option affects the list of products displayed on the choose products page. If checked, then the division the user chooses will filter the list of products. See the filtering tab for more information.

Divisions Page tab

This tab only acts to change the shell of the CORP page - the banner above the divisions and the button below the divisions.

You should change the banner to reflect what the organizations business units’ are called. For instance, "Please choose you division", "please choose your company", etc.

Like the "Catalog Admin" page, the button copy by default talks about to the next action the user will be performing. Specifically the default copy is "Continue to Choose Items". If the site is set up to skip the choose page when only one choice is available[6], then that copy should be changed to "Continue to Imprint Information."

Indent Examples

Figure 20.1. Indent Examples

Indent Examples


Extra Vars

With the Extra Vars of a division, you can define variables that will be associated with the division. This is a powerful tool for making the stationery site behave differently for different divisions. For instance, to make the URL displayed on the business cards to change depending on which division was chosen, define a ‘card_www’ variable on each division.

Extra vars are used to store additional information linked to a particular division so as to affect site behavior for orders placed for that division. Numerous examples are found below. Here is a screenshot showing a user editing a couple extra vars:

Figure 20.2. Sample showing editing of Extra Vars

Sample showing editing of Extra Vars


Extra vars are edited by putting the term (shown in bold above) on the left side, and then the value you'd like stored in this variable in the right hand side, as shown in the screenshot above.

Extra variables you may wish to use include:

passwd - Divisions Password (single)

Any divisions with this variable set will be password protected. If the user chooses this division then they will be prompted for this password. Each division can have different passwords. If no password is defined for a division, said division will not require a password to order.

          Value on left side: passwd
          Value on right side:  (type in password for this division)
  
passwd - Divisions Passwords (multiple)

Instead of a single divisions password, you can elect to have a list of valid passwords for a division. Administration is a bit more involved:

1. Create a "plain text" file with one password per line. Save this with a unique name, having no spaces or "funny" characters. In this example we will call the file marketing.txt - pretending this is the password list for a division restricted to the marketing team.

2. Upload this file using the "File Uploader" menu item.

3. Link the item using the format below:

          Value on left side: passwd
          Value on right side: file:con/marketing.txt
  

Where 'marketing.txt' would be replaced by the exact name of your file

intl - Force International Phones

This option lets you force international-style phones (free input) onto users ordering for this division. This is useful if you are using divisions to break US and International items into separate ordering flows. The following example would enable international phones automatically for the division being edited:

          Value on left side: intl
          Value on right side:  1          
  
redirect - URL Redirection

The value should be a valid URL (web address). If the user chooses this division they will be redirected to the given URL. This is useful if you wish to have users routed to another ordering site (either on this system or another) when ordering for this division. The following example would route users to the "Acme" site if they chose this division.

          Value on left side: redirect
          Value on right side:  http://www.nationsprint.com/clients/acme
  
approver - Approver Linked to Division

When an approver is configured and linked to divisions, you may see an approver field in your list of divisions variables. It would appear per the example below, with an email address for the approver shown. Note that the best way to edit these settings is through Approval Setup and Management, which provides an interface to view and edit approvers by division en masse..

          Value on left side:  approver
          Value on right side:  john@yourcustomer.com
  
which_ship - Shipping Page Linked to Division

It is possible to have different shipping pages show up for different divisions on your site. When this is enabled, you may see a special variable in your 'extra vars' indicating which shipping page to use for that division. NThe exampl below links this division to the "Shipping_new" page. Note that the best way to edit this is using the Multiple Shipping Feature (found in the Menu), which provides an interface to view and edit these settings. It is not advised that you edit or change these values manually.

          Value on left side:  which_ship
          Value on right side:  new
  
corp_logo - Site Header Logo Linked to Division

It is possible to have different header logos shown for different divisions on your site. Use the File Uploader to upload images to the "con" directory, and then link to them using this extra variable using the format shown below.

          Value on left side:  corp_logo
          Value on right side: con/yourimage.gif
  

You can also link to a URL hosted externally:

          Value on left side:  corp_logo 
          Value on right side: http://www.example.com/yourimage.gif
  

IMPORTANT NOTE: This feature only works on profile sites where each profile is linked to a division, also known as a Mega-Site. In addition, you must re-save the "Site Header" for this feature to work on older sites.

Guest Shopping for Profiles WITH Divisions

In order for Guest Shopping to work on a Mega-Site or on a site using the Profile with a Divisions drop-down list as one of the fields on the Profile Page. A "generic" or "public" division needs to be created with the items you want to allow users who do not have a profile to order. On a Mega-Site, this division's tag is usually: notlinked. You need to add the following to the Extra Vars for the "public" division:

                  
                  Value on left side:  default 
                  Value on right side: 1
                

For more information about Guest Shopping, please see Guest Shopping for Mega Sites and Profiles with a Divisions Drop-Down List.



[6] See Site Variables menu item

Catalog Admin

Catalog Administration

The catalog is heart of your customer facing Storefront. It displays your items, and sorts them in to subsections as you choose for your customers to browse and make purchases from.

The setup and layout of your catalog in many ways will define your customer's experience with your store. As such, be sure that you've read the material below so that you can set up your catalog in a way that makes sense to you and your customers.

The PageDNA catalog can display your items in a wide variety of ways which you can configure from the Catalog Admin tool. You can create tabs, sub-tabs, and all sorts of different layouts. If you are using Divisions and/or Profiles on your site, you can also have the catalog display only specified items at the Division and Profile level.

To access the catalog and make changes to its settings, go to your Storefront menu and select Catalog Admin from the Web Templates menu.

Figure 21.1. Catalog Admin on the Storefront Menu

Catalog Admin on the Storefront Menu


Doing so will take you in to the Catalog Admin tool, where you'll be presented with a series of menu tabs. Each of these tabs will allow you to manage different aspects of the catalog layout and behaviors.

The Catalog Admin option will change depending upon whether your site has the Shopping Cart feature enabled. For details about Saved Orders with the PageDNA Profile system, see our Help document here, located near the bottom of the page. For Saved Orders without the PageDNA Profile feature, see our Help document here.

[Tip]Tip

To add a button, e.g. on the Index Page, that will take the user to a specific tab in the Catalog, please see this FAQ

[Tip]Tip

To create a hyperlink, e.g. for use in an email, to a tab in the Catalog, please see this FAQ

[Note]Note

The catalog will prevent adding an item if it has incompatible mailing list options with items already in the order. For example, if the order already has an item that requires a list upload, the catalog will show an error message if a second item is added which can only be drop-shipped. Also, if an order already has a mailing list, only items that support that mailing list type can be added.

The next two sections cover the use of the Catalog Admin with and without Shopping Carts enabled.

Using Catalog Admin WITH Shopping Carts Enabled

On Storefronts that have Shopping Carts enabled, you'll have the following set of options available to you.

Figure 21.2. Catalog Admin with Shopping Carts Enabled

Catalog Admin with Shopping Carts Enabled


  • Catalog Settings - set the general behavior settings, catalog layout, basket options, user instructions, form options, and error messages

  • Layout Styles - configure the specific aspects of the three different gallery types

  • Pop-Up Window - configure the pop-up window details

  • Visual Settings - customize the colors and other look & feel aspects of the catalog

  • Tab Manager - set up and manage tabs, sub-tabs, and what products will be displayed on each

  • Search - control what attributes can be searched on and how search results should be sorted

Adjusting the Catalog Settings

There are six different sections to the Catalog Settings tab. These control the general behavior of the catalog.

  • Behavior Settings

    • Bypass this page if there is only a single product available? - If checked, the catalog page will be skipped if only one item is available.

    • Skip edit step for static items - if an item has not need to be edited (such as for static items) then marking this will cause the catalog to skip the editing step.

    • Prefill Imprint Form with data from previously edited item - if another variable imprint item has been ordered in the same session, marking this box will cause subsequent items to be prefilled with the same imprint information. This works for personal, shared, and item forms.

    • Prefill Personal Form with data entered on different personal form - works just like the previous option, but only for personal forms, not shared or item forms.

    • Catalog Search turns on a search box that customers can use to search the catalog. The Empty Search Box Message allows you to enter the default starting text if the search box. Additional search options can be configured under the Search Tab.

      Added to the catalog, if search is enabled, is an option for text immediately preceeding the search input. This allows for a quick bit of instructional text specifically targetting the search functionality, e.g. types of key words to use. It is not shown if catalog search is not enabled.

      Figure 21.3. Text box before Catalog Search

      Text box before Catalog Search


  • Catalog Layout

    These settings control how the products are displayed on the catalog. These can also be set on a tab by tab basis in the Tab Manager. Specific configuration options for each style are set in the Layout Styles tab.

    • Standard - flat listing of products with no images, only product names.

    • Picture Gallery - shows product thumbnails in a tiled fashion. It's configurable as to how many columns and what information is displayed. That information can include the product name, product codes, description, price, and inventory on hand.

    • Picture List - shows items in a single list with thumbnail images running down the side. Thumbnails are shrunk down to size automatically and can be set to optionally open a new window with a larger thumbnail when the user clicks the thumbnail. Additional columns are the same as those in the Picture Gallery.

    • Compact List - like the Picture List but without the image, displaying the item information in columns. It is possible to display the item tag in its own column with this layout style, either to the right or the left of the item's description (longname).

  • Basket Options

    Because your site has Shopping Carts enabled, you'll be able to configure several of the aspects of how the cart is displayed in this section. Use the checkboxes, hex code color fields, and text fields to make the shopping cart appear the way you want it.

  • User Instructions /Copy

    To add additional or customized messages and instructions for your customers, use this section. You can change such components as the page banner, alignments, some page colors, add directive text.

  • Form Options

    If you want to add additional navigation buttons at the top or bottom of the catalog pages, you can do so in this section. The button's text and alignment can be customized.

  • Error Messages

    While error messages are all preconfigured, you do have the option to change the wording if you need to. Each of these fields contains the existing error message. Be sure to keep the same format for the variables in each field. Those are the items that start with %.

Don't forget to hit the Apply Changes Button to make any edits you've made take effect.

Layout Styles

Each of the three gallery formats (picture gallery, picture list, and compact list) have specific look and feel options that you can set. Those changes are made in the Layout Styles tab. Within this tab there are three subtabs, one for each of the three gallery formats. The Standard View cannot be configured here.

Picture Gallery and Picture List

These subtabs are broken in to two sections. The top section is a series of dropdown options and checkboxes that you can use to configure the layout of the tabs and what details are displayed on each item.

The bottom section allows you to set the thumbnail size, border options, default image for items that are missing catalog preview images, and the pop-up preview window options for when a customer wants a larger view of the item.

For Picture Gallery: The tab blurb can be displayed inline with your other products. You can also set the position it is placed - 1 for the first position, 2 for the second and so on.

Click the Apply Changes Button to save your changes.

Compact List

Since there are no images displayed on the Compact List view of the catalog, this subtab contains options that control the display of column data shown in the compact view. The top few options control the general display of the list, while the rest of the options allow you to customize the column names and some of their display options.

Pop-Up Window

In the Picture Gallery and Picture List sections of the Layout Styles tab, you were able to configure some of the settings for a pop-up window that would appear if a user clicked on a thumbnail image to see more detail. In this tab, you can configure the rest o the settings for that feature. Here you can add a close button to the top or bottom on the window, add description text, quantity and pricing information, and more.

Visual Settings

Under this tab, you can adjust many of the remaining look and feel options for your catalog. The top section allows you to set options for the catalog overall, including tab sizes, background and table colors, and table spacing. All colors can be selected using the color picker tool or by entering your chosen color's hex code in the box provided.

Figure 21.4. Catalog Admin Color Picker

Catalog Admin Color Picker


In the bottom section, you can set up similar options for the tabs of the catalog. In addition to colors and widths, you can also set up the layout style and font sizes here. There are five layout styles. Rounded and Square options for traditional tabs displayed across the Catalog. Vertical tabs in three options to be displayed down the side of the Catalog. Reverse Vertical Tabs can be used if you need the tabs displayed on the right side of the page. Alternate Vertical tabs changes the Vertical Tab behavior so that when a branch or parent tab is opened, the user is taken directly to the first leaf or child tab.

Tab Manager

The Tab Manager is a very powerful tool that gives the ability to add, move, and delete tabs and adjust the placement of items within those tabs. With a new catalog, all of your items will be located within a single tab.

On the left side of the Tab Manager is a list of all your tabs. Under each tab are four different actions you can take with that tab.

  • Rename - allows you to change the name of the tab

  • Subtab - creates a tab within that tab. A tab can only contain subtabs OR items. It CANNOT contain both subtabs and items.

  • Move up & Move Down - used to adjust the tabs position in the list.

Beneath the list of tabs is a [new] link that you can use to create additional tabs. You'll also find a tool that will sort the tabs alphabetically.

In order to move items in to different tabs, you must select them in the right hand pane. If you want to select several consecutive items, click the first item then hold down your shift key and click the last item you wish to move. To move several nonconsecutive items, hold down your control (command in OS X) as you click each item. With an item (or items) selected, you can now click and drag the line at the top of the tool labeled Select items and drag this to another tab. This can be done with items or subtabs.

Figure 21.5. Catalog Admin - Tab Manager

Catalog Admin - Tab Manager


Search

If you have turned on the search feature in the Catalog Settings tab, then in this tab you can establish that search behavior. Using the checkboxes you can select each of the item attributes that are searchable. Using the dropdown boxes, you can select how the search results are sorted and presented to the customer.

Using Catalog Admin WITHOUT Shopping Carts Enabled

On Storefronts that do not have Shopping Carts enabled, you'll have the following set of options available to you.

Figure 21.6. Catalog Admin without Shopping Carts Enabled

Catalog Admin without Shopping Carts Enabled


  • Catalog - set the general behavior settings, catalog layout, basket options, user instructions, form options, and error messages

  • Layout Styles - configure the specific aspects of the three different gallery types

  • Pop-Up Window - configure the pop-up window details

  • Catalog/Tab Settings - create, sort, hide, and customize some settings the tabs of your catalog

  • Item/Tab Settings - assign items to each tab of the catalog

Adjusting the Catalog

There are six different sections to the Catalog tab. These control the general behavior of the catalog.

  • Behavior Settings

    • Bypass this page if there is only a single product available? - If checked, the catalog page will be skipped if only one item is available.

    • Allow only one product to be ordered at a time - When marked, this prevents customers from ordering more than one item at a time. The item selection checkboxes are replaced with radio buttons when this feature is selected.

    • Allow quantity selection in catalog - If enabled, users can choose their quantities directly on the catalog page, instead of after adding items to their order.

    • Filter products by division - Allows you to control what items are displayed in the catalog based on division.

  • Catalog Layout

    These settings control how the products are displayed on the catalog. These can also be set on a tab by tab basis in the Tab Manager. Specific configuration options for each style are set in the Layout Styles tab.

    • Standard - flat listing of products with no images, only product names.

    • Picture Gallery - shows product thumbnails in a tiled fashion. It's configurable as to how many columns and what information is displayed. That information can include the product name, product codes, description, price, and inventory on hand.

    • Picture List - shows items in a single list with thumbnail images running down the side. Thumbnails are shrunk down to size automatically and can be set to optionally open a new window with a larger thumbnail when the user clicks the thumbnail. Additional columns are the same as those in the Picture Gallery.

    • Compact List - like the Picture List but without the image, displaying the item information in columns. It is possible to display the item tag in its own column with this layout style, either to the right or the left of the item's description (longname).

  • Catalog Look and Feel

    Under this section, you can adjust many of the look and feel options for your catalog. Some of these settings include the table width, padding and spacing, as well as tab size and type.

  • User Instructions / Copy

    To add additional or customized messages and instructions for your customers, use this section. You can change such components as the page banner, alignments, some page colors, add directive text.

  • International Phones Selector

    If you want to give users an option to enter phones using an international format, mark this checkbox and enter any sections and field labels. You can also choose to force the international format on all customers if you wish.

  • Form Options

    If you want to add additional navigation buttons at the top or bottom of the catalog pages, you can do so in this section. The button's text and alignment can be customized.

Layout Styles

Each of the three gallery formats (picture gallery, picture list, and compact list) have specific look and feel options that you can set. Those changes are made in the Layout Styles tab. Within this tab there are three subtabs, one for each of the three gallery formats. The Standard View cannot be configured here.

Picture Gallery and Picture List

These subtabs are broken in to two sections. The top section is a series of dropdown options and checkboxes that you can use to configure the layout of the tabs and what details are displayed on each item.

The bottom section allows you to set the thumbnail size, border options, default image for items that are missing catalog preview images, and the pop-up preview window options for when a customer wants a larger view of the item.

Click the Apply Changes Button to save your changes.

Catalog/Tab Settings

In order to create or edit tabs in your catalog, you'll need to use this tool. There are 8 fields for each tab.

  • RENAME -- if you want to rename a tab, enter a value here.

  • TAB_TEMPLATE -- choose a different layout for different tabs.

  • HIDE_INTL -- Hides the checkbox for choosing international phones.

  • HIDE -- Hides the tab completely.

  • RADIO -- Makes the tab choice be radio buttons, so that only one item in the given tab can be ordered.

  • ORDER -- if you want to re-order the tabs, enter numbers here. The order of the items will be adjusted.

  • SORT BY -- if you want to sort the items within the tab by a specific field, choose which field here.

  • BLURB -- optional text appears below the tabs but above the actual catalog items.

To add to edit a tab, enter your information and preferences for each of the fields listed above and click the Apply Changes button. Unused or unwanted tabs can be hidden using the HIDE checkbox.

Item/Tab Settings

In this tab you will assign items to each tab of your catalog. Here you'll find a list of all the items on your site. To the right of their name is a dropdown box that contains a list of all the tabs in your Storefront. Simply select the tab from that last that you want the item to display in. If you want to use a tab that is not listed there, you can enter the name for a new tab in the box on the far right. A new tab will be created that you can edit in the Catalog/Tab Settings tab.

Be sure to click the Apply Changes button to save your changes before navigating away from this tab.

Overview of File Uploader

File Uploader is a menu tool that allows you to upload images or PDFs to the 'con' or 'img' folder of your site, for use as supporting content on your site. The most common use for this is to store supporting files for display in the catalog - such as a sample PDF of a document.

To use the uploader, you simply choose a directory (default is 'con' which stands for "content") and then upload files one at a time, or upload a zip file.

Zip files containing multiple files can be uploaded into a directory. Once a Zip file has been uploaded, an unzip link will appear next to the file, allowing you to unzip the files into the directory. Make sure that your files total less than 150mb before zipped, or you will receive an error when unzipping your files.

Note that button images are stored in the 'img' directory, but we recommend the 'con' directory for most purposes. The "Filename Contains" field at the top will limit the files shown to help you find a file in a long list.

The rename link found beside file names allows you to rename any files found in the directories. If you rename a file that is being used by a style or link on your site, do not forget to update that style or link.

Guest Admins do not have access to delete, rename, or unzip files in the File Uploader.

[Note]Note

You should upload files only into the con and img directories. The other directories are used during storefront processes and are subject to periodic cleaning.

Figure 22.1. File Uploader

File Uploader


Edit Dropdown Lists

Edit Dropdown Lists is a central tool for managing "standard" drop-down lists you create on a site, e.g. bill_code1, bill_country, etc. A new tab will be added for drop-down lists you create. Drop-down lists can be unsorted, i.e. entries will be listed in the order they were added, or you can sort them by enabling the "sort list" checkbox and clicking the Submit button. You can view as a list again. However, the list will remain sorted.

Figure 23.1. Edit Dropdown Lists Unsorted

Edit Dropdown Lists Unsorted


Figure 23.2. Edit Dropdown Lists Sorted

Edit Dropdown Lists Sorted


Editing Item Password Page

Items can optionally have passwords. When an item has a password, users are taken to a page asking them for a password for each item. When items have the same password, they are grouped together and the user only needs to enter the password one time. The user can also choose that they really do not want these items.

This page allows you to edit the text that appears on this "Items Password" page, which follows the Catalog or "Choose" page in the ordering flow. The menu item to access this page is "Item Password Page".

Imprint Page - Overview

The Imprint form is constructed "on the fly" using a number of available components, each of which is edited independently through PageDNA’s Menu. These bits and pieces are assembled in real-time by the system, depending on which items a user is ordering and the 'sections' enabled for those particular products. We've broken the various components for the "Imprint" page into separate sections in this documentation, and they are listed in the order that they will appear, if present for an item.

Configuring the "Imprint" page - Form Header

The top of the Imprint page is controlled through the Menu named "Form Header/Footer". This small configuration interface lets you configure the banner shown at the top of the Imprint form to users when ordering.

Understanding Personal Forms, Shared Forms and Item Forms

The Personal Form, Item Form and Shared Form are forms that can appear in the "Configure" step where the user enters their imprint information.

You can enable any one or all of these forms to make them available to an item in the Form link which can be accessed when you edit an item in the Item Editor. This is discussed in Configure "Imprint" form: Item Forms and Shared Forms.

Whenever you need something similar to fields used on a business card, you can start by using the Personal Form. The Personal Form is a shareable form designed to handle personal information typically used for business cards, letterhead and envelopes such as: name, title, addresses, phones, emails and websites.

Every item is linked to a Personal Form by default.

Personal Form

There are sections for the Personal Form (nametitle, address, contact, phones). These sections can be turned on or off per item. If a section is not enabled, that part of the form doesn't appear to users. This allows you to use the same Personal Form for items requiring some of the same fields. For example, you would probably want all these sections enabled for a business card and use the same Personal Form for the matching envelope, but only enable the address section.

You can disable the Personal Form completely by deselecting all four Personal Page Sections, which you would most probably do for a Static Item.

[Caution]Caution

If you enable any of the Personal Form Sections, but do not enable any fields in the Personal Form, the "Configure" step will be presented to the user.

You can build as many Personal Forms as you need, and link them to items or divisions by using the Multiple Personal Feature. There is also a video tutorial that covers the use of the Multiple Personal Feature (video tutorial). This means you can share Personal Forms, saving you editing time when many products have the same "personal" field requirements.

[Caution]Caution

Because Personal Forms can be created and linked to items or divisions, you need to be careful when editing a Personal Form used by another item or division because you will affect the fields used for the other item(s). The Multiple Personal Feature allows you to add new Personal Forms for use on the site.

Item Form

Beyond the core "personal information", you may find a product that needs additional fields that are not available in the Personal Form. Some examples are a file upload field, a date field, time fields, or other fields that are very custom and non-standard.

[Tip]Tip

You can use an Item Form and/or Shared Form instead of a Personal Form to customize the order in which the fields are displayed and/or the types of fields.

An Item Form is "item specific" and can be appended to the Personal Form in the Configure Step of the ordering process. An Item Form is only available to the item to which it has been linked. There is an Item Form drop-down list in every item's Form link. If you enable both the Personal Form and an Item Form, the Item Form's fields will appear below the Personal Form's fields. Item Form fields cannot appear within or above any of the Personal Form's fields. This cannot be changed.

Shared Form

If you plan on using one or more fields for several items and don't want to have to create them for each item, you can use a Shared Form. To create a new Shared Form, select New from the Shared Item Form drop-down and enter a name for the form. It will be available to other items. Shared Item Forms can only be linked to items. They cannot be linked to a division.

[Important]Important

If all three types of forms are enabled for an item, the order in which they are displayed is Personal Form, Shared Form and Item Form. This cannot be changed.

Please see the beginning of this chapter for links to its topics, or click Next, for more detailed information about each of these forms.

Configuring the "Imprint" page - 'Personal' section

In the ordering site, the PERSONAL page becomes the top part of the IMPRINT page (the bottom half comes from item configuration forms – see Item Forms for more information). This is edited using the "Personal Page" menu item (or items if multiple personal forms are defined). This template contains many fields, each collecting bits of ‘personal’ information to be used on the imprint for an order. Examples include name and title, address, phone numbers, email addresses and website URL.

If a user has indicated that they are placing an order for themselves, information from the AUTHORIZATION template is passed into this form (e.g., name and email), saving the user keystrokes (and time).

The PERSONAL portion of the IMPRINT page in ordering sites is relatively long, so it has been broken into sections. To move between sections, use the "Quick Navigation" arrows to get around the page options.

Site Configuration

Checking this box will configure the system such that it bypasses the Imprint Information forms entirely if the user is ordering ONLY static items. Since no imprint information is needed for these items, this saves time by taking end users directly to the proofs.

Section Title

This field appears as a header for the "Personal Information". Default is "Imprint Information".

User Instructions

Brief Instructional Message.

This text blurb appears above the name and titles section, providing concise written instructions to the user. An optional part of this section – which we recommend you include – is the Accent Reference Guide. This feature provides users with a link to open a popup window that includes information on how to keystroke accented characters (for example, ü (u with umlaut)) onto the Imprint of their items.

You can view the Accent Reference Guide at http://www.nationsprint.com/clients/[site]/accenthelp.cgi

The Accent help popup can be changed so that all the text and column labels can be changed and translated to all the languages on your sites.

Technical note: Our software supports ISO-Latin-1 and UTF-8 character sets.

Name And Title Section

Header Label.

This is the text to appear in the banner appearing above the Name and Title section. Default value is "Name and Title"

Header Sublabel.

This appears in parentheses below the Header Label. Default value is ‘leave fields blank if they do not apply’.

Name

The personal page always splits the ‘First Name’ and ‘Last Name’ fields into two separate inputs; these two fields are the least that can be present to capture an Imprint name.

Name Prefix.

This field, if included, allows the user a way to input any name prefixes onto their order (i.e., ‘Mr.’ Or ‘Dr.’).

First Name.

Mandatory to include, but can be made optional. Often users will want to make the First and Last Name fields optional to allow users to order "blank" business cards with only an office address.

Middle Name.

If selected, this provides a field for the user to enter a middle name or initial. This is often used if the email address format uses the middle name and Auto-Format is enabled.

Last Name.

Mandatory to include, but can be made optional.

Name Suffix.

This field, if included, allows the user a way to input any name suffixes onto their order (i.e., ‘Jr.’ or ‘Ph. D.’).

Affiliations.

This field, if included, provides the user with a list of checkboxes next to a list of approved affiliations. These affiliations are to be entered into parm.db and given a Key in the ‘Key’ field. This is an infrequently used option.

Titles and Departments

Titles 1-5.

The first title field can be configured a Drop-down List, useful if the customer has a fixed list of titles. Also, it can be a standard free-entry field. The remaining 4 title lines are all free-entry fields. We’ve never seen more than 5 title fields on a site.

Departments 1-3 and Company.

These fields act like essentially like additional free input title fields – they simply have different underlying variable names.

Divisions

Divisions 1-2.

The divisions are Drop-down Lists that you may include in your site. These fields appear below their own banner, separated from Name and Title. Note that these fields are not related to the CORP page and the Divisions Editor menu items.

[Tip]Hiding Sections.

Certain products do not need the inputs from the ‘Name and Title’ section. A common example of such an item is an envelope – often the only imprint information appearing on this item is the street address. If the user is only ordering envelopes, there is no reason to ask for ‘Name and Title’ information – and in fact, asking for this information may be confusing to the End User. For situations such as this, the PageDNA system provides a simple way to hide the ‘Name and Title’ section when appropriate.

The way to hide sections is to go to the Item Editor. Within the Item Editor, pick the product and click on the 'custom' link (also called Other Settings). Within the Other Settings, you will see sections:. These sections refer to the four main sections of the personal form.

nametitle

If you check the nametitle section, it will activate the name and title sections of the personal fo

address

If you check the address section, it will activate the address section of the personal form.

contact

If you check the contact section, it will activate the contact section (phone and email sections) o

phones

If you check the "phones" section, it will activate the Main Phone and Fax section of the personal

Required inputs that are hidden will still act as if required. Therefore when using the hide section feature, you must ensure that none of inputs in the section are required, or the user will be unable to proceed.

There is currently no method for hiding at a more granular level than by section. In other words, you cannot display name and title inputs if the End User is ordering one product, and then show just the name inputs if ordering a product without a title.

Address Information

This section of the PERSONAL form is designed to allow the user to choose or enter their imprint address information for their order. End Users have two primary options to enter an address: choose from a Drop-down List or enter the address into free text fields. You may include either or both of these options in your sites. There are a wide variety of address configuration options for both DROP-DOWN and FREE text input addresses:

DROP-DOWN.

If checked, this adds a Drop-down List of addresses onto the PERSONAL information section of your site. The actual list of addresses is maintained via the Address List Editor menu item (see below). There are several options that affect how the drop-down list behaves:

Banner Label.

This label appears in a banner above the Drop-down Address List.

Brief User Instructions.

A common example is "Please choose an address from the list below".

Include Null Default option.

If checked will add an option in the address drop-down that represents "Address does not appear in the Drop-down List; use the fields below". You can choose to put the option at the end of the list, and use any text you like for the option. We recommend something simple such as "Other... (enter below)". When using a Drop-down List with free-entry fields, this option should ALWAYS be checked. Users must select the "Other" option in the Drop-down list, otherwise the free-entry fields will not have any effect. When not using free-entry fields, this option should NEVER be checked, as the user will have no way to enter an address. Do not use this with the HIDE configuration option.

Include Mail Stop / Floor field.

Checking this option and filling out the input configuration fields will cause a Mail Stop input to display below the Drop-down address list. This can be useful if the addresses include a Mail Stop, Suite number, or floor. It would be impractical to include all of the variations for each address in the database.

HIDE.

If checked the free-entry fields will be hidden on the first viewing. After selecting an address, continuing to the PROOF page, and then hitting "Edit Imprint Information", the user will be brought back to the PERSONAL form again, whereupon they can edit the address information on second viewing. If the drop-down is changed to a different value at that point then the address will be taken from the address database. Be sure to check "FREE" as well as "DROP-DOWN" configuration options if you use this feature.

Extra Field Names.

In this field, enter any fields that ARE in the address database that are NOT free-entry fields. For example: if the address database has card_street1, card_street2, card_city, card_state, card_zip and main_phone and main_fax fields, all of those fields are free-entry fields except main_phone. So, the Extra Field Names input should read "main_phone,main_fax".

FILTER.

If checked, this will filter addresses appearing in the Drop-down List by division. This option only makes sense if the CORP page is enabled in the Divisions Editor menu item.

HIDDEN.

If checked, the Drop-down List will not be displayed but the address database will be consulted as if the drop-down list was displayed. This means that the card_office variable (if set in custom logic or extra variables in the Divisions Editor) will determine the address that will display on the cards. This option is not commonly used.

AUTOFILL.

This works in conjunction with the Address Drop-down List and the Address List Editor for standard address variable names found on the Personal Form (e.g., card_street1, card_street2, etc.) and for phones. Enabling Autofill will autmatically populate these fields with information from the Address List Editor bsed on the user's selection from the address drop-down list.

There are two options for phone numbers:

1) Add main_phone and/or main_fax as variables to the Address List Editor and enable these two fields by going to the Phones link in the Addresses section in the second row of links at the top of the Personal Page. (The link for this is to the left of the Contact Section link.)

2) Add the variables phone1 through phone8 to the Address List Editor for each of the phones you need associated with the addresses. The fields you need to enable on the Personal Form for this option are numbered 1 through 8 to the right of the bold Phones link in the third row of links at the top of the Personal Form.

Whichever of these options you use, these variables need to be added to the Phone Source fields below the Autofill checkbox so the phones will populate automatically based on the user's selection from the Address Drop-down List.

FREE.

If checked a set of free-input address fields will be provided for the End User to key in the appropriate imprint address for their order.

Banner Label.

If text is included in this field (and/or Brief User Instructions), a small banner is included above the Free-input fields. This is often helpful in situations where there is both a Drop-down List and Free text inputs for the address; this provides a clean visual break between the sections for End Users. The Banner Label appears in bold at the top of the banner.

Brief User Instructions.

This field can also be helpful towards clarification for the End User. An example would be "please enter your address information into the fields below". Following are some other example instructions for different configurations:

FREE and DROP-DOWN

"If your imprint address does not appear in the list above, choose "Other..." above and then enter your imprint address into the fields below."

FREE, HIDE and LOCK

"You may change the address information by clicking "Edit Imprint Information" on the next page. Some addresses may not be editable, by corporate policy."

FREE and HIDE

"You may change the address information by clicking "Edit Imprint Information" on the next page."

SUPERLOCK

(Instructions are not necessary, as an address has already been chosen for the user)

Street 1.

This is the first line of the street address.

Street 2.

This is the second line of the street address.

Street 3.

This is for the third line of the street address, and is rarely used.

City, State.

These two fields appear on the same line in the ordering site.

City.

This is the input for the imprint City.

State.

This is the input for the imprint State. By default, the Field Length and Maximum are set to 2/2 to allow for two letter State codes (i.e., "CA"). However, the address layouts on some customer’s stationery can sometimes spell the state out, for instance "California". If this is the case for your client, the state Field Length and Max need to be increased (for example, to 35/50).

Zip Code.

This is the input for the imprint Zip Code.

Country.

This is the input for the imprint Country, often useful for customers with an international presence.

LOCK.

If checked this it will protect some cause the free entry fields to be un-editable upon display, depending on which address was chosen. If the "addr_locked" variable is set then the address cannot be changed using the free-entry fields upon editing. Note that the "addr_locked" variable may need to be added to the address database. It does not make sense to use this without free-entry fields. This option is not commonly used.

SUPERLOCK.

This is useful if the address has already been pre-determined by either extra variables in the CORP page or custom programming. If checked it will cause the free entry fields to display the values but not let the user edit the values in a text box. It is not a frequently used option.

Contact Section

The Contact Section of the form includes Phone Numbers, Email addresses, and other contact information to appear on the imprint of items being ordered. Like the ‘Name and Title’ section, the Contact section (or just the "Phones" portion) can be hidden if the End User is only ordering items that do not include this information in the imprint. See "About Hiding Sections" above for more information.

Phones

The phones section can have up to 7 phones. Like the Name and Title section, the phone section can be hidden for certain products.

Phone Options

Auto-Move.

This is a useful option that will ease phone number entry, although it requires that the client use a modern browser. With US-style phones, the phone number is split into three fields. Although this layout improves accuracy of input, users often complain about having to switch fields so often (using the mouse or the [TAB] key). Auto-Move automatically moves the text cursor the next field once a field has been completed. For instance entering the phone number 650-987-1234 without Auto-Move would require the user to press the keys 6 5 0 [TAB] 9 8 7 [TAB] 1 2 3 4. With auto-move the user can simply press 6 5 0 9 8 7 1 2 3 4. This feature only works on Netscape > 4.7 and Internet Explorer > 4.5. On Internet Explorer the cursor stays in the field after it is filled up, and then the next digit entered will appear in the next field. On Netscape the cursor will move to the next field as soon as the current field is filled up. Neither browser will allow deleting to automatically move to the previous field.

Labels.

Each phone is made up of a label, the phone number and optionally may the extension label, and the extension. The label can be hard-coded, free-entry or a drop down. In all three cases the value is passed to the style, and therefore it is the personal page that should determine what the phone labels on the stationery look like, unless you choose to override this in your style. You may also choose to enter a "Style Value" for Hard Coded or Drop-down phone labels, which will pass another value (different than what is displayed to the user) into the style files.

Note that you need not enter drop-down information more than once... on subsequent phones you can simply "Copy values" from previous phones by clicking the link next to the drop down list.

Fields.

The phone number fields are not configurable. They either appear as three separate fields, for US-style numbers, or as a single field, for international-style numbers. The Catalog page determines which style is displayed, see the "Catalog Admin" menu item for more details. The option called "Uneditable entries" under the hard-coded label option will actually remove the phone fields and display a hard-coded, fixed phone number instead. You can vary the number of fields shown / allowed for either Domestic or International format phone numbers - this is configured at the top of the Phones section.

Extension.

The extension label can be hard-coded or a drop-down and like the phone label is passed to the style. A drop-down for the extension is often used to accommodate pager pin numbers. The extension field can be configured for length. If the "Wrap Extension to Newline" option is checked, then the extension fields will appear below the phone number field on the form. This does not affect the phone layout in the style.

[Tip]Passing Phone Numbers from an Address Database

Occasionally, you may run across a client with hard-coded phones for each particular office location, such as Main phone and fax numbers. One way to accommodate this in your sites is to actually add the phone number(s) to the address database. Here’s how:

Procedure 25.1. How to Pass Phone Numbers from an Address Database

  1. Add ‘card_phone’ and/or ‘card_fax" to "addrfields" using the Address List Editor menu item.

  2. Populate your address list database with the correct information.

  3. Alter your style to include logic that looks for these variables.

  4. If the user selects an address from the drop-down list having phone numbers defined, these numbers will be available to you in your style.

Contact PageDNA support if you need any assistance configuring your site or style.

E-mail

The e-mails fields are very similar to the e-mail field on the AUTHORIZATION page. The e-mail can be auto-formatted, which is described below, or have a fixed domain (i.e. @PageDNA.net) or a drop-down list of domains.

The website fields can be a fixed URL or a text-box for free-entry of a URL or a drop-down list of URLs. If the "Is this optional" option is selected then the user must check a checkbox for the website to show up on the stationery.

The drop-down list is not contained in-line, it must be managed seperately in either a file or in the site configuration database. Currently non-in-line drop-downs must be set up through PageDNA, although once set up they can be managed through the site configuration menu.

The beeper field is similar to the website fields, except there is no drop-down option. It is suitable for any non-phone, non-email, non-website communication identifier that the customer may wish to allow on their stationery. For instance, a company-wide beeper, or an instant messenger ID.

Using the Multiple Personal Feature

Multiple Personal Feature is an elegant solution to a very complex problem: asking the user for the correct fields when ordering one of many complex imprinted products. Put simply, Multiple Personal Feature enables creation of unlimited independent personal imprint forms and lets you link them to products or divisions on your site.

This feature is extremely useful if different products (or divisions) on a single site require different imprint inputs from the user. For example, a letterhead imprinted product may only allow the user to enter two phone numbers, whereas business cards allow 4 phones. We need to create a separate version of the phone input options to show when people order just letterhead, but show the more complex form when users order business cards or both products at the same time.

Using the Multiple Personal Feature menu item

The Multiple Personal Feature is found in the Menu each site in Web Templates by clicking on the plus (+) next to Personal Page. By default, all items are linked to the (Base) personal form. If you do not define an alternate mapping, this form is used for all products, and the sections are shown based on which items are ordered. To create a new mapping, it is necessary to create an alternate personal form.

To create a new alternate personal form, enter a tagname for the form such as letterhead, select the personal form to 'clone' with the radio button above (default is your only option if you are creating your first additional personal form). Then click New. The tag must start with a letter and cannot contain any additional underscores. The only allowed characters are letters and numbers.

Figure 25.1. Create New Personal Form

Create New Personal Form


The new Personal form now appears in the list. Next we need to link items or divisions to this new form. To do this, check the divisions or product(s) that should use this alternate personal form, select the new personal form, and click the " Link " button.

You can link personal forms to items (individually) or divisions. The divisions are listed on the left below "Divisions". The alternate personal forms are listed on the right, below "Personal Forms". , and can map each product to its own personal form if necessary.

The page will refresh and you will see that linkage has been established in the items list as indicated by an arrow pointing to the new personal form for this product.

Making changes: To change the divisions or products linked to an alternate personal form, enter the tagname for the form as it appears under "Current Personal Forms", check the divisions that should use this alternate personal form, and click the submit query button.

To delete an alternate personal form, enter the tagname as it appears under "Current personal forms", and press delete. You will be asked to confirm the deletion.

Lastly, you need to configure this new Personal form to meet the needs of the linked products. A new menu item for editing the alternate personal form you created will now appear on the menu. Click the word "Menu" on the navigation bar to return and look under the "Ordering Pages" section. For the example of a chosen tag of "letterhead", the menu item for that form would be titled, "Personal_letterhead Page".

If a user selects two products in the same order that use different personal forms, the system will use the personal form listed highest in the list presented inside Multiple Personal Feature. To change the order of precedence for different personal forms, you can use the Move Up and Move Down buttons on the right side of the Multiple Personal screen.

Keep in mind that creating many personal forms will make your administration menu very long. So, it is a good idea to enter in descriptive tagnames for your personal forms to help you find the right one quickly. Even so, if you ever forget which personal form belongs to which item, you can find this relationship in the "Edit Items" menu under the "configure_form" column.

Configure "Imprint" form: Item Forms and Shared Forms

Item Forms and Shared Forms are tied to products or items, and are shown at the "Configure" step when the product is ordered. Each product may have a Shared Form and an Item Form. The difference is that Shared Forms have an associated name, and can be shared across multiple items. Please see Understanding Personal Forms, Shared Forms and Item Forms for an explanation of the difference between these forms.

Item forms are enabled by visiting the "Forms" tab of the Item Editor:

Figure 25.2. A screenshot of Item Editor's "Forms" tab

A screenshot of Item Editor's "Forms" tab


Choose a type, then save. "Form Editor" is the recommended type. After saving, you will see a link to edit the Item Form, both in the Item Editor and in the menu itself.

Figure 25.3. Item Editor's "Forms" tab with Item Form links

Item Editor's "Forms" tab with Item Form links


In other words, after setting the type of Item Form on the product definition, a menu item for editing that Item Form, appears in the menu. The menu item will include the type of Item Form along with the product's unique identifier - the 'tag'. For example, an item with the tag 'bc' (Business Card) with a translation form on the site would generate a menu item named:

Item Form translation for bc 

You can change the type of Item Form used. When changing from a Generic Gold type to a Form Editor type, an option to convert the form is presented. See Converting To Form Editor for more information.

Configuring Shared Forms is also done in the Item Editor. Either Choose "New..." from the list and give the item form a name, such as "Business Cards Form" or "bcform", or choose an existing Shared Form from the list.

You do not need to select a type when creating a Shared Form, as they are always created using the "Form Editor" type. They used to be created as Generic Gold types. When choosing an existing Shared Form that is currently a Generic Gold type, you will be able to convert to a Form Editor type. See Converting To Form Editor for more information.

Item forms and Shared forms are often useful if you need to provide the end user with configuration options specific to a particular item. These forms allow you to extend the ordering site to almost any product niche. Following are descriptions and instructions for configuring some of the item forms PageDNA offers.

Generally speaking, using Shared Forms is more convenient since future products needing the same imprint fields will not need to re-created. Item Forms can be used to provide supplementary fields, that are unique to one of the products using a common shared form, or to use a form type other than Form Editor.

Form Editor - Dynamic Form Editor

Form Editor is a very convenient way of editing item forms that supplants the Generic Gold form type. Form Editor allows you to create a simple form for your users with a wide variety of inputs, including free-entry fields, drop-down lists, checkboxes and other fields. This is useful for adding extra fields to a product - such as those not covered by the core PageDNA technology. These fields can be referred to in your styles (for variable items) or sent downstream in email messages sent to the customer and/or manufacturing by adding the variable(s) to the Custom Fields section of an email template.

When you first edit a Form Editor form, you will see the form as your users see it. When you highlight the individual fields, you will have icons to Clone, Edit, Move up, Move Down and Delete a field, respectively. In between rows, an arrow allows for insertion of fields.

Each field needs a variable name, that is different from the other fields in the form. This variable name is passed to the style. There are rules for these field names: they cannot start with a number, cannot have any spaces or funny characters (includes dashes, percentage signs, etc.) except underscores.

Field Input Options

When you add a new input you are presented with a dialog asking which input type you'd like to insert. There are four categories available - browse them by clicking the darker grey sub-headings, to expand the selected option.

Figure 25.4. Form Editor - Field Selection

Form Editor - Field Selection


***** All-Purpose *****

Form Group/Section

This is not an input, but is used to create section dividers or "sub-headings" between inputs. Does not require a Field Name.

Single Line Text Input

This provides the user with a single line of text input, like most standard inputs provided to users. Field can be made optional or required, can have a configurable size (# of digits shown to user) and maximum length (number of characters allowed), can be pre-populated with a default value and lastly can have copy appearing before the input given to users. This latter feature could be used - for example - to put a dollar sign ('$') in front of a price input so the users know they do not need to include the dollar sign in their input.

Multi-Line Text Input

Provides users with a large text box. Width of the text box is edited in the "Columns" field and the height of the default text box is controlled with the "Rows" input. You can define default text, make this required or optional, and also turn on optional character or line counters to keep users from entering too much data into each field.

Lastly, you can turn on a spell checker to allow users to check their verbiage before proofing. Simply select the checkbox for Spell check when setting up the Generic_Gold_form.

Figure 25.5. generic_gold_form selection

generic_gold_form selection


The form look like this:

Figure 25.6. How the form looks to the user

How the form looks to the user


When the user selects the Spell Check button at the bottom of the page, they see:

Figure 25.7. Spell Check pop-up window

Spell Check pop-up window


Drop-Down List

Provides your users with a custom drop-down list of options. Enter one option per line - the options will be sorted in the order you enter them here.

You can either use a standard format such as:

Option 1
Option 2

Or alternatively, you can enter the values using a special format that allows one thing to be shown to users in the drop down list, but have another thing to be passed to the style:

con/doe_john.eps|Doe, John
con/smith_jane.eps|Smith, Jane
other|Other Upload below...

In the example shown directly above, the user would see three options appearing in the order they are listed: "Doe, John", then "Smith, Jane" then "Other... Upload below".

Depending on what they select, the value to the left of the vertical bar symbol "|" will be sent to the style - in this case, it either is sending the path to a pre-uploaded file in the "con" directory, or sending "other" if the user indicated they wish to upload another photo.

This approach can be useful if you want to send something meaningful to the style (the locations of assets to display on the product, above) but something short and sweet to the users (the names in a format the users recognize in this case).

For an example of using a custom drop-down list to allow the user to choose a color, see our example found in the Typography Exceptions chapter of the Style Building section of this documentation.

Checkbox Table Field

This input type allows you to present the user with a list of checkboxes, all presented in a more compact and more easily edited format than you would encounter if you tried to build separate inputs for a long set of options. Contact support for assistance with this feature.

Radio Button Table Field

Like the checkbox table, but allows only one value to be selected at a time. This input type allows you to present the user with a list of radio buttons (round buttons, only allowing a single item to be selected), all presented in a more compact and more easily edited format than you would encounter if you tried to build separate inputs for a long set of options.

***** Upload *****

You may find the File Upload Document Button field and File Upload To Style Button field in the Upload section easier to use and more user friendly than the File Upload Button field in the Advanced section.

File Upload Document Button Field

This field type is designed so the user can upload a print file that will not be embedded in a style, like an upload used for an SosSpecialRequestItem. It has a smaller set of options than the File Upload Button field (under the Advanced section) to simplify setup. It also has a Convert To PDF option which allows uploading Microsoft Office files, e.g. Word, PowerPoint, and Excel, and converts them automatically to PDF format. Our solution is unique because it does NOT require installation of a print driver, such as Adobe’s PDF JobReady. We send both the converted AND the original documents to production.

[Note]Note

The Convert To PDF option is not available for the File Upload Button field, found in the Advanced section.

Figure 25.8. File Upload Document Button Field

File Upload Document Button Field


File Upload To Style Button Field

This is a simplified version of the File Upload Button field, found in the Advanced section. This field allows for conversion to color or black and white. It cannot check file type or color space.

Under the Aspect Ratio Checking section are three options. The width and height must be specified in points. The Minimum Resolution should be the minimum that you are willing to print for the uploaded file.

If you allow for cropping on the site:

  • If you specify both the width and height, the user will be presented with a single slider to adjust the size of the cropped area. The aspect ratio will be maintained as the area to be cropped is adjusted. The user will not be able to crop to less than the minimum dimensions specified.

  • If you specify only one dimension, the user will be presented with two sliders to adjust the cropped area's height and width. They will not be able to crop to less than the minimum dimension specified.

  • The user can drag the cropped area around to capture the part of the image they need.

  • After cropping, a Crop button will appear on the item form so the user can re-crop the image after proofing.

[Note]Note

Cropping cannot be disabled for this field type. If cropping is enabled on the site and you do not want to allow cropping, please use the File Upload Button field in the Advanced section.

Figure 25.9. File Upload To Style Button Field

File Upload To Style Button Field


***** Contact Info *****

Primary Address Drop-Down

If you do not, or cannot use the address drop-down list in the Personal Form, and need to create a single, or primary address drop-down list using the Form editor, please configure the field as follows:

Variable Name: card_office

Label: We recommend adding a label

Dropdown Datasource: Address List will access the Address List Editor, located in the menu > Site Content section. Shipping Addresses will access Shipping Addresses, located in the menu > Site Content section. Shipping Addresses is an address list database separate from the Address List Editor.

Use Division Filter: This must be enabled if you need to filter addresses based on Division.

Use Blank Option will present a blank set of address fields to the user. We recommend adding Blank Option Text, e.g. Please choose...

Dynamic Fill: If you will present address fields populated with the user's selection from the address drop-down list, enable this. As an option, you can create Read-Only fields populated with the address information so the user cannot change it.

Fill On Page Load: Automatically fill fields with the values from the first available value when the page loads, if no values are set. The "Dynamic Fill" option must be enabled for this to work.

Do not enter anything in the Remap fields

Objdest: as a general rule, this is not needed for the primary address drop-down list.

Division Filter drop-down: This needs to be set to Division when filtering addresses based on Division.

Please see the screenshot below for the standard settings without filering based on Division.

Figure 25.10. Primary Address Drop-Down List

Primary Address Drop-Down List


Second and Third Address Drop-Downs

You may need to include more than one imprinted address on a product. While giving users two drop-down address lists is not supported in the Personal Page, you can do this with an Item Form or Shared Item Form using the form Editor.

The approach described here allows any number of address drop-downs of the same address list to be shown to the user. This is accomplished by creating an Item Form or Shared Item Form and then adding one or more address drop down lists as needed to the Item Form.

The address drop-down lists are all fed by the central address database for your site, edited through the Address List Editor, found under the Site Content section in the site's menu. These address drop-down lists can be configured to autofill text fields or send the selected address to the style and have it typeset without populating any fields on the Item Form.

In the Item Form using the Form Editor, add an Address Dropdown List field. We recommend using a variable name like addr2 or address2. In this example we used address2.

Enter a label, which will be visible in the ordering session.

As a general rule, the Datasource will be Address List. The list can be filtered by Division and you can use a Blank Option. If using the Blank Option, please complete the Blank Option Text, e.g. Please choose..., as in the example below.

If you will be displaying the information for the address on the Item Form, you should enable the checkbox for Dynamic Fill as in the example below. The fields you create to display the address information can be editable or read only. The variables you need to use for text fields to be autfilled need to begin with the variable used for the address drop-down list, e.g. address2_street1.

You may want to enable Fill On Page Load, depending upon the behavior needed. This is usually desirable if not using a Blank Option.

Remap: This is what distinguishes the second address drop-down list from the primary address list. In this example we need to remap from card_ to address2_

[Important]Important

If you do not enter anything in the Remap fields, when the user selects an address from the primary address list, it will populate the fields for the second address. And, when they select a second address, it will change the primary one.

Objdest: This needs to be enabled only if you are not displaying address fields populated with the user's selection from the drop-down list.

If filtering addresses by Division, the Division Filter should be set to Division. Division filtering is not being used in this example.

Figure 25.11. Second Address Drop-Down List Field

Second Address Drop-Down List Field

The example below deals with a second and third address drop-down list in a style using the variable names address2 and address3.

When in Visual Style Editor, you will need to enable Block Logic. You would then use the syntax shown in the example below in either the Preblocks tab or Postblocks tab to pull in the address fields for the selected addresses:

address2=DEFOBJ(address2) or ''

Addr2Block =DWIMBLOCK([F1, CENTER,
                      address2.card_street1, NEWLINE,
                      address2.card_city, ', ', address2.card_state, NEWLINE,
                      address2.main_phone],
                      (153, 20), (MIDDLE, BOTTOM))

address3=DEFOBJ(address3) or ''

Addr3Block =DWIMBLOCK([F1, CENTER,
                      address3.card_street1, NEWLINE,
                      address3.card_city, ', ', address3.card_state, NEWLINE,
                      address3.main_phone],
                      (153, 80), (MIDDLE, BOTTOM))

Note the emphasis added above. The modifiers 'address2.' and 'address3.' have been added in front of the 'regular' fieldnames for the address field names so as to access what the user selected in the 'address2' and 'address3' drop-downs. If you ever forget your address field names, visit "Address List Editor" found in the Menu under Content Admin and use the "Change Addrfields" button to view the current setup.

You can use the above approach to add as many drop-down lists as you want to an item, however we still strongly recommend using the "Personal" form drop-down list as your primary address list for routine functions.

Domestic Phone

This adds a US-formatted phone input to the form. This is advised where the "core" phones provided in the "Personal" page fall short on your requirements. Whenever possible, we recommend using the "Personal Page" phones as they have more options and tie more closely into other parts of the system.

Labeled Domestic Phone (also International)

The Labeled Domestic Phone is more versatile than the Domestic Phone (above), allowing you to configure the way phone labels and extension labels are displayed. It also allows for International style phone fields if they are forced by you or if you allow the user to select between the two formats for all the phone fields on the form. International style phones are a single text field. The International style will also pass the extension label and extension number if these are enabled. (All the phone fields will be either Domestic or International on the form if you force them or if the user changes the format.)

Email Field

A field that will allow an email address to be entered and show the domain (the part after the '@') as static text, a free input, or as a drop-down list or pre-selected email addresses.

City, State, ZIP

Allow a user to enter a city, state and zip code on one field, with an option for the state value to be a drop-down list. The drop-down can be US states and/or Canadian provinces.

State

Drop down list of US states.

State

Drop down list of Countries.

***** Date and Time *****

Date

This option creates a date input field for users. It can be configured to ask for general inputs, such as just asking for a month, to very specific inputs like asking for a full date ("Monday, May 8th, 2005"). The options include the ability to warn the user if they choose a date in the past, notification if they choose a day of week that doesn't correspond to the specific date they chose, and the ability to use the current date as the default. Several fields are sent to the style from this input. They will be carry the prefix of the Field Name you've given this input. If you are unsure of a field's name, save and re-edit the form and look at the green text next to each part in the form builder - these are the portions of code to reference in your style in order to get that part of the date selection.

Time

This provides your users with a single or dual (time span) input for date. You configure how to increment the minutes in the "Incriminator" input. If you enter 15 here, the user will see time selections for every 15 minutes of a day and be limited to choosing one of these. Other options here include the use and format of suffix, and setting the current time as the default.

Figure 25.12. Date and Time Options

Date and Time Options


***** Advanced *****

File Upload

One of the most powerful features offered in Generic_gold, this input type allows your users to upload a file (GIF, TIFF, EPS, or JPEG) for inclusion on a product.

Advanced options for photo upload include the ability to check the uploaded photo before allowing the user to proceed. Upon image upload we can check the file for file type (JPEG, GIF, TIFF or EPS), color space (greyscale, RGB, CMYK, or indexed), image aspect ratio (ie, only allow photos sized 4:3, +/- 20%) and image resolution (ie, shortest edge must be longer than 20 points).

... you can, in other words, selectively test uploaded files and reject them based on these attributes, before the user even proofs their item. Once the file is uploaded, the system converts that file to EPS on our end, whereafter you can convert colorspace (color to greyscale), auto-shrink picture to fit inside a defined 'picture frame', with picture aligned horizontally and vertically per your specs.

[Note]Note

If you allow uploading image types other than EPS, make sure to select one of these options under "Convert to EPS": "Color" or "Black and White"

If you wish to include photo upload on a site and have additional questions, please contact support and we will provide you with more detailed instructions for your particular scenario.

Profile Drop-down

This feature - which only works on Profile sites - allows access to data stored in side profiles from a custom item form. Contact support if you think you need this feature.

Profile Drop Down List

This feature - which only works on Profile sites - allows access to a field from the users' profile. Contact support if you think you need this feature.

Sublogo Drop-down

This feature allows a user to select a "sublogo" with a form input designed expressly for this purpose. Please see seperate documentation http://www.nationsprint.com/hub/docs/html/SiteConfiguration/custom-item-forms-sublogo.html

Radio Button

Normally, you will create multiple radio button inputs at a time to allow a user to select from one of a list of options... only one of the inputs can be made the default (pre-selected when the user visits). Name all of your linked Radio Buttons with the same "Field Name" but make sure you have a different "Value Passed to Style" so you can tell in your style which option was selected.

Checkbox Field

Provides users with a checkbox to enable or disable activation of something of your choice. The value you enter will be sent to the style as a string of text, but only if the checkbox was selected.

Single-Line Password Input

A password text field that hides the input as bullets as users type.

Validated Text Input

A single-line text field that validates the input upon submission of the form. This gives the form a way to force the user to enter text in a particular format.  

There are two modes which can be used for text checking: a simple Pattern method, or using the more advanced Regular Expression method. Read more about regular expressions here: http://docs.python.org/library/re.html#regular-expression-syntax

Read-Only Input

A single-line text field that is appears in an uneditable state. This is useful for showing a value that is filled from an address drop-down or from an earlier step in the site.

Raw HTML Field

This field allows arbitrary HTML to be entered and displayed in the form where the field would normally appear.

No scripting or variable substitution is offered. Any value in the INPUT, SELECT, TEXTAREA tags or other field tags will be used as a default and will be changed as needed to retain the current value in the form.

Some or all of the fields can be marked as required.

Canned Blurb Field

Canned Blurbs add functionality to multi-line text boxes on an form. They allow the customer to select from several prewritten text blocks by using a dropdown list to make their choice.

To set up a canned blurb field, choose a blurb key. The field name is a good choice. You can use the same blurb key among different fields. Once the option has been added to your form you can add, edit, and delete blurbs using the tools on the form page, as shown below. To Add a blurb, choose the "[insert new...]" option, type in the blurb in the box below, and press Update. You will then be prompted to enter a label for the blurb. To edit a blurb, choose the option, modify the text, and press Update. You will be prompted to change the blurb's label if desired.

Figure 25.13. Canned blurb

Canned blurb


Mini-Tutorial

Lets say you wish to create a drop-down list of "Back Side Imprints" for a business card. This would be a scenario wherein you wish to only display these backsides to the user while proofing - You would first edit the business card item (using Item Editor in the menu) and enable a "generic_gold" item form in the custom tab.... then, after saving, click "Item Form" to build the new custom item form. The form you build will ONLY appear when users order the product linked to this item form. You may need to start a new order to have the new form appear.

generic_gold - Generic Form Builder, Gold

Generic Gold forms allow you to create a simple form for your users with a wide variety of inputs, including free-entry fields, drop-down lists, checkboxes and other fields. This is useful for adding extra fields to a product - such as those not covered by the core PageDNA technology. These fields can be referred to in your styles (for variable items) or sent downstream in email messages sent to the customer and manufacturing.

When you first edit a generic_gold form, you will see at the top options for the Form Header and Subtitle. These are shown at the top of the form you are about to build, and help the user understand which product they are configuring when ordering multiple items at the same time.

Most of the time, we recommend that you use a Form Title such as - for example:

Options for Business Card

Because this text does not update if you change your product name, you may wish to try the following text for your Form Title, which will automatically update the form to show the name of your product, even if it changes in the future:

Options for %(self.get_longname())s

Below the Form Header, you will see slots for 10 different inputs - the inputs you define will appear to the user in the order they are entered here. If you run out of fields, simply save the form and edit again, and you will have 10 new blank fields to work with. You can have as many inputs as you wish. Use the "Jump Pad" to move quickly to the next form field, simply by clicking on the number for the input you wish to edit.

Each input needs a Field Label. This is the text shown to the left of the input, explaining to the user what they are to enter (eg, "Welcome Message:"). For section headers, this is the text shown across the banner (which spans both columns and has no input).

Each input (except section headers) needs a Field Name. This becomes the variable name passed to the style. There are rules for these field names: they cannot start with a number, cannot have any spaces or funny characters (includes dashes, percentage signs, etc.) - underscores are allowed, however. Additionally, we strongly recommend that you make sure that all Field Names across an entire site be unique - this is important so that if a user orders two products at the same time, no "name space collision" occurs. Our recommendation is to start each field name with the tag for that product, for example, for a business card with a tag of "bc1", you might call your field name:

bc1_yourfield

After assigning a field name, you need to define what type of input this field will be. Each input can be one of the following: blank (used for section headers, which are a way to break up groups of fields into clusters), single line of text, multiple lines of text (for long bits of text like paragraphs), Domestic phone number, checkbox, custom drop-down list, drop-down list of states, drop-down list for date, drop-down list for time, or a file upload.

Most commonly, "generic_gold" forms are used to add text inputs to products that are not supported in our standard "personal" imprint form. While the "personal" form handles most common inputs such as name, title, addresses, phones and other contact info, from time to time you may find that you need additional fields - this is when the generic_gold form comes in handy. For direct mail pieces or other complex products, you may find that you build most or all of the inputs using generic_gold. The various input types are outlined below:

None (for sub-headings)

This is not an input, but is used to create section dividers or "sub-headings" between inputs. Does not require a Field Name.

Single Line Text Input

This provides the user with a single line of text input, like most standard inputs provided to users. Field can be made optional or required, can have a configurable size (# of digits shown to user) and maximum length (number of characters allowed), can be pre-populated with a default value and lastly can have copy appearing before the input given to users. This latter feature could be used - for example - to put a dollar sign ('$') in front of a price input so the users know they do not need to include the dollar sign in their input.

Multi-Line Text Input

Provides users with a large text box. Width of the text box is edited in the "Columns" field and the height of the default text box is controlled with the "Rows" input. You can define default text, make this required or optional, and also turn on optional character or line counters to keep users from entering too much data into each field.

Lastly, you can turn on a spell checker to allow users to check their verbiage before proofing. Simply select the checkbox for Spell check when setting up the form.

Figure 25.14. generic_gold_form selection

generic_gold_form selection


The form look like this:

Figure 25.15. How the form looks to the user

How the form looks to the user


When the user selects the Spell Check button at the bottom of the page, they see:

Figure 25.16. Spell Check pop-up window

Spell Check pop-up window


Domestic Phone Number

This adds a US-formatted phone input to the form. This is advised where the "core" phones provided in the "Personal" page fall short on your requirements. Whenever possible, we recommend using the "Personal" page phones.

Checkbox Element

Provides users with a checkbox to enable or disable activation of something of your choice. The value you enter will be sent to the style as a string of text, but only if the checkbox was selected.

Radio Button

Normally, you will create multiple radio button inputs at a time to allow a user to select from one of a list of options... only one of the inputs can be made the default (pre-selected when the user visits). Name all of your linked Radio Buttons with the same "Field Name" but make sure you have a different "Value Passed to Style" so you can tell in your style which option was selected.

Custom Drop-Down List

Provides your users with a custom drop-down list of options. Enter one option per line - the options will be sorted in the order you enter them here.

You can either use a standard format such as:

Option 1
Option 2

Or alternatively, you can enter the values using a special format that allows one thing to be shown to users in the drop down list, but have another thing to be passed to the style:

con/doe_john.eps|Doe, John
con/smith_jane.eps|Smith, Jane
other|Other Upload below...

In the example shown directly above, the user would see three options appearing in the order they are listed: "Doe, John", then "Smith, Jane" then "Other... Upload below".

Depending on what they select, the value to the left of the vertical bar symbol "|" will be sent to the style - in this case, it either is sending the path to a pre-uploaded file in the "con" directory, or sending "other" if the user indicated they wish to upload another photo.

This approach can be useful if you want to send something meaningful to the style (the locations of assets to display on the product, above) but something short and sweet to the users (the names in a format the users recognize in this case).

For an example of using a custom drop-down list to allow the user to choose a color, see our example found in the Typography Exceptions chapter of the Style Building section of this documentation.

Checkbox Table

This input type allows you to present the user with a list of checkboxes, all presented in a more compact and more easily edited format than you would encounter if you tried to build separate inputs for a long set of options. Contact support for assistance with this feature.

State

Provides users with a pre-built drop-down list containing US states. You can select whether to use abbreviated ("CA") or standard formatted ("California") display. You can also add a Default Blank Option to make the state non-selected upon first view.

Date

This sophisticated input creates a date input for users. This can range from just asking for a month to asking for a full date ("Monday, May 8th, 2005"). There are a number of options, including the ability to warn the user if they choose a date in the past, or if they choose a day of week that doesn't correspond to the specific day they chose. Note that several fields are sent to the style... all will be prefixed with your Field Name you've given this input. If you are ever confused, save and re-edit the form and look at the green text next to each "chunk" in the form builder - these are the bits of code to reference in your style to get that chunk of the date selection.

Time

This provides your users with a single or dual (time span) input for date. You configure how to increment the minutes in the "Incrementor" input... if you enter 15 here, the user will see time selections for every 15 minutes of a day and be limited to choosing one of these.

File Upload

One of the most powerful features offered in Generic_gold, this input type allows your users to upload a file (GIF, TIFF, EPS, or JPEG) for inclusion on a product.

Advanced options for photo upload include the ability to check the uploaded photo before allowing the user to proceed. Upon image upload we can check the file for file type (JPEG, GIF, TIFF or EPS), color space (greyscale, RGB, CMYK, or indexed), image aspect ratio (ie, only allow photos sized 4:3, +/- 20%) and image resolution (ie, shortest edge must be longer than 20 points).

... you can, in other words, selectively test uploaded files and reject them based on these attributes, before the user even proofs their item. Once the file is uploaded, the system converts that file to EPS on our end, whereafter you can convert colorspace (color to greyscale), auto-shrink picture to fit inside a defined 'picture frame', with picture aligned horizontally and vertically per your specs.

[Note]Note

If you allow uploading image types other than EPS, make sure to select one of these options under "Convert to EPS": "Color" or "Black and White"

If you wish to include photo upload on a site and have additional questions, please contact support and we will provide you with more detailed instructions for your particular scenario.

Address Drop-Down

At times you may need to include more than one imprinted address on a product. While giving users two drop-down addresslists is not supported in the "Personal" page at this time, you can do this with a generic_gold form. This approach allows any number of address drop-downs to be shown to the user. This is accomplished by creating a "Generic_Gold" form and then adding one or more additional "Address List" drop downs as needed to that custom form.

The Address List Drop-Downs are all fed by the central address database for your site, edited through the Menu Item "Address List Editor". Note that these drop-down address items cannot be configured to 'auto-fill' text fields such as the "core" personal form.

Let's say you give the first generic_gold input type a "field name" such as:

	address2

...and your second address list gets a "field name" such as:

	address3

You would then using the syntax shown in the example below to pull in the address fields for the selected addresses:

address2=DEFOBJ(address2)

Addr2Block =DWIMBLOCK([F1, CENTER,
                      address2.card_street1, NEWLINE,
                      address2.card_city, ', ', address2.card_state, NEWLINE,
                      address2.main_phone],
                      (153, 20), (MIDDLE, BOTTOM))

address3=DEFOBJ(address3)

Addr3Block =DWIMBLOCK([F1, CENTER,
                      address3.card_street1, NEWLINE,
                      address3.card_city, ', ', address3.card_state, NEWLINE,
                      address3.main_phone],
                      (153, 80), (MIDDLE, BOTTOM))

Note the emphasis added above. The modifiers 'address2.' and 'address3.' have been added in front of the 'regular' fieldnames for the address field names so as to access what the user selected in the 'address2' and 'address3' drop-downs. If you ever forget your address field names, visit "Address List Editor" found in the Menu under Content Admin and use the "Change Addrfields" button to view the current setup.

You can use the above approach to add as many drop-down lists as you want to an item, however we still strongly recommend using the "Personal" form drop-down list as your primary address list for routine functions.

Profile Drop-down

This feature - which only works on Profile sites - allows access to data stored in side profiles from a custom item form. Contact support if you think you need this feature.

Sublogo Drop-down

Feature under development.

Profile Field

This feature - which only works on Profile sites - allows access to a field from the users' profile. Contact support if you think you need this feature.

Mini-Tutorial

Lets say you wish to create a drop-down list of "Back Side Imprints" for a business card. This would be a scenario wherein you wish to only display these backsides to the user while proofing - You would first edit the business card item (using Item Editor in the menu) and enable a "generic_gold" item form in the custom tab.... then, after saving, click "Item Form" to build the new custom item form. The form you build will ONLY appear when users order the product linked to this item form. You may need to start a new order to have the new form appear.

translation - Translation Form

The 'translation' item form is Used for products needing translation options. This option provides the user with a list of drop-downs (optionally including 'None') to choose for a translation. This information is automatically sent downstream in both the confirmation email sent to the customer as well as the email sent to manufacturing.

sublogo - Sublogo Selection Field

Using Sublogos

Scenario: Sublogos are increasingly popular in corporate identity items wherein they can indicate a certification level, 'President's Club' status, olympic sponsorship, corporate anniversaries, and more.

A "Sublogo" can supplement the main corporate logo with one (or more) usually optional logos or emblems, or can constitute the entire background of a card in the case of a photo. In other words, Sub Logo Setup in the site's menu can be used to store a library of images. Our customers are finding many different ways to use this tool for actual sublogos, stock photos for use on flyers and postcards, and to change part or all of the background artwork.

Figure 25.17. Example of sub logos on a business card

Example of sub logos on a business card

For the example above, we’ll use a business card which can optionally include 1 or more of the 'sublogos' as shown - depending on user selection during the ordering process.

The position of the lower-left corner of each of the logos should be noted so that their location can be matched later in the Visual Style Editor or Style Editor Gold.

Next, the sublogos must be saved as individual Illustrator 8 EPS files, preferably with simple, memorable filenames lacking spaces or 'funny characters'.

[Caution]Caution

You must use EPS files for the actual sublogo. Sub Logo Setup will create JPG or GIF thumbnails for you.

In this example, there are three files:

  1. 50.eps

  2. check.eps

  3. hand.eps

Next, the logos can be uploaded into the system by way of Sub Logo Setup in the site's menu, or you can upload the files to the site using the File Uploader in the site's menu. The files will appear in the drop-down list of available files in the Edit List tab of Sub Logo Setup.

Setup Tab: First, you need to configure the Setup tab of Sub Logo Setup before importing files.

The Filter Field drop-down list allows you to filter images based on either a Profile field, Division field, or even "Other." For filtering to take effect, you will need to enable the Restricted checkbox for individual images in the Edit List tab of Sub Logo Setup.

Figure 25.18. Sublogo Setup Tab

Sublogo Setup Tab

Preview Filetype: You do need to select a Preview Filetype if you want the user to see thumbnails of possible selections. JPEG works best for photographs. GIF is a better choice for type, logos, or diagrams.

Preview Maxheight and Preview Maxwidth: If the logos are fairly large, you may wish to limit the preview size of the item by setting Preview Maxheight and/or Preview Maxwidth. Specifying a value for both will make all the thumbnails the same size. If you do not declare a Preview Maxheight or Preview Maxwidth, the thumbnail will be the size of the file you uploaded. You can also specify just the Preview Maxheight or just the Preview Maxwidth to make all the thumbnails uniform in just their width or height.

Click the Apply Settings button to save the configuration.

Edit List Tab: This is where you will upload the logos to the system and associate them with one or more items. (Please see the see screenshot below.)

For each item to be uploaded, click "Choose File", locate the file on your hard drive, or select a file from the drop-down list if you uploaded the file using the File Uploader. Unless you enable the For All Items checkbox, make sure to enter the item tag(s) (e.g. lh_logo) in the Linked Items list. You can also assign it a "Title" if the logo is difficult to see at its preview size. Click Apply Settings.

[Note]Note

Note: The "For all items" checkbox will make the logo "available" to all items, though only items containing a form and a style that references them will be used.

The file will be uploaded and added to the list of Choices above.

Sublogo Groups

The Groups field allows you to display one or more drop-downs for an item in an ordering session that lets you make arbitrary groupings of sublogos, which can be accessed from the Sublogo Selection field settings as checkboxes. Selecting these allows the shown sublogos to be filtered in addition to, or instead of filtering by item tag in the Linked Items section of the Edit List tab in Sub Logo Setup.

[Important]Important

When using the Groups field, the "For All Items" checkbox needs to be enabled for each sublogo OR you need to enter individual item tags in the Linked Items field. If For All Items is not enabled and you have not entered an item tag, the sublogo will not appear for any items.

You can also use Groups AND item tags to refine the filtering for image availability. This requires careful planning.

For instance, if you have 4 sublogos with groups set thusly:

Sublogo 1 - Front Side
Sublogo 2 - Front Side, Back Side
Sublogo 3 - Back Side
Sublogo 4 - Back Side

You can then set up an Item Form with two sublogo selection fields, the first to have only Front Side sublogos, and the second to have only Back Side sublogos, the first selections would show Sublogo 1 and 2, and the Back Side would show Sublogos 2, 3 and 4. If no groups are chosen in the selection field's settings, then all sublogos available to the current working item are shown.

Do the same for the remaining logos. A completed, uploaded logos list is shown here for reference.

Figure 25.19. All sub logos uploaded

All sub logos uploaded

Adding Logo Blocks to the Style

You will need to add a Sublogo Selection field to an Item Form for the user to select an image and add a block to the style to display the selected sublogo. In this example, a Photo Block is added to VSE first and the field created second.

Next, edit the style into which the logos will be placed by creating one (or more) "photo blocks".

Note: The name "Photo Blocks" is a bit misleading. Photo Blocks can contain any EPS file including images or illustrations.

Figure 25.20. New Photo Block Dialog Box

New Photo Block Dialog Box

Create a new Photo Block, give it a name (in this example, it’s logoblock1), enter the numbered sublogo variable name for this block (note that each block will have its own variable name: sublogo1, sublogo2, sublogo3, etc.)

[Note]Note

Note: It’s handy, though not required, to enter a resize value to control the size of the block within the style. The default size of the Photo Block can overlap with other items in the style. In this case, the logos are 19 pts. in diameter so a resize to 20 keeps the block small on the style, but won’t affect the resulting size of the logos.

Click "Create".

Figure 25.21. New Photoblock Placed within Style

New Photoblock Placed within Style

The photo block will be placed in a default location in the style, but will need to be moved to the correct position.Enter the the X and Y values in the grey toolbar (in this case, 8.5 and 7.5), and click Apply.

Figure 25.22. All three photo blocks in position on style

All three photo blocks in position on style

Above is the resulting style with all three Photo Blocks in place.

Click Save to ensure the changes are written back to the style.

Add a Sublogo Selection Field to an Item Form

With the style established, an item form needs to be created to allow the person ordering to choose which logos will appear on the item.

In the Item Editor, edit the item to which the logos will be superimposed, and click on the "form" link.

In Item Form dro-down list, choose "Form Editor", or create a Shared Item Form if this Sublogo Selection field will be used by more than one item. Then, save your item.

You can get to the item form in one of three ways:

  1. Go to the Item Editor and edit your item. You should see an Item Form link to the right of the style

  2. In the Storefront menu, go to the Site Content section and select List of Item/Shared Forms, where you should see the Item Form you created.

    Figure 25.23. Storefront Menu List of Item/Shared Forms

    Storefront Menu List of Item/Shared Forms


    It will have the tag of your style in its name. In this example, we are editing a style with a tag of bc_logos, so when in List of Item/ Shared Forms, it appears as follows:

    Figure 25.24. List of Item/Shared Forms

    List of Item/Shared Forms


    Click this appropriate link to the Item Form to open and edit it.

  3. Place an order for the item and edit the Item Form directly in the ordering session.

Documentation for working with the Form Editor can be found here.

Figure 25.25. Sublogo Selection Field Using Checkboxes

Sublogo Selection Field Using Checkboxes

Sublogos can be chosen using checkboxes, radio buttons, or select lists ("drop-downs"). The three different types of inputs have very distinct, but subtle, differences:

Checkboxes are used when you want to allow the option of any number of items, including none. For the options in Checkboxes, previews are enabled allowing the user to see a visual sample of the logo, and they will be arranged in a table layout.

Radio Buttons are used when only one option can be chosen. Radio buttons intentionally don’t allow a user to select more than one option. Note that one of the options can be "none".

A Select List is drop-down list of items, and has the distinction of being able to also display a thumbnail, and allow the user to choose an image. It has an option to display the sublogos in a popup window, which can be enabled with the Gallery checkbox. The Gallery allows the user to see all the sublogos and select a sublogo in the Gallery. You can also enable a search field for use with Select Lists.

Select List grouping is also supported. This allows the display of Select Lists of different images for the same item.

Figure 25.26. Sublogo Select List Configuration

Sublogo Select List Configuration


Auto Rename Fields: Leave this enabled if you are creating new fields. Disable this if you are incorporating this into a site with existing styles and have converted this Item Form from an existing Generic Gold form, which also uses the checkbox layout.

Stored images can be associated with items based on a group, or by all groups. You can associate images in a particular group using this field. You can create more than one Sub Logo Selection field to use a different group, e.g. one for images used on the front and one for images for the back, provided the two sets of images are in different groups. It is also possible to associate images with more than one group in Sub Logo Setup.

Click Apply. The resulting item form is shown below. This is with the checkboxes "Table Cols" set to 1, placing all the selections in a single column.

Figure 25.27. A Preview of the item form

A Preview of the item form

If your sublogos are not appearing correctly, the most likely candidate is variable naming. Make sure the variable names match. Because you can have more than one Select List, the system will append a number to the variable name for each Select List, even if only one is presented. For example, the variable names would be sublogo1, sublogo2, etc. for each select list.

You can create more than one Sub Logo Selection field to use a different group.

Sublogo Selection with Thumbnails Using a Drop-Down List

You can choose to display a logo or sub-logo image to the user as they making a logo selection (as shown below). If you set this option up, a user can select different options from the Select Logo drop-down list and the image displayed below the drop-down list will change accordingly.

Figure 25.28. Sublogo_1

Sublogo_1


If the user clicks on the See Selections button, a popup window displays all of the options in a "gallery" like this:

Figure 25.29. Sublogo_2

Sublogo_2


Here are the steps you need to follow to set this up:

1) File Preparation

Files to be used with the Sub Logo Setup menu item need to be saved as Illustrator v.8 EPS files. They should be prepared just as you would prepare any other EPS file to be used with the PageDNA’s system.

The example displayed here is for logo selection on a business card where the logo is to be placed in the upper left corner. In this case the logo should placed in the desired position within a bounding box that is the size of a business card. The placement of the selected logo in your style would have an anchor point in the lower left corner where x=0 and y=0.

You can use this same technique for sub-logos if they do not need to move dynamically by placing each sub-logo in the required position within a bounding box that is the size of the item.

If the sub-logos do need to move dynamically, then the bounding box should be about 1 point larger than the image on all 4 sides. You would then need to write logic so that it can move based on your customer's requirements and you would probably display more than one "select list" (see note below).

2) Menu Preparation

After your files have been prepared you need to configure the Sub Logo Setup menu, found in the site's menu under Content Admin. You'll also need to place a field in an item form.

Start by setting the Preview Filetype to either gif or jpg. Next configure the Setup tab by entering the Preview Maxheight and Preview Maxwidth. Experiment with these settings until it displays as you'd like it to for the user. This is a site global setting and may affect other images in Sub Logo Setup, depending upon how they are displayed.

Figure 25.30. Sublogo_3

Sublogo_3


Now go to the Edit List tab and select your file. If this is to be displayed only for certain items, enter the item tags in the Linked Items field(s). Otherwise, check the box "For All Items." You will also need to enter a title for each graphic, which will be the name displayed to the user.

Figure 25.31. Sublogo_4

Sublogo_4


Click on the Previews tab. If your previews are not showing or you changed the Preview Filetype in the Setup tab, click on the Regenerate Previews button.

If the previews are not displaying correctly, try going to the Setup tab and change the Preview Filetype. Return the Previews tab and click the Regenerate Previews button to see your changes.

3) Configuring the Item Form

If you are using the generic_gold form then you will need to select the radio button for the Sublogo Drop-down option and then choose the options shown in the screenshot below to have this feature presented to the user.

Figure 25.32. Sublogo_5

Sublogo_5


If you are using the Form Editor, configure your settings per the following screenshot:

Figure 25.33. Sublogo_6

Sublogo_6


The Select Lists option displays the same images and can be used to display sub-logos in various positions on your item. For example, you could have six sub-logos in three different Select Lists to be displayed in any of three positions. In that case you may wish to write logic that will prevent the user from selecting the same image for more than one position.

Use Gallery presents the user with a popup window with all the images available to the user.

Use Previews will display a corresponding image below the drop-down Select List.

Use Sublogo Name In Gallery will display the name of the image in the popup window that shows the user all the images available to them.

Use Blank Option allows the field to be optional. Checking this option means that the item at the top of the Select List will be used if the user does not make a different selection.

When building your style the variable you would call is bc_logo. If you elected to use more than one select list with a Variable Name of bc_logo, the variables you would use in your style would be bc_logo1, bc_logo2, etc. corresponding to each of the select lists displayed to the user.

Because the images you load into Sub Logo Setup are associated with an item, you can only use one set of images per item using this configuration. So, if you need to display different logos in different positions, e.g. realty sub-logos in the lower left corner and community service club sub-logos in the lower right corner, you would be better off using radio button tables.

Sub Logo Setup and the Sublogo Selection field have more options. Please see additional documentation for more details, or search for more using the search word: sublogo.

include - link to other item forms

The include item form can be used to link an item to another item's item form. Following are the steps to activate this feature. First, edit your item in the Item Editor and activate the 'include' item form in the 'custom' tab, then Save.

Figure 25.34. Activating Include form in Item Editor

Activating Include form in Item Editor


Next up, you will need to edit the "Item Form" in the Item Editor and link this item to another item's form. Here the 'bc1' item is being linked to the item form previously configured for the 'postcard' item.

Figure 25.35. Configuring linked-to item form in "include" Item Form

Configuring linked-to item form in "include" Item Form


custom - Custom HTML Form

Used for wild-card situations where a completely custom form is required. This option is recommended only for expert programmers with extensive understanding of the system - keep in mind that only limited support is available for this option, and your form inputs may not be 'sticky' upon editing after viewing the preview - we strongly recommend that you use the Form Editor to create Item or Shared Item forms..

Converting to Form Editor

Form Editor forms have been designed to easily convert Generic Gold forms to Form Editor forms. With the exception of some rare corner cases, Form Editor has all of the functionality of Generic Gold.

Notable Additional features provided by Form Editor are line counters on text fields, and display of optional/required next to each field. In addition future field types will be easier to support. Please let us know if you have ideas at support@PageDNA.com.

[Note]Note

You can customize the display of optional/required markers in the "Look and Feel" menu item under "Miscellaneous Settings"

To convert an item form, change the type from "generic_gold" to "form editor". You will see a message indicating conversion will occur.

Figure 25.36. A screenshot showing Item Form conversion notice

A screenshot showing Item Form conversion notice


There may be some warnings, these are probably harmless but consult the warnings list later in this chapter for more information.

Figure 25.37. A screenshot showing Item Form conversion notice with warnings

A screenshot showing Item Form conversion notice with warnings


Conversion occurs after saving the product. To reverse the conversion, change the type from "generic_gold" to "form editor".

To convert a shared form, press the "Convert Shared Form" link that appears next to the shared form. There may be some warnings that appear next to the "Convert Shared Form" link, these are probably harmless but consult the warnings list later in this chapter for more information.

Figure 25.38. A screenshot of Convert Shared Form link

A screenshot of Convert Shared Form link


After clicking the link, A window will pop up to tell you the conversion has occurred. Conversion has happened as soon as the window appears. Because the form is shared, converting once will affect all items using the shared form.

[Tip]Tip

If you do not see a "Convert Shared Form" link, try selecting a different Shared Form, then changing back.

The conversion of a Shared Forms cannot be reversed; if you wish to try the conversion before committing to it, you can edit the shared form by clicking the "Shared Form" link in the Item Editor, and then saving the Shared form to another name, then converting that shared form.

Warnings when converting to Form Editor

Almost all forms will convert perfectly. Should you see an error, the following list will tell you what the implications are.

??: cannot convert none with labelspan=None , ??: cannot convert none with labelspanalign="'center'"

These messages indicate the generic_gold form uses the cosmetic "label span" feature which is not available in Form Editor. Here are the visual differences:

Figure 25.39. Before converting a generic_gold with labelspan

Before converting a generic_gold with labelspan


Figure 25.40. After converting a generic_gold with labelspan

After converting a generic_gold with labelspan


??: cannot convert profile_dropdown with profile_searchbox_use_newline

These messages indicate the generic_gold form uses the cosmetic "Place Profile Search Box On Separate Line" feature which is not available in Form Editor. Here are the visual differences:

Figure 25.41. Before converting a Generic Gold form with "Place Profile Search Box On Separate Line"

Before converting a Generic Gold form with "Place Profile Search Box On Separate Line"


Figure 25.42. After converting a Generic Gold form with "Place Profile Search Box On Separate Line"

After converting a Generic Gold form with "Place Profile Search Box On Separate Line"


Form cannot be converted: no item form data , Form has already been converted , missing tmpl 'tmpls/itemtag_form'

Safe to convert. These messages indicate the product has an item form type selected, but the item form itself was never edited and thus never created.

fieldname: unhandled input type 'profilefield'

Do not convert, the field will be dropped from your form. You will need to leave this form as a Generic Gold form until the Form Editor supports this field type. Please contact us at support@PageDNA.com to let us know if you need this field converted.

fieldname: cannot convert profile_dropdown with profile_extra_where , unhandled top-level option: fieldspecs='[...]'

Do not convert, the form will not behave the same before and after. Please contact us at support@PageDNA.com to let us know, we may be able to provide alternate ways of accomplishing the same features.

unhandled top-level option: something='...' , Other warnings

Either try the conversion first in a cloned item, or check with support@PageDNA.com about the implications. Please let us know the site name, product tag, and whether it is an item form or shared form name.

Changed field name from some-name to somename , Changed field name from *tag*_color to tag_color

Do not convert unless you can update the style to use the new variable names as well. The variable names in the Generic Gold form used invalid characters, or used the *tag* convention, which is no longer supported.

Using In-Line Images and "Call Outs" to Improve your Custom Item Forms

Both "Generic Gold" and the newer "Form Editor" forms support insertion of instructive copy and images "in line" to help users understand what it is they are selecting / doing. This is helpful in many cases where "a picture is worth a thousand words".

Following are a couple quick examples to get you started with this technique. Note that there are different techniques if you are using the old forms technology ("generic gold") or the new form technology ("form editor"). In all cases, the newer "Form Editor" is a superior tool and makes everything easier and faster to perform.

[Tip]Tip

Note: The "Generic Gold" form has been upgraded to a new superior forms technology known as the "Form Editor". To learn about the advantages of the "Form Editor" please watch our tutorial movie "Form Editor" at this link: http://pagedna.com/robodemo/. A document is available explaining further how to convert your "Generic Gold" forms into the new improved editor - you can view this documentation online by clicking here

Example 1: Instructive Image above set of form input options

Figure 25.43. Form with an image above an input

Form with an image above an input


In Figure 1 we see an image floating above an input for a user (in this case, this is a sample from a "check" ordering site where users need to de-code banking numbers from their existing check).

===============

Procedure (both Generic Gold and Form Editor)

Step 1. Create a GIF or JPEG image no wider than, say, 500 pixels wide at 72pdi (to fit inside form)... give this a unique name. For this tutorial we will call the image shown "form_help_1.jpg". We recommend files with no spaces in the file name.

Step 2. Upload this file into the site using the "File Uploader" menu item

Now the instructions split, depending on if you are using the old (Generic Gold) or new (Form Editor) interface:

---------------

....continuing with Generic Gold Instructions:

Step 3. To create the form row showing the image, create an input of the "None" input type where you want this image placed in the form. "None" indicates this is not an input - but a form "slot" to be used just for a screenshot or other descriptive form label.

Give this a "Field Label" to help users understand the screenshot you are about to show - in this example we used the label "Bank Fractional #" - you can see this appearing above the image.

Your "Field Sublabel" is important - this is where the HTML code calling the link to your image is referenced. An image link to the file we uploaded in Step 2 above would look like this:

<img src="con/form_help_1.jpg">

You could extend this with some HTML to show an additional note below the image - as we show in the screenshot above. To accomplish this, your code would look like this:

<img src="con/form_help_1.jpg">
<br><b>Include any dashes or slashes</b></br>

Note: To the unfamiliar, this "code" may seem complex - but this is just HTML - the standard markup language used for almost every webpge you visit. To learn more about HTML there are numerous HTML Tutorials (Google Link) and we are also able to help you with your goals using our support email address at the top of this page.

Check the "Use entire form width for label?" option

Set alignment to "center"

No Field Name is required

Save.

-------------

....continuing (from Step 2 above) with Form Editor instructions:

Step 3. Insert a new form field (click the little "plus" icon in edit mode) where you would like the image... choose "Form Group/Section" from the "All-Purpose" inputs menu.

For "Title" enter a label to help users - such as "Bank Franctional #" in the example above.

Your "Field Subtitle" is important - this is where the HTML code calling the link to your image is referenced. An image link to the file we uploaded in Step 2 above would look like this:

<img src="con/form_help_1.jpg">

See above for more HTML tips and tricks.

Step 4: Save.

Example 2: Color Coding Sections of Forms with Section Dividers

On long forms in particular, it is often helpful to add a "colored bar" breaking up long forms into color-coded sections, as shown below:

Figure 25.44. Form with "color bars" breaking up sections

Form with "color bars" breaking up sections


The shot above is only a small part of a very long form - each section of the form that is unique has been given its own "color bar" to help the users mentally break the form up into different parts during the ordering process. Sometimes these color codes can be tied to a sample of the product shown at the top of the form itself... if necessary.

===============

Procedure - Generic Gold

Step 1. To create the form row showing the color bar, create an input of the "None" input type where you want the first color bar placed in the form.

"Field Label:" is where we are going to put some HTML with CSS (Cascading Style Sheets) to affect the desired color bar. For the red color, we'd use:

<div style="background-color:#FF3333;color:white;font-size:large;margin-right:5px">Background & Color Choice</div>

Above we are using some HTML and CSS (Style Sheets) inline to affect the display of the entire row... this example sets the background color to a red color (#FF3333 is the RGB Hex value for this color - these codes are found in Photoshop) and sets the type ("Background & Color Choice") in a white, large font:

For the brown color background saying "Packaging Options" in the above example, we'd use:

<div style="background-color:#663300;color:white;font-size:large;margin-right:5px">Packaging Options</div>

If you have other creative form ideas and need HTML/CSS help, please contact support for assistance.

"Field Sublabel" should be left Blank

Check the "Use entire form width for label?" option

Set alignment to "center"

No field name is required.

Step 2. Save

Procedure - Form Editor

Step 1. Insert a new form field where you want your first "color bar / separator"... choose "Form Group/Section" from the "All-Purpose" menu

For "Title" you will use the HTML/CSS code - as described above in the "Generic Gold" instructions. For the red example shown in the screenshot above, you'd use:

<div style="background-color:#FF3333;color:white;font-size:large;margin-right:5px">Background & Color Choice</div>

Leave the "Subtitle:" blank.

Step 2: Save

Configuring the "Imprint" page - Form Footer

The very last bit of the Imprint form is a button bar, providing the user a way to continue with their order and view their proofs. The text shown on this button as well as the instructions shown around the button are configured through the Menu item "Form Header/Footer".

Configuring the File Upload Popup Window

When users upload images using the File Upload Button or File Upload To Style Button fields in an Item Form, Shared Item Form or Shared Section Form, there is an option (highly recommended) to use a "Pop Up" window to allow the uploading to happen one file at a time.

The "File Upload Popup" menu item - which is found under the Popular section in the menu in Web Templates under the Auxiliary Ordering Pages heading - allows you to edit the text shown when the user is first presented with this pop-up window. You can also customize the message shown when there is a problem with the order. This window is shared with all form-based (non-Profile) uploads on the site.

A radio button allows you to toggle between a Flash-based File Uploader and a traditional web-based upload field. The Flash-based File Uploader shows a true progress bar, allows much larger file sizes and allows user cropping. If you need to allow user cropping, it needs to be enabled here for the site and enabled or disabled for each individual File Upload Button field. The File Upload To Style Button field will automatically present the user with the option for cropping if it is enabled on the site. For maximum compatibility, Flash upload is not on by default on sites. We recommend you upgrade and try the Flash version as the Flash application is becoming ubiquitous.

Address Lists configuration

Overview

The Address List for your site is managed using the "Address List Editor" - found under "Content Admin" in the menu. Many variable imprint products, especially business cards, letterheads and envelopes, include an address as part of the imprint. Each site is provided with an optional address database, which helps users as they do not have to enter the entire address themselves. This menu item is the editing interface for a site's address list.

Address List Editor Screen

The address list editor screen consists of a drop-down list of addresses, and several buttons:

Edit.

Edits the address currently selected to the left.

Delete.

Deletes the current address.

New.

Presents a form for creating a new address.

Show All.

Displays all addresses in a web page. This is useful if you wish to see all addresses at once (for printing out, etc.). Also, you can use your web browser’s "find-in-page" feature to locate addresses quickly.

Change addrfrields.

See below.

Mass Upload.

See below.

Procedure 26.1. Editing Addresses.

  • While editing an address or creating a new address, the address list editor screen will contain the same drop-down list and buttons in the upper part of the screen. Using any of the buttons above will not save changes made to the address. Be sure to use the "Save" buttons to commit changes before moving to the next address.

    The last field in the column is the "description" field. This field determines what will be displayed in the drop-down list. Note that while editing an address, if the description is changed then the address list editor will confirm that you want to rename the address. If you want to rename the address, click "Ok", if you want to make a separate record and leave the old address in place, click "Cancel".

    Under the fields there are two buttons, "Save" and "Save and Edit Next". They both save the address. The second one will edit the next address in the list alphabetically.

Address Fields

The address database is not hard-coded to only contain address fields. It can also contain fields such as the main phone number and main fax number for an office, or the approver for an office, a shipping code, to name a few common extra fields. The fields in the address list are changed using the "Change Addrfields" button. Once that is selected you will see a list of all all address fields.

[Note]Note

If you include any NON-imprint fields, such as an approver e-mail address, for EACH Personal Page, you must enter that field name in the field "Extra Field Names" (section "Drop Down Address" on the Personal Page).

To move an address field, click that field in the list and click the "Up" or "Down" buttons. To add an address field, type the name in the text-field above the list and click the "Add" button. To delete an address field, click that field in the list, and click the "Delete" button. When you are done making changes, click the "Save Addrfields" button to save your changes. NOTE: field names must contain only numbers, letters, and underscores, and must not contain spaces.

For information about getting address information to autofill the Personal Form and about which phone variables to add to the address drop-down list to have them autofill the Personal Form, please see the following:

http://www.nationsprint.com/hub/docs/html/SiteConfiguration/web-page-templates-edit-copy-for-personal-address.html

Sorting Addresses

Sorting addresses in a meaningful way can be the key to helping your users quickly find what they need. Deciding what to use in each address description and how to list that information.

Any numbers will be listed first then lower case letters and upper case letters. The list will auto sort based on those rules. Addresses can be "forced" to top of the list by adding non alpha numeric characters to the front of the address description. Asterisks, or dashes are the most popular. More special characters will move the listing higher in the list. i.e. --1234 Someplace, Seattle will appear above -1234 Some Other Place, Redwood City in the listing.

Filtering Addresses by Division

See also: Filtering Items by Division

Addresses shown in the "Drop Down" address list can be filtered by division. To set this up, make sure the first address field is named corp_filt. (Click the Change Field Names button to add a field - make sure it's the first one at the top of the list). In that field, you enter the corp_tag of the division this address should appear for (see Divisions Editor). An address can be shown in multiple divisions. Enter the corp_tag values separated by commas only, no spaces.

Alternatively, after adding corp_filt into the field list, a checkbox will appear labeled Upgrade corp_filt field to show a list of divisions. Check this and Save AddrFields. Editing an address will now show a checkbox list of divisions.

One other thing you will want to check are your Personal page(s) and your Shipping page(s). If you look in the Address List drop-down sections of these pages, you will see an option to Filter addresses. Select corp_tag Filter by Division so that the pages will filter the address lists by division. You can also use this to turn OFF address filtering on specific Personal pages or Shipping pages by unchecking the box on specific Personal or Shipping pages.

Filter Addresses By Item

Procedure 26.2. How to Setup Address Filtering by Item

  • "Address Filtering by Item"

    To filter addresses by item, you need to be using an address list that includes the corp_tag field, even if you are not using Divisions. You may filter addresses by item even if you are using Divisions. You can filter a given address by Division and by item by entering the Division Tag followed by a comma and the "tag" you are using to filter by item. You can accomplish this by adding an Address Dropdown List field to an Item Form or you will most likely need to use the Multiple Personal Feature to create a Personal Page linked to the item requiring address filtering by item. Items can share the same Personal Page provided their filtering needs and fields displayed are identical. Here is what you need to do:

    For a Personal Form:

    1. Create a new Personal Page associated with the specific item using the Multiple Personal Feature (Menu > Web Page Templates > Multiple Personal Feature). Documentation for doing this can be found here.

    2. Access the Address List Editor (Menu > Content Admin > Address List Editor). If a field named corp_tag does not exist, click on Change Field Names and add a new field: corp_tag. Then, click Add. Then, move the corp_tag field to the top of the list and Save AddrFields.

    3. Edit at least one address and enter an identifier for the corp_tag field for the item, e.g. bc1 for business card, and save. Values in this field should be separated by commas. Do NOT use spaces.

    4. Edit the new Personal Page you created in step 1 above. Go to the Drop-Down section where you will find the Filter section. Please select the radio button for Fixed Value and enter the value you put into the corp_tag field for your address(es) in the Address List Editor in step 3 above and save.

    Selecting Fixed Value precludes using filtering by Division for the Personal Page since the two options are mutually exclusive.

    For an Item Form:

    1. Add an Address Dropdown List field to the Item Form

    2. Outside of other options you may want for the Address Dropdown List field, you will need to enable the Use Division Filter checkbox. Select Item Tag in the Division Filter drop-down list. Also, enable the checkbox for Objdest.

      You would use Other if needing to filter by item tag and division, or if filtering by a unique value so you can use the same filter for more than one item. The tag entered here will also need to be entered in the Address List Editor in the next step. So, if you need to filter the same set of addresses for several items, you should use Other and a unique value, e.g. us_bc for US business cards.

    3. Access the Address List Editor (Menu > Content Admin > Address List Editor). If a field named corp_tag does not exist, click on Change Field Names and add a new field: corp_tag. Then, click Add. Then, move the corp_tag field to the top of the list and Save AddrFields.

    4. Edit at least one address and enter an identifier for the corp_tag field for the item, e.g. bc1 for business card, and save. What is entered depends upon how the Divison Filter drop-down list in the Address Dropdown List field was configured. Multiple values in this field should be separated by commas. Do NOT use spaces.

Uploading an Address List with "Mass Upload"

The "Mass Upload" feature gives you the ability to create and manage address lists through a spreadsheet program, such as Microsoft Excel. Non-European languages are supported by the Mass Upload tool, including Chinese and Japanese. This is part of many general messaging and translation improvements PageDNA is making to support non-US sites. Here are some basic instructions to get you started:

Procedure 26.3.  How To Manage Your Address Lists Through a Spreadsheet Program:

  1. From the Site Menu, choose "Address List Editor"

    Figure 26.1. Mass Upload

    Mass Upload


  2. Click the "Mass upload" button.

    Click the "download current data" link. This will download the current data to your computer in the form of a .tdv (tab-delimited) file.

    Figure 26.2. Downloading...

    Downloading...


  3. This next step is will vary slightly based on your operating system and web browser so do not consider this a definitive guide to setting up Windows, Mac, Safari, Firefox or Internet Explorer.

  4. If you are working on a Windows PC, you will likely be asked to save a file called "menu.cgi" to disk. Choose to save the file, but change the extension to ".xls", and place the file on your desktop. Then, open the file in Excel.

  5. Macintosh users, choose "Save File" (control-click to see options in most browsers) and save the file on the desktop. Change the extension from .tdv to .csv. Then double click the file to open it in Microsoft Excel.

    Figure 26.3. 1

    1


  6. Make your edits, as necessary. Note that you cannot add columns if they are not provided in the database you downloaded, nor can you delete columns. You can add rows if you like. The address database is always presented alphabetically so the changes to the order of rows you make in Excel are not reflected.

    When you're done editing the data, save it as as a .txt file. This is important, as it helps convert "funny" characters to standard ASCII text - preventing many possible data gliches downstream. Open the .txt file in a text editor (such as Notepad on Windows or Textedit on the Mac) and copy all of your data to the clipboard.

    Go back to your browser and paste the data into the text area below the upload button. Make sure that you are not including extraneous lines at the end of the data. To check for this, after pasting you should hit the delete key (at the end of the data just pasted) until the last line in the text area box is not blank.

  7. Click the upload button. This will verify the data has the correct number of columns and present the data in a raw form. If you don't get any errors complaining about lines being too long or too short, go ahead and submit again to save the changes to the database.

    Figure 26.4. Choose file

    Choose file


  8. The Mass Upload process merges the new address with the old addresses, so any deletions made in Excel will not take effect. Also, just like when editing the addresses one at a time, any changes to the description field will cause two records with that address to exist: the old record with the old description, and the new address with the new description.

  9. Please note that Excel will drop the leading zeroes from any cells it finds. This can cause ZIP codes on the east coast to suddenly drop to four digits - not a good situation. To work around this, you must change the column in question to Text format, then add the zeroes for all appropriate zip codes.

Tips and Tricks:

When adding a few addresses to existing address list, you may find it simpler to add 'new' addresses one at a time. Click 'New', fill in the appropriate fields. Click "Save" to save a single entry or, if you have more than one, click "Save and Edit Next".

Figure 26.5. Adding a new address...

Adding a new address...


If you have multiple locations in the same state, use identifying descriptions to avoid duplications or errors, eg ACME_Florida, Miami, ACME_Florida, Orlando and ACME_Florida, Tampa.

Alternatively, you can use the "Auto Increment" function which will append numbers to the ends of descriptions: ACME_Florida, ACME_Florida -1 and ACME_Florida -2, etc.

Figure 26.6. Auto-increment setting...

Auto-increment setting...


Replace Mode will set field names and replace any existing address list data.

The 'Description' dropdown list allows you to define which column(s) to use for the description - the label shown to users on the ordering site.

Figure 26.7. Description options:

Description options:


'Use a column as the description' : uses a single column for the description such as card_city or card_state. 'Use a combination of columns for description' can combine more than one column for the description - %(card-city)s, and %(card_state)s

For the initial 'Mass Upload' with no existing address list (e.g., on a new site) database follow these steps.

Procedure 26.4.  How to Populate a Blank Address List

  1. Check/Edit the AddrFields to reflect the Address List Fields Setup.

  2. Prep your spreadsheet document with the top-most cell named for each of the address field variables (i.e., card_street1, card_city, etc.), and rows of address information populating the correct columns. Save your .xls file as a .cvs or .txt file.

    Figure 26.8. Edit addresses in Excel

    Edit addresses in Excel


  3. Click the "Mass upload" button.

    Figure 26.9. Mass Upload

    Mass Upload


  4. Click 'Choose File' to upload your .txt address list from desktop.

    Hit 'Upload and Replace' to send the file to our database. The database will compare the uploaded information to the addrfields. When done correctly you will see a "Continue" link. (If there are mismatches you will warned to that the addrfield variables and .txt header variables do not reflect each other. Make any correction as needed and upload again.)

Need multiple imprint addresses on a product?

Two drop-down lists is not supported in the "Personal" page at this time. This form supports a single address with drop-down and auto fill plus a second free-entry address you can elect to add which is - unfortunately - not tied to an address database. The 2nd Free address is called "2nd Free" in the personal page quick navigation if you wish to try this out.

We also have a feature that allows any number of address drop-downs to be shown to the user. This is accomplished by creating an Item Form using the Form Editor and then adding "Address List" drop downs as needed to that custom form. This is covered in our Form Editor documentation.

Configuring the "Preview" (Proofs) page

The PROOFS page is where the user is allowed to view and approve images for the items in their order. When variable imprint items are involved, the user is shown proofs generated from the press-ready artwork the VIPER engine produced. For static items, this page will show the catalog preview image.

The PROOFS page is actually composed of several separate templates that are edited independently: the top of the page and bottom are edited through the same menu item: "Preview Header/Footer". There are tabs for the options found at the top and bottom of the form (Preview Header and Preview Footer, respectively).

If you wish to change the way proofs are displayed for an item, you must configure that on a per-item basis, as described in the Style Building documentation. If you wish to change the display of the optional "zoom" images users can see (if configured) to click and get a larger view of their item, use the "Preview Zoom Popup" tab.

Preview Header Page

The "Preview Header" tab is where you configure the text that appears above the item proofs. Normally this contains instructions giving the user some idea of what they are supposed to do on this page (approve their items). You can also control the text for the banner shown at the top of the page - remember that the text shown in the navigation bar is edited independently in the "Site Header" menu item.

Preview Footer Page

The "Preview Footer" tab controls the text and options that appear below the items proofs. You can control the instructions given to the user, and also you can include a "proofs approval" checkbox that the user must click in order to proceed with their order. This is useful to force the users to acknowledge that they are responsible for the costs of their order.

You can also control the text and the arrangement of the buttons that appear below the proofs. Note that users ordering only static (non-variable) items will only be allowed to continue with their order, since there is no imprint they can edit.

Preview Zoom Popup

This option allows you to control the "pop up" window users may see if you have created clickable "zooms" in your variable data previews. Where enabled, when the user clicks the image, the "Preview Zoom Popup" window opens.

There are a few options including the title of the window, the heading above the image, and the name of the button that is used to close this window.

[Tip]Tip

Note that you cean learn how to configure clickable proofs Click for Larger Proofs section of the Style Building documentation.

Proofs - Tips and Tricks

How to removing "Jaggies" or "halos" appear around variable type floating over a background (master) image

Please see our detailed doc elsewhere in our StyleBuilding docs for instructions on how to resolve this style-related issue (which, it is worth noting, no longer happens when using our Visual Style Editor tool and best practices).

Skip Proof for Static Items with the Shopping Cart

To skip the proof for a static item when using the PageDNA Shopping Cart feature, you will first need to edit the item using the Item Editor and select the Forms link. Make sure all the checkboxes for the Personal Page Sections are disabled, as in the screenshot below.

Figure 27.1. Disabling Personal Form Sections

Disabling Personal Form Sections

If you get an error message during an ordering session that there is a required field, it is coming from the Personal Form. The required field needs to be made optional. If the form is being used by another item, you will need to use the Multiple Personal Feature to create a new Personal Form so the field can be made optional.

Next, you need to go to Catalog Admin in Web Templates in the site's menu. In the Catalog Settings tab, in the Behavior Settings section, you need to enable the checkbox to "Skip edit step for static items?" as in the screenshot below.

Figure 27.2. Catalog Admin Setting to Skip Proof for Static Items

Catalog Admin Setting to Skip Proof for Static Items

Last, you need to edit the Personal Page's Config section to set it to skip the Proof step for static items. Enable both of the checkboxes to "Bypass this form..." and to "Bypass the preview..." as in the screenshot below.

Figure 27.3. Configure the Personal Page to be Skipped

Configure the Personal Page to be Skipped


Skip Proof for Static Items without the Shopping Cart

To skip the proof for a static item when NOT using the PageDNA Shopping Cart feature, you will first need to edit the item using the Item Editor and select the Forms link. Make sure all the checkboxes for the Personal Page Sections are disabled, as in the screenshot below.

Figure 27.4. Disabling Personal Form Sections

Disabling Personal Form Sections

If you get an error message during an ordering session that there is a required field, it is coming from the Personal Form. The required field needs to be made optional. If the form is being used by another item, you will need to use the Multiple Personal Feature to create a new Personal Form so the field can be made optional.

Next, you need to edit the Personal Page's Config section to set it to skip the Proof step for static items. Enable both of the checkboxes to "bypass this form" and to "bypass the preview" as in the screenshot below.

Figure 27.5. Configure the Personal Page to be Skipped

Configure the Personal Page to be Skipped

Last, you need to to to the Preview Header/Footer, which can be found in Web Templates under the Popular section in the site's menu, edit the Preview Header tab and enable checkbox for "No previews for static items" as in the screenshot below.

Figure 27.6. Preview Header Configuration

Preview Header Configuration


Configuring the "Shipping" page

The SHIPPING page shows the item quantities and fields related to shipping such as the shipping method and shipping address. It also is where certain features - such as rush fees - are activated. This page is edited using "Shipping", a menu item found under the "Ordering Pages" banner.

Note: If you are using the Multiple Shipping Feature you may likely have multiple shipping pages active on your site, which will have separate Menu items for each instance that may be linked to separate divisions on your site.

User Instructions

Brief User Instructions.

Short message to user.

Rush/Expedite Option

Rush/Expedite Checkbox.

If checked the SHIPPING page will have a checkbox the user can check to indicate they want rush handling of their order. If rush per item is enabled, you can adjust its position using the Content Alignment drop-down list.

Brief User Instructions.

These are specifically for the Expedite option.

Value.

This can be left at the default of "rush".

Same-day/Next-day Drop-down.

This checkbox changes the checkbox that will appear on the SHIPPING page to a drop-down with three values: "normal" (i.e. no rush), "same-day", and "next day". Below that checkbox is a field called "Upgrade shipping method". A shipping method number is expected in that field. If filled in then the shipping method will be upgraded when the rush checkbox is checked. This upgrade happens immediately, before the form is submitted, using Javascript. The shipping method is upgraded to the shipping method number given in the "Upgrade shipping method" field. That shipping method number must be one of the shipping method options.

Shipping Methods

Shipping Methods.

If checked a drop-down list of shipping methods is presented to the user. Below there is a long list of available shipping method numbers. The shipping methods to include are selected by checking the boxes next to the shipping method number of choice. The method that is chosen by default is selected by choosing the round radio button next to a shipping method number.

Misc. Shipping Inputs

Misc. Shipping Fields.

These are for desktop-delivery information, and are rarely used. You may find the ship_account field (Shipping Account Number) useful if you want to allow users to specify their own FedEx/UPS account number for third-party shipping costs.

Bill To

Bill To Office

This lets you display the address list again, to decide which office to ‘bill’ for the stationery order. Its use is not recommended because the AUTHORIZATION page is the preferred place for information like this.

Purchasing/Credit Card

This field behaves the same as the Purchasing/Credit Card input available on the AUTHORIZATION template. This is infrequently used.

Billing codes

If you want multiple billing codes, you must check "Use multiple billing codes". If you previously had one billing code on the shipping page, you must copy its settings manually. Any billing codes also present on the login page will have their data ignored on the shipping page.

Sales Tax Collection

Calculate Tax for These States
[Note]Note

This section is now deprecated, we recommend using the new site-wide Tax Settings menu item.

This must be checked to allow real-time sales tax calculation for your site. Below, check boxes for each destination state for which you need to collect sales tax. If this is checked but no states are checked, ZIP code verification will be done, but no tax will be collected. Remember that if you have multiple shipping pages, you need to set this on all pages. For detailed information on how this works and where the data comes from, see our Tech Note: Collecting Sales Tax.

Country

If your site supports multiple ship to countries, enter the country code for the country you wish to calculate tax on (for example, you might enter 'US' (with no quotes) to restrict tax calculation to orders shipping to the United States

Ship To Address

Ship To Address.

This must be checked to allow the user to specify shipping address. The shipping address can be either a drop-down list or free text input.

Drop-down List.

Checking this box adds a drop-down list of addresses to the shipping address form.

Field Label.

This is the label shown to the user.

Include Other... Option.

This adds an option to your drop-down list of "Other..." (or similar text), which is useful if you have both Drop-down and Free text inputs for your shipping. Users select this option and then enter their free-text address below.

Address Database.

This is a toggle between addrlist/shiplist. This lets you share the address database used on the cards or use a separate address database[3] dedicated to shipping locations.

Personal List

Profile sites can have a per-user address book for shipping by enabling the "Personal List Requires Profiles. Each user gets their own editable shipping list" checkbox, which is located just below the Address Database selections.

Field Mapping.

This is rarely used. This feature lets you rename a single field in the address database to another value.

Free text Input.

You can allow the user to select either Residential or Commercail from a drop-down list and have Real Time Shipping costs calculated correctly.

Figure 28.1. Residential / Commercial Address

Residential / Commercial Address


The following fields are available. When available, information from the Imprint is automatically ‘piped’ into these fields during ordering.

  • Attention.

  • Card Division.

  • Mailstop / Floor.

  • Street 1.

  • Street 2.

  • Street 3. Rarely used.

  • City, State.

  • City.

  • State.

  • ZIP. Check "Verify city/state" to ensure a valid ZIP code for US addresses

  • Country.

  • Ship Super Lock. If checked, the free entry fields will not be editable.

    Use address from other logic.

    Rarely used, this should be selected if you have custom programming on your site for shipping address selection. The next two options are much more commonly selected in "Ship Super Lock" scenarios.

    Use address from card as default.

    This is usually checked if the above option is checked. This defaults the shipping address to the address that is chosen in the imprint page.

    Use hard-coded address below.

    This allows you the ability to fix a single ship-to address for every single order placed on the system.

User Comments

User Comments.

Checking this box adds a field for users to enter any comments.

Brief User Instructions.

This is text explaining what the User Comments field is for. We recommend something along the lines of, "please enter any special shipping instructions into the field below".

Impatient User Text

These options help prevent users from clicking the "Submit Order" button twice, when impatient.



[3] PageDNA can set up the separate address database on request.

Multiple Shipping Feature

Overview

PageDNA’s site technology supports having multiple Shipping Pages on a site, linked to a particular division on the site. The Multiple Shipping Feature gives you a tool to create new Shipping Pages and link them to divisions.

Procedure for Configuring Multiple Shipping Pages

A customized Shipping Page can be linked to a division. Like Bill Pages, Shipping Pages cannot be linked to items. You will need to have configured the Divisions feature using the Divisions Editor (in the menu > Popular > Web Templates) before using the Multiple Shipping Feature.

You may want to pre-configure the Shipping Page before copying or cloning it by going to the menu > Popular > Web Templates and edit "Shipping Page."

How to Access the Multiple Shipping Feature

Next, access the Multiple Shipping Feature by clicking on the "+" next to "Shipping Page" or "edit" next to the "Shipping" heading in Web Templates. (The "Shipping" heading will appear with an "edit" link to access the Multiple Shipping Feature if there is more than one Shipping Page.)

Using the Multiple Shipping Feature

"shipping (base)" is the default Shipping Page that comes with every site. If there is more than one Shipping Page listed below the "Shipping Forms" heading, the Shipping Page that is selected via its radio button is the one that will be copied or cloned to create the new Shipping Page.

Enter a new 'tag' for the new Shipping Page by typing something in field next to "shipping_". Then, click the "New" button. The tag cannot start with a number or have any underscores. Upper and lowercase characters and numbers are permitted.

Your new Shipping page will now appear in the list below "Shipping Forms."

You can link the new Shipping Page to any of the divisions under the "Divisions" heading on the left side of the Multiple Shipping Feature using the checkboxes in front of each division.

To link a Shipping page to a division:

  • Enable the radio button for the Shipping Page.

  • Enable the checkboxes for each division you want linked to this form.

  • Click the "Link" button and the mapping will be made.

You will probably need to edit the new Shipping Page. To edit it, go to Web Templates in the menu. You should see all the Shipping Pages listed under the Shipping heading. Clicking the link for a particular Shipping Page will allow you edit it. Edit each page as needed, and be sure to test each division on your site.

If you are logged in as an administrator, you can edit a Shipping Page from within an ordering session when on the Shipping page by clicking on the link for it in the upper left corner of the page.

Shipping Rate Editor

The Shipping Rate Editor (SRE) allows you to specify the shipping methods you wish to make available to your users. From this page you can add, edit, or delete various shipping methods as you choose. Some of the options available are UPS, FedEx, DHL, and Local Truck. The full list of options is found under the Shipmeth ID pulldown menu.

One of the most popular features is the ability for &company_name to provide real time shipping rates for the three major US carriers; UPS, FedEx, and DHL. Real time shipping rates are based on the weight of the package and its destination relative to to your shipping location. To utilize this feature simply select to specific method from the Shipmeth Id pulldown menu and enter your shipping information.

If you wish to offer real time rates for DHL to the customers then you will need to take the additional step of providing your DHL account information in the Setup tab. This is a requirement of DHL's system.

The Items tab allows you to set the shipping methods that you provide on each individual item type. For example, you may wish to offer letterhead to be shipped exclusively by UPS Ground. Simply use the checkboxes to indicate what shipping methods you want to offer for each item type.

Under the Setup tab there are many additonal options for controlling the markup of shipping rates and handling costs for orders.

You can use the SRE on the Shipping Page to simplify maintenance for multiple shipping pages, though some shipment methods are not available here. For access to the full range of shipment methods, activate the Bill Page. If the Bill Page is not activated and you use either realtime or zoned shipment methods you will see a warning message when you access the SRE.

Here are some additional features you'll also find included in the SRE:

  • Setting fixed and realtime rates (realtime rates available only on Bill Page); realtime rates available for UPS, FedEx, and DHL

  • Setting rates by geography (also available only on Bill Page)

  • Specifying the shipping method code that we deliver to your database

  • Adjusting shipping markup based on a variety of factors

  • Specifying the cost of handling an order, including flat-rate, based on item quantities or stair step based on total cost of order

Tab: edit_list

This is where you specify the shipmethods that are available to the system. Depending on the settings you choose, not all methods will be available to every item type or shipping destination.

When you change the type of a shipmeth in the dropdown, you must click "change type". You can also click "change type" after you have created a shipmeth, but any information not applicable to the new type will be lost.

[Note]Note

If you use a weight-based shipping method (such as table of increasing increments or realtime shipping), you should go to Item Editor and update the product_info tab for each item to make sure that the weight is correct. For example, if each item weighs half a pound, you should put 500 into the weight field (because the weight in Item Editor is divided by 1000, you need to multiply the per-item weight by 1000 -- it's designed for e.g. a pack of 250 business cards weighing one pound, so the weight per 1000 would be four pounds).

[Caution]Real Time Shipping for Bundled or Kitted Items

If you are using Real Time Shipping for bundled or kitted items, it is important to know that the bundle is "stripped" from the order by the time the user gets to the Shipping Page so that all that remains are the individual items that comprise the bundle. It is important that you DO NOT assign a weight to the bundle and that you DO assign a weight to the individual items. No item should ever have a weight less than 1 pound per thousand.

Fixed cost delivery and No cost information are similar (leaving cost blank in "Fixed cost delivery" is equivalent to choosing "No cost information")

  • Service Code Internal hook or tag - needs to be unique. You make it up, can be anything, can have spaces. If you are getting a text file export from us, the service_code is what is passed as the shipping_method so it is going to be seen in production. service_code is also used for uploading shipping data to PageDNA.

  • Service Description shown in the shipping drop-down list to your users

  • Shipmeth Id Internal PageDNA code for your shipmeth; pick the closest to your needs

  • Delivery Specify the expected delivery time

  • Cost Fixed price for shipping

  • Markup Either the global markup for all shipmeths or markup for this specific shipmeth. See Markup for more info.

Real-time lookup of shipping rates

[Note]Note

The rates shown are based on the shipping account used by PageDNA; your rates are likely to be different. (See Checking realtime rates for more info.) Please use Markup to adjust the rates as needed.

  • Shipmeth Id For real-time rates, this determines what rate will get looked up and shown to your users.

  • Max Per Carton Specify the maximum weight per package; our software will automatically break the shipment into multiple packages if necessary

  • No cost when ship_account is provided Use this rate without price when the user has entered a ship_account (third-party freight number; a field on the shipping page). When a user provides a third-party freight number, shipping costs are not included in the order. Note that without the real-time lookup, the number of days and availability to certain regions is lost.

Flat cost per piece is used for mailing individual items, usually as part of a mailing list (e.g. postcards). If you need to adjust the rate based on weight or other criteria, select a different method.

  • Shipmeth Id is restricted to methods that are suitable for mailing individual items - please contact support to add new methods.

  • Markup allows you to specify special markup just for mailing lists. See the markup section of "setup" for more info.

  • Min Qty specifies that the rate is only available when enough items are ordered. Useful mostly when items can also be dropshipped and you want to require dropship for small orders.

Cost increase by weight unit adds a Cost Table with three mechanisms for determining price:

  • Price per pound rounds UP to the nearest pound except when weight is below "By Oz When Less Than" (which is expressed in pounds, not ounces) - then it gets rounded UP to the nearest ounce

  • Table of any pound increments allows you to specify break points and prices in any combination. You can specify a minimum weight to use the shipmethod. Leaving Extrapolate unchecked means that the highest weight in the table is the maximum weight for an order; checking Extrapolate allows our software to guess the price for heavier orders.

  • Increasing 1 pound increments is the same as "Table of any pound increments" except that you simply list prices and the software fills in the pounds automatically.

Zoned weight table calculation is the same as "Cost increase by weight unit" but allows you to limit the region (zone) that the shipmeth applies to. You can restrict to "Whole World", "Valid for certain countries", "Valid for certain ZIP codes", "Valid for ZIP code ranges", "Valid for lower 48 states" (i.e. exclude Alaska/Hawaii), or "Valid for selected states". Note that you must include the field ship_country on the shipping page for "selected countries" to work, and ship_country must use the ISO two-character country code.

Multi-zone weight table calculation is the same as "Zoned weight table calculation" but allows you to use a single shipmeth with multiple zones to specify different prices for each zone.

You can use Zone or Multi-zone to specify free shipping to selected regions. Just set the Cost Table to "Flat cost" with a price of zero, then pick a Zone that limits the shipping area appropriately.

Checking realtime rates

PageDNA uses a direct link to FedEx, DHL, and UPS to provide realtime rates. Because we use PageDNA’s shipping account for FedEx and UPS, the rates are likely to be different from the standard walkup rates. Here are steps to follow on the UPS website that will show roughly what rates your users will see without markup.


    Go to http://www.ups.com/
    Select Calculate Time & Cost

    Type = Package
    Weight = enter the weight you are testing
    Enter your Ship From Zip Code
    Enter your Destination Zip Code
    Do not enable the checkbox for Residential Address
    Click Continue

    In the Rates By Service window, click on the link in the upper right to Modify Shipment Information.

    Enable the radio button for Detailed Time and Cost
    For Packaging, select My Packaging


    Additional Information section:
    Enable the radio button for "I will drop off my prepaid package(s) at a UPS location, or give my package(s) to my UPS driver."

    Do you have a Daily Pickup? Enable the radio button for "Yes"

  

This will emulate the settings PageDNA uses to calculate shipping costs and should be very close to the shipping costs on your site without having been marked up.

Tab: items

Choose which shipmeths are allowed for each item. You can select or deselect all items for a shipmeth by clicking on the checkbox at the top of a column; conversely, you can select/deselect all shipmeths for an item by clicking the checkbox to the left of each row.

Tab: setup

This screen is used to specify Handling, Markup, and the site's location to ship FROM to correctly calculate realtime rates. To ship from multiple locations based on manufacturer, see the following documentation under Manufacturer Setup.

All three Ship From fields are required for FedEx; you can skip Ship From State if you only use UPS. We currently support only one shipping location.

Append Rates and Enable Rates should both be checked; do not uncheck these without consulting PageDNA support.

Consult your accountant to find out whether you should check "Tax Handling Costs" and "Tax Shipping Costs".

DHL Account is optional and only needed if you want to provide DHL realtime rates. Ship From ZIP must match the ZIP code of your DHL account. Please contact support@PageDNA.com for help with initial setup.

Figure 30.1. DHL Account

DHL Account


Handling

Although you specify handling in SRE, handling shows up as a separate line item on the Bill Page. There are several options for calculating a handling fee, each progressively more complicated. You may also specify a separate handling fee for special items using the "custom" tab of Item Editor.

  • No handling means no charge, which is the default

  • Flat handling: specify a charge per order plus a charge per line item (not affected by item quantity)

  • Percent of order total: handling is a percent of order cost; you may check "With shipping" to include the cost of shipping as part of the total order cost

  • Stairstep percent of order total allows you to reduce the handling percent as the total cost of the order increases (gives break for larger orders)

  • Stairstep dollar amount of item quantity specifies the handling charge based on the item quantity. Each item in the order is compared against the table and a cost assigned based on the amount orders, then the item handling fees are all added up.

    We found that this formula surprises people. What they usually expect is that the previous price-per-unit will hold until the next price break. So, we added an Interpolate checkbox. Enable this if you expect this type of behavior.

  • Form Var handling is primarily used for punch-in sites. Specify the name of a form variable that contains the handling cost.

  • Python expression-based handling allows you to specify the handling as a calculation. For example:

      5.0 + ((num_items-1) * 1.5)
      

    charges five dollars for the first item and $1.50 per item thereafter.

  • Handling depends on delivery/mailing list type allows you to have different handling charges depending on the way the order will be delivered. "dropship" is standard delivery to a single address. "Default Handling" will be used if there are no matching entries in the table.

  • Handling applies conditionally is used when only some orders need a handling charge. Usually, though, it's easier to configure a rush charge on the Shipping Page. If you decide to use Conditional Handling, you would set one or more conditions and Default Handling for when the condition does not apply.

Markup

This section allows you to set the markup options for shipments. In other words, markup changes the shipment price presented to the user. Markup is global to all shipmeths on the site (unless you set the markup on an individual shipmeth); it is also global to all items. For markup on a single item, you can use the Handling Fee on the "custom" tab of Item Editor (although handling shows up separately from shipping cost).

You have two markup options: simple and Python expression. Using a Python expression allows you to write things like

  (ship_cost*1.25) + (num_items * 0.5)
  

Options for simple markup:

  • Ship Carton Cost is the cost per carton, this mostly only applies when using realtime shipmeths that split shipments into multiple cartons.

  • Ship Markup Amount is the price markup per order (in dollars or whatever currency you're using).

  • Ship Markup Factor is the multiplier for shipping rates, mostly useful for realtime shipmeths. If you want to give a discount of twenty percent, use a factor of 0.8.

  • Ship Markup Per-item is the price per line item on the order (not affected by quantity per item).

  • Ship Markup Rounding allows you to specify rounding of shiprates, mostly for realtime.

Test

You can use the Test tab in the Shipping Rate Editor to test Real Time Shipping Rates. Remember: Real Time Shipping works if you have configured items with accurate weights. The prices displayed in the Test tab will be UPS or FedEx published rates without a markup applied. The "From" address is specified in the Setup tab. The steps to test a shipment are as follows:

1) Select an item from the Add Item drop-down list and enter a quantity. Click the Add button. You can add more than one item to a test shipment

2) Select a shipping method from the Shipping Method drop-down list

3) Enter a destination state, zip and country. You must use the two letter abbreviation for the country. Do NOT enter the full name of the country.

4) Select whether the address is Residential or Commercial to have Real Time Rates calculated correctly.

5) Click the Test button to see the cost of the shipment. You can remove one or more items from the test shipment by clicking the "del" link for an item.

Please go here to find how to check UPS published rates used by PageDNA.

Figure 30.2. Test Tab in the Shipping Rate Editor

Test Tab in the Shipping Rate Editor

About the Bill Page

The BILL page displays order information and also collects payment information from users. This page is editable if you have Credit Cards enabled - contact support@PageDNA.com for help with this aspect of setting up your site and then this page will be editable by you.

Page Header and Intro

These inputs control the look at the top of the page. The copy field is commonly used to display instructions to the user.

Items List and Pricing

At the top of the page users see their current order, including: item quantities and costs shipping options and costs, tax amounts if any, and then a total price. This section of the Menu allows configuration of this display as well as the various options that may appear depending on your configuration options.

Credit Card Information

This section, enabled with the "Collect Credit Card Information" checkbox, presents users with a list of fields for credit card collection. This credit field information is most commonly used with "real time credit card authorization". You can find addtional information about this here.

Non-Credit Card Information

The Bill Page can also be used to collect non-credit card billing information. Users can be presented with the option to enter up to 6 billing codes, each with myriad configuration options. If your site allows billing codes (e.g., cost center or PO Number) you may wish to allow your users to enter (or review) their billing codes at this step to ensure proper billing.

Multiple Bill Feature

Overview

PageDNA’s site technology supports having multiple Bill Pages on a site, linked to a particular division on the site. The Multiple Bill Feature gives you a tool to create new Bill Pages and link them to divisions.

Procedure for Configuring Multiple Bill Pages

A customized Bill Page can be linked to a division. Like Shipping Pages, Bill Pages cannot be linked to items. You will need to have configured the Divisions feature using the Divisions Editor (in the menu > Popular > Web Templates) before using the Multiple Bill Feature.

You may want to pre-configure the Bill Page before copying or cloning it by going to the menu > Popular > Web Templates and edit "Bill Page."

How to Access the Multiple Bill Feature

Next, access the Multiple Bill Feature by clicking on the "+" next to "Bill Page" or "edit" next to the "Billing" heading in Web Templates. (The "Billing" heading will appear with an "edit" link to access the Multiple Bill Feature if there is more than one Bill page.)

Using the Multiple Bill Feature

"bill (base)" is the default Bill Page that comes with every site. If there is more than one Bill Page listed below the "Billing Forms" heading, the Bill Page that is selected via its radio button is the one that will be copied or cloned to create the new Bill Page.

Enter a new 'tag' for the new Bill Page by typing something in field next to "bill_". Then, click the "New" button. The tag cannot start with a number or have any underscores. Upper and lowercase characters and numbers are permitted.

Your new Bill Page will now appear in the list below "Bill Forms."

You can link the new Bill Page to any of the divisions under the "Divisions" heading on the left side of the Multiple Bill Feature using the checkboxes in front of each division.

To link a Bill page to a division:

  • Enable the radio button for the Bill page.

  • Enable the checkboxes for each division you want linked to this form.

  • Click the "Link" button and the mapping will be made.

You will probably need to edit the new Bill page. To edit it, go to Web Templates in the menu. You should see all the Bill Pages listed under the Billing heading. Clicking the link for a particular Bill Page will allow you edit it. Edit each page as needed, and be sure to test each division on your site.

If you are logged in as an administrator, you can edit a Bill page from within an ordering session when on the Bill page by clicking on the link for it in the upper left corner of the page.

Credit Card AUTH Notification Email

If you have realtime credit cards set up in AUTH mode, you can enter e-mail addresses here to be notified when orders get approved and need to be manually POSTed using Credit Card Manager

Credit Card POST Notification Email

If you have realtime credit cards set up in AUTH mode, you can automatically notify your customers when their card has been charged (POSTed) in Credit Card Manager. The setup is similar to other notification e-mails (such as Approval Granted Email) and uses the same underlying order information template.

Credit Card Manager

Collecting and protecting customers' sensitive financial data is increasingly a top concern of our business partners. Accordingly, PageDNA offers the Credit Card Manager as a tool to view this data securely (over HTTPS/SSL) and scramble or remove the credit card information once it is no longer needed.

This menu item (found in "Credit Cards" section of the menu) can be used with Collect Only, Authorize Only, or Real Time Transaction credit card setups. Clients who collect credit cards -- who also wish to send charges after products are produced and shipped -- may find this interface very useful for end of month billing.

Balancing credit card statements from processors can be difficult when a one-to-one match is required. The Credit Card Manager shows both the PageDNA order number and the Processor Transaction number in a simple interface.

The view shows the most recent 100 transactions by default (both shredded and unshredded). You also have the option of selecting a single token or a date range of tokens, but you are limited to 100 orders at a time.

We recommend that you set a password to encrypt the credit card number on our server. Only the people who know the CC password will be able to view the full credit card number, even if they have a menu or Guest Admin login. You will need to enter the password every time you want to view full CC info.

After you set a password, you will need to visit each site in the CC Manager to encrypt credit cards for that site.

Clicking the token link shows the Find Order interface.

If your site is set to POST mode and approval is not enabled, the system will charge the card during final order processing and the Status column will show "sale".

If your site has realtime credit cards AND is set to only Authorize Only (no charging), the CC Manager interface will present two additional columns to enable manual charging of orders. The "Post?" column shows a checkbox for each order that is in AUTH status. Checking the box and clicking "POST selected orders" will take you to a confirmation screen. The "Order Status" column currently shows whether all items in an order have been shipped (to make it easier to charge only completely shipped orders).

The confirmation screen requires you to enter the credit card password to verify that you want the orders charged. If an order fails to process the charge, you will get an error message for each order that fails, but the system will attempt to POST all orders.

The confirmation screen allows you to update shipping cost (click "Edit Shipping Costs") or total order price (click "Edit Manual Price Adjustment"). Using either of these will create a log entry on the Find Order screen. Note that these features are only available from the POST confirmation screen; once an order has been POSTed, you cannot change the price.

To shred the card numbers in the view, select the check box next to each token or use the "select all" link, then click "Shred Credit Card Info". Shredding the number will show (XXXXXXXXXXXXXX####) and 'xx/xx' for the date (even after clicking "Reveal Credit Card Numbers"); however, Auth and Gtrans numbers will remain visible and unscrambled.

Shredding card numbers requires confirmation. We recommend that you shred card numbers as soon as you are finished with them.

Configuring the "Review" Page

The Review Page provides users with a summary of their order before the order is submitted. This page is activated and configured using "Review Page" - found under the "Web Page Templates" section. Review falls after the Shipping or Bill Page but before the Accept Page. The user is presented with a list of items, prices, tax, shipping and billing address - depending on how your site is configured and the options you choose to display.

In addition to a list of items and prices the Review Page can also be configured to show the item profs for a second time to the user. This can be used as a Last Chance type of configuration. To enable the feature check the box for Include Item Proofs. Found just before the User Instructions section of the template.

The Review Page configuration is also used in other parts of the system, including the Accept Page and the page shown by "Find Orders".

To enable this page correctly, you will need to make changes to several templates (but note that new sites have Review Page enabled by default):

  • First, enable the page using the "Review Page" menu item. Select the checkbox to 'Enable This Page'. The page will be active upon saving.

  • Configure other settings (rush fee and tax) as appropriate. These settings are independent of what you have configured in the Shipping Page, so make sure everything matches up.

  • Add 'Review' tab to header in "Site Header" menu item. This adds a new navigation 'tab' to the progress bar for the Review page, which will be highlighted when Review is displayed to the user.

  • You can also change the submit button text on Shipping or Bill Page.

To learn more about Sales Tax collection, please see Our Technical Notes on Sales Tax.

Configuring the "Order Accepted" page ('Done')

The ACCEPT page is the page that completes the order from the End User’s perspective. It is mostly copy. However it is important copy. It must give the user the order tracking number, order date, tell the user what e-mails to expect and what kind of timeframe to expect for their order. When working with this page, keep in mind the fact that many users print out this page for future reference.

[Note]Note

If your users see the message "Final Order Processing...", that usually means that they double-clicked on the submit button to create the order. We lock the order on the first submit to prevent duplicate orders; the second click results in this message instead of the standard Accept page.

If you wish to add dynamic information to this form, you must use a specific syntax. For example, lets say that your site requires users to enter a billing code as part of the Authorization screen (bill_code1). If you wished to show bill_code1 to your end user as part of this "Order Accepted" page, you would do so as follows (bold text is the addition to the HTML in the Accept template):

PO Number: %(order.form.bill_code1)s

Note that if this field is not required on the site, the user could receive a fatal error on this page if that field was not completed - so customize this page with caution and be sure to test all exceptions. The worst scenario is to have users not able to complete their users, but instead to receive a fatal error due to such a bug.

Order Confirmation Message

Before "Start New Order" Button.

This block of copy appears above the button to start a new order. The default copy has the tracking number, date, and tells the user to expect an e-mail confirmation of their order to be sent to the e-mail entered previously on the AUTHORIZATION page.

After "Start New Order" Button.

This block of copy appears below the button to continue. The default copy references how to contact customer service (based on information in the Site Info menu item). Estimated turnaround time would be good to add to this copy when setting up a site.

Include Item Proofs.

This will include the proofs the user saw at the bottom of the page. Checking this box will give you a way to verify that any proofs that the user faxes you are the final proofs on the order.

CXML Integration

Include CXML Form Post.

If the site is intended to be compatible with Ariba PunchOut, this box should be checked. It allows for the ordering process to continue back to the Ariba system. This option is generally only enabled by PageDNA developers when integrating a site with Ariba. For more information on custom integrations, contact support.

If you want your site users to provide comments about the ordering process, check "Provide Feedback Form to Users". Note that this e-mail message contains the order number, but the order does NOT contain the comments.

Configuring the Reorder Search and Result Pages

The Reorder tools stores all orders placed by users in a database for easy accessibility when users want to 'reorder' a prior order. Users can change their imprint information and optionally 'drop' products from their basket before submitting their reorder. Usually, a user will simply update a title or new contact information.

Users can reorder in two ways. First, they can click a link in their "Confirmation Email" to directly reorder that particular order. The second way users can reorder is using the "reorder" interface available on the site. This is accessed from a "Reorder" button that can appear on several templates, including the "Index" and "Accept" pages.

There are two pages linked to the Reorder system. The first is the Search page, edited using the Menu item "Reorder Search Page". There are some copy elements you can edit and you can turn on or off different search fields. Users may only type a single search criteria at a time, so we recommend you leave the instructions that inform them of this. You can selectively turn on/off various search fields and change copy elements.

The second page is the Reorder Results Page. This is displayed when a user's search finds more than one matching order - the user can choose from any matching order by clicking the tracking number to reorder. For searches that return a single result (ie, when they enter a tracking number into the search fields) they are shuttled directly to the proofs from their former order.

Configuring Cancel Page

Users can cancel their orders by clicking a "Cancel" link or image that appears in the lower-right corner of the page footer. Various options for the cancel button are configured using the "Site Footer" menu item, but the "Cancel Page" page controls the text the user sees on this page.

Default text informs users that their order has been cancelled - you can modify this text if you wish. You can optionally include Start Order and Re-Order links on this page to let users start fresh orders.

If you have never edited this page on a site before, you may see an orange alert at the top of the page informing you that this is your first time editing - this is normal, and we just advise that you check the "Cancel" page after editing to confirm everything matches your expectations.

Configuring Customer Service Contact Page and Information

It is very important that accurate customer service information be stored in your site so that customers can contact the appropriate person or persons to help them with their questions regarding orders. Usually, there is a single contact for customer service, but our software provides capabilities to support a custom message that may reference - for example - multiple vendors by product to help users better direct their inquiries.

Customer service information appears in several places. On sites, the information appears most notably in the customer service page itself, which can be accessed through an (optional) link on the front page of the site. The information also appears on the page the user sees after submitting their order.

If you have never edited this page on a site before, you may see an orange alert at the top of the page informing you that this is your first time editing - this is normal, and we just advise that you check the "Cancel" page after editing to confirm everything matches your expectations.

The "Current Display" section shows you how the customer service contact information appears currently on the site and in emails. After editing this page and saving, you can come back to see the revised display.

Under "Customer Service Info" is where the critical contact information for the site is stored. The single most important field in this section is the Email Address. This must be a real, monitored email address, as Order Confirmations will appear to come from this address and if a customer hits "Reply" to - for example - check on their order, it is necessary that somebody be "listening".

If you have multiple contacts for customer service, you can also add more information in the "Optional Custom Text For Multiple Contacts" field.

Lastly, this page allows you to edit the layout and links provided on the actual customer service page linked to on the site. The system provides a link so you can see how this page looks on your site.

Order Approval Setup and Management

Introduction

Order Approval Management is a feature of the PageDNA system that allows for an order to be reviewed and edited before being sent on to production, or denied and the original customer notified. Some of the reasons you (or your customer) may wish to set up Order Approval would be to check that the person placing the order is authorized to do so, to double check an order's contents and proofing, or to control the amount spent on an order. These are just a few examples; Order Approval can be set up for just about any reason.

As part of the setup process, anyone with an email address (and a login ID for the Storefront if needed) can be assigned as an approver. This means that you can set up someone from within your client's organization as an approver. Or perhaps you want someone in your own prepress department to be able to review and approve the orders prior to printing. This tool will allow for that. You can also set up multiple levels of approval so that more than one person would have to approve the order prior to it being sent to production.

When an item has been set up to require approval, an email will be sent to the approver listed in the Order Approval Management tool. That email will contain details of the order and a link to a webpage where the order can be approved, edited, or denied. If the order is approved, it's passed along to the manufacturer as normal. If it's denied, then the person placing the order is notified but the order itself goes no further.

If only certain items in the catalog require approval, you can set that up too. It's easy to setup individual items for approval. However, if an order contains a mix of items that do and do not require approval, the whole order must be approved or rejected. There is no ability to approve or deny specific line items in an order. This is something to remember when educating your clients about the approval process.

Setting Up Order Approval Management

In order to use the Order Approval Management feature, you'll need to first activate it from the the Storefront menu. There is no additional fee for using this feature. Each Storefront will have it's own set of approval rules and they need to be configured individually. The exception to this is for Mega-Sites. For the special set of rules associated with Mega-Sites, see the Mega-Site section below. To activate the Order Approval Management, go to your Storefront and click on the link under Site Settings that is labeled Approval Setup and Management. There will be a flag next to the link that will tell you if the feature is turned off or on.

Figure 41.1. Approval Setup on the Storefront Menu

Approval Setup on the Storefront Menu


Setup Tab

  • Activation

    From within the Approval Setup and Management tool, click on the tab labeled Setup. Here you have several different options for enabling Order Approval.

    • Not enabled - turns all approval features off. No approval request emails will be sent, nor will any approval restrictions be placed on any orders.

    • For All Order - requires approval for each order that is placed on the Storefront

    • For Certain Products - allows you to set a flag on each item in your catalog that determines if an approver must review that order before it's placed to production. The flag for each item can be set within the Custom tab of the Item Editor or in the Product Filter tab here in the Approval Setup tool.

    • For Rush Orders - Only orders flagged as rush by the customer will be passed through the approval mechanism when this is selected.

    • For Orders Over A Certain Price - For orders that are over a specified amount. You can set that value in the Amount box that is displayed when you choose this option. If you are using Profiles and you wish to give certain users a higher (or lower) threshold than the amount listed in the Amount box, then enter a variable name in the Override Field box. In the user's profile, use that variable to define the specific price threshold that should be used for that person.

    • For Orders Using Billing Code - If you've setup billing codes on the Bill Page (under Web Templates) then you can use this to requires approval on orders using just specific billing codes.

    • Combination of Above - allows you to select any combination of the options for Certain Products, Non Credit Card orders, Rush Orders, and Orders Over A Certain Price. Selecting this option will cause a list of these other options to be displayed so you can choose the combinations you wish to use.

Figure 41.2. Approval Setup Activation

Approval Setup Activation


  • Routing

    After you have selected the type of approval you want to use on the site, you'll next need to decide on how the approver for the oder will get selected. Click on the Routing subtab to see your list of options.

    Figure 41.3. Approval Setup Routing

    Approval Setup Routing


    • Single Approver - All orders requiring approval will be sent to just one email address. Selecting this option will provide a field where you can enter that address.

    • Manager Email is Entered by User - This allows the customer placing the order a free text entry field to enter the address where the approval email should go. You can make this field optional if you wish.

    • Manager List Dropdown on Shipping Page - Provides a list of approvers the customer can select from during the Shipping step of an order. You can populate the list in the Approver List tab.

      [Tip]Tip

      To show the managers name in the list, but pass the managers email address as the correct value for approval to the site, add the names like this:

                       jane@client.com|Jane Manager
                      

      Use the pipe symbol "|" (shift+backslash on most keyboards) to separate the email address from the name. The value on the right of the pipe is shown to the user, the value on the left is used by the system.

    • Approver Set In Divisions - If you have divisions enabled on your site and all orders for approval are going to go to a single email address for each separate division, you'll use this option. Provide the email addresses in the Approver List tab. If not all divisions need approval, mark the checkbox for that option.

    • Approver/mgr_email set in addrlist - You can have the approver set from within an address list by using this option. When you do this you'll be given the option to choose mgr_email or approver. Select the one you want to use and make sure that there is a field in your address list using that name. Then populate that field in your address list with the correct approver's email for each address in the list.

    • Approver/mgr_email from other place - You can have the approver set from other places by using this option. When you do this you'll be given the option to choose mgr_email or approver.

    • Custom Routing - If none of the options above meet your needs, try using the Custom Routing option. It provides you with some additional advanced options.

  • Emails

    Under the Emails tab you can set some of the options about what emails are sent and how.

    Figure 41.4. Approval Email Options

    Approval Email Options


    • Approval Use Tinyurl - When approval emails are sent, they include a link for the approver to click on. This option makes those links sorter and easier to manage by your email program.

    • Send Approval Emails - Turns on and off the sending of approval emails.

    • Add Gifs to Approval Emails - includes a gif of the proof in the approval emails.

    • Send Approved Emails - notifies the customer when their order has been approved.

    • Send Denied Emails - notifies the customer when their order has been denied.

  • Multi-Level Approval

    Figure 41.5. Multi-level Approval

    Multi-level Approval


    If you wish to have a second and third approver for your orders, you can assign them in this tab. With a two or three tier approval setup, an order will first be reviewed and approved by the approver designated in the previous steps of this document. However, it's not released to the manufacturer until the order has been approved by the second tier approver, "Master Approver", and third tier approver, "Master Approver2". Only after the second tier and third tier approvers have reviewed and approved the order will the order be sent to production or Imposition. The PageDNA system does not support more than three levels of approval for a single order. (Although, you can allow the approver to forward Approval to someone else by editing the Approval Page template.) All orders that require approval need to be approved by the Master Approver(s).

    When you want to use a second tier and third tier approver, enter their email address(es) in this tab. Enter only a single address in each field.

    If the second tier approver, Master Approver, is variable, do NOT enter an email address in the Master Approver field. Specify the variable you used in the Divisions Editor's Extra Vars, or in the Address List Editor, or in Shipping Addresses, or in Profiles in the Master Approver Variable field. This variable can be set in only one place.

    You can display a different Approval Page, the Approval_master Page, for the Master Approver by enabling the checkbox for Master Approver Tmpl. You can grant the Master Approver the ability to edit bill_codes on the Approval_master web template. This is not possible for the Approver or Master Approver on the "regular" Approval Page.

  • Options

    Additional options can be configured in the Options menu.

    Figure 41.6. Approval Setup Options

    Approval Setup Options


    • Approval Without Auth - allows an approver to approve orders without being required to log in.

    • Approval Exact Reorder - allows exact reorders for the same items, quantities and imprint form without approval.

    • Auto Approve Self - Set orders placed by approvers to be automatically approved by the system.

    • Disable Mass Approval - The system allows an approver to review and approve multiple orders all at once. If your site is using bill codes as a payment method, this options should be checked to prevent a group of orders being approved at once to all be applied to the same billing code.

    • Show Info In Profile - With this box checked an approver, when logged in to the system, will see information about orders that are waiting for their approval.

  • Reminders

    The Approval Email Reminder System alerts approvers that they have orders that are still awaiting approval.  It does this by sending out a reminder email sometime after the initial approval email has been sent.  The interval between the initial email and the reminder email, as well as other variables such as the number of times a reminder is sent and what to do when all those emails go unanswered, are configured in this tool.

    Here are the settings you can configure.

    Figure 41.7. Approval Setup Reminders

    Approval Setup Reminders


    • Reminder Address - If the action you select in the Reminder Trigger Action field below is set to Forward To Specified Email, then this is the field where you will enter that email address.

    • Reminder Delay - The number of weekdays the system will wait after sending the initial approval email before sending the next email or performing the action specified in the Remind Trigger Action field. Entering a value of 0 will cause the system to skip this step.

    • Remind Repeat - With this field you can set the number of weekdays the system should wait after the initial Reminder Email has been sent before sending resending the reminder email. Entering a value of 0 will cause the system to skip this step.

    • Remind Trigger - This value determines how many reminder emails the system should send before the trigger action takes place.

      • 0 - No reminder email is sent as all and no trigger action occurs.

      • 1 - No reminder email is sent.  The trigger action occurs as soon as the number of weekdays in the Remind Delay field have passed.

      • 2 - One reminder email is sent and then the trigger action happens after the number of weekdays in the Remind Repeat field have passed.

      • 3 - Two reminder emails are sent and then the trigger action happens after the number of weekdays in the Remind Repeat field have passed.

      • 4 - Three reminder emails are sent and then the trigger action happens after the number of weekdays in the Remind Repeat field have passed.

    • Remind Trigger Action - Once the reminder period has passed and any reminder emails have been sent without any action having taken place, the system will then take some action to prevent the order from being forever awaiting approval.  This dropdown box allows you to select what that action will be.

      • Forward to custsvc email - Forwards the reminder email to the Storefront's customer service email address defined in the Web Templates section.

      • Forward to specified email - Forwards the reminder email to the address provided in the Remind Address field above.

      • Forward to requester - Forwards the reminder email to the address of the original customer who placed the order.

      • Approve - Approves the order and passes it along to production

      • Deny - Denies the order.

    • Remind Trigger Explanation - When an email is sent as a result of the trigger action select above, you can provide an explanatory message in this box.  It will help the recipient of the email understand why they are getting this email.  

If an order has gone unapproved by the original approver, even through all of the reminder emails, and it's then been sent on to the email address selected in the Reminder Trigger Action, that Reminder Address is reassigned as the new approver of the order.

Manage Orders

The first tab of the Approval Setup and Management tool is the Manage Orders tab. From here you can see a list of all the orders that are pending approval and manage them.

At the top of the tab is a box labeled tracking. Enter an order tracking number in that box and you can then click the approve, deny, re-calculate the reminder, or send another email to the approver. There is also a checkbox you can mark if you don't want emails to be sent when approving or denying an order.

If you are denying an order, you have the option of providing a message that will be sent to the customer who placed the order. Enter that text in the text entry field prior to clicking the Deny button for an order. Also, when denying an order you can remove the ability to place a reorder by marking the checkbox beneath the Reason For Denying entry field.

Figure 41.8. Manage Order Approvals

Manage Order Approvals


If you want to manage many orders at once (bulk approve or bulk deny) you can do that with the list of orders pending approval found on the lower half of the page. You can check individual orders by marking the checkbox at the right of the tracking number, or you can click the Select All link to mark all of the checkboxes at once. Then you can use the Approve, Deny, Re-calculate Reminder, or Send Approval Email buttons at the top of the page to take action on all of the orders you've checked.

Manage Approvers

If an approver is not able to approve orders for some reason (on vacation, left the company, changed roles, etc.) and you need to reassign their responsibility, you can do so from the Manage Approvers tab.

To reassign pending request for approval from one person to another, enter the old approver's email address in the top box and the new approver's email address in the second box then click the Re-Assign Orders button. Doing so will add the new person to the list of approvers and move all of the waiting orders to be approved from the old approver to the new approver. If you check the Update Approver List option, it will also remove the old approver from the list of approvers.

Figure 41.9. Manage Approvers

Manage Approvers


Approver List

Figure 41.10. Approver List

Approver List


The specific layout and and function of the Approver List tab will depend on the options you selected in the previous steps, but the overall purpose stays the same. For any of the options in the Routing tab under Setup that require an address that doesn't come from an outside source (such a direct user input or a prepopulated address list) then this is the tab you will visit to provide the email address(es) of the approver.

Product Filter

If you have set up the approval rules in the Setup/Activation tab to only require approval for certain items, then you will come to this tab to configure what items will require approval. Place a checkbox in the Approval on Certain Products Only box and then place checkmarks in the box provided for each item that you want to require approval.

Figure 41.11. Product List

Product List


Once you have this set up, you can also adjust any item's approval requirement in the Custom tab of the Item Editor.

Figure 41.12. Item Editor Custom Tab

Item Editor Custom Tab


Order Approval Email

When an order approval email goes out to the approver, it will contain several sections of information about the order. These include:

  • Approval Link - Clicking link will take the approver to Order Approval page on the storefront.

  • Order Information - Includes the PageDNA tracking number, order date, and information about who placed the order.

  • Items Ordered - The friendly catalog name and quantity for each item ordered

  • Imprint - Shows a list of all the fields where information was provided by the customer on variable imprint items

  • Shipping - Displays the shipping method and address

  • Proof - If the option has been set to include a proof .GIF in the approval email (see Emails tab of Setup) then this is where it will be displayed.

Figure 41.13. Approval Email

Approval Email


When the approver clicks on the link provided in the approval email, they will be taken to Order Approval Page. If they are not already logged in to the Storefront, they may be asked to do so before being taken to this page.

Like the Order Approval Email, the Order Approval Page is divided in to several sections. Each is detailed here:

  • Approval Required - This section is where the approver sets the approval action for the order. There are three options an approver can choose from.

    • Approve This Order - Selecting this option will pass the order along to the manufacturer

      The approver can be allowed to upload a file and have it attached to the Approval email and/or Vendor email.

    • Forward This Order To - If the approver feels that another person should review this order, they can enter that person's email address and a reason that will be included in the email that is sent.

    • Deny This Order - Selecting this option will stop the order from proceeding. The approver can also include a reason that will be included the notification email. There is also an option to prevent this order from being reordered.

  • Order Details - This section allows the approver to review and make changes to the order details.

    • Edit - each item with variable imprint information is editable by clicking this link. Doing so will lead to the form page of the order where the approver can edit the information as needed.

    • Qty - If the item can be ordered in different quantities then a dropdown list of options is provided where the approver can change that value. After making that change they should click the Update Quantities button found at the bottom of the Order Details section.

    • Expedited Order - If expedited service is an option, there will be a dropdown box that allows the approver to change the selection of this option.

    • Ship Method - Allows the approver to change the ship method to be used for the order. Be sure to click the Update Ship Method button at the bottom of the Order Details section to save the change.

    • User Comments - It the approver wants to add additional comments they can do so in the provided text entry box. Click the Update Comments button after entering any comments.

  • Proofs - Proofs of each item in the order will be displayed for final review.

  • Approval Action Area - Of note in this section is the ability to allow the Approver to upload a file and attach it to the Vendor email.

    Figure 41.14. Attach Uploaded File to Vendor Email

    Attach Uploaded File to Vendor Email


Figure 41.15. Order Approval Page

Order Approval Page


Special Rules for Mega-Sites

Order Approval only works on Mega-Sites if there is an approver per division (company). You can set the site automatically approve orders where that division does not have an approver on file, but other approval scenarios are not supported at this time. Customers with demanding approval requirements should be split into a separate site. For more about Mega-Sites, see our Help documentation.

Frequently Asked Questions about Approval Questions

41.1. How do I set up auto-approval after a time delay?
41.2. Why is the From: line showing as bounces@printra.net?
41.3. Can I have multiple emails listed as a single approver?

41.1.

How do I set up auto-approval after a time delay?

Go into Approval setup, tab Reminders. Specify a Remind Delay >=1 and a Remind Trigger >=1 (if either is zero, it won't trigger). Set Remind Trigger Action to Approve.

If you set Remind Trigger >=2, you should set Remind Repeat >=1.

41.2.

Why is the From: line showing as bounces@printra.net?

When e-mail is sent, there are actually two different "from" addresses. The first is the real from address, which according to the mail standard is required to be a valid address on the server sending e-mail (so that rejected mail goes to a real mailbox). The second from address is the displayed from address, which in this case ought to be youremail@example.com. However, some e-mail systems and clients in an effort to deal with spamming show the real from instead of the display from. Unfortunately, this is impossible to change.

41.3.

Can I have multiple emails listed as a single approver?

Yes, you can enter two or more emails as the single approver. To do so, insert a comma between each email address and do Not include any spaces.

When you have more than one approver assigned, the ability to approve or deny an order goes to the first approver to click the link. The second approver to visit will see a message stating that the order has already been approved or denied.

However, its possible both approvers may assume that the other approver will approve or deny an order and therefore not click the link. Doing so leaves the order in a limbo state. We recommend using the reminder system to prevent this situation from occurring.

Order Delivery Options

Order Delivery Overview

Equally important to allowing users to order their products efficiently is getting those orders into the hands of the people responsible for production and fulfillment.

PageDNA has delivered hundreds of thousands of orders to manufacturers and fulfillment houses, and we support multiple methods of delivery. These methods of order delivery range from the simple to the complex. Each generally used option is outlined in this chapter. If your requirements fall outside the scope of what is described in this chapter, please contact support with your requirements.

Email Delivery of Orders

For orders with artwork files averaging less than 5 megabytes (or no artwork), we recommend our standard order delivery method, which is email. Email addresses are entered for each vendor into the "Manufacturer Setup" menu item - found under the "Integration" section of the menu. This tool also allows you to linked specific products to different manufacturers.

All that is required for a vendor to "link up" with the system is a working email address and the ability to receive and save attachments.

Note: If you do not see the Manufacturer Setup Menu item on your site, you may have an old site that needs to be converted by PageDNA to our new manufacturer system - simply email support with a list of your site directories that need updating and we will prompty update your sites to use our latest technology.

The settings for the email message sent to manufacturers are configured in the Menu item named "Vendor Email". This menu item allows you to edit the fields included in this email and also allows you to control key settings including whether you want EPS, PDF or both types of files to be attached. Note that EPS is the preferred method to use if you are doing color separation, while PDF works great for process color applications (eg, output on a digital press)

Email is a very reliable delivery method. If your email system goes down, our email server will continue to try to email you for days. If your email stays down, we receive a bounce message and will immediately contact you to resolve this problem. At any time, you can choose to change your manufacturer email address(es) and you can also use the Order Action Console menu item to resend orders to the original manufacturer or a new address.

In an effort to prevent any orders from falling through the cracks, PageDNA offers an Email Receipt Confirmation system for email orders. This is enabled by clicking "Edit" next to the vendor you wish to turn this on for in the "Manufacturer Setup" tab, and then checking the box for "require_receipt". The vendor will need to only hit "Reply" on each order they receive, and our system will mark the order as received. If orders are not marked received after 48 hours, an email will go out to the manufacturer pointing this out. This ensures that all orders are indeed received and not - for example - filtered out by an overly aggressive spam-filtering software program, or accidently deleted.

Canceling an order will automatically stop any confirmation reminders from being sent for that order.

It is important at this point to re-state that sites in "Testing" or "Live" mode will deliver email to the appropriate email address - but sites in "Demo", "Build" or "Off" modes will not send orders, by design. These options are configured using the "Build/Test/Live" menu item.

Imposition

PageDNA offers another option for orders that need to be "ganged" onto sheets for production - the PageDNA Imposition Module. Extensive documentation on this feature is provided elsewhere, but it is worth noting how this works versus other order delivery methods: orders queue up in a list, awaiting 'batching' onto 'gangs' or plates. Check out Imposition System documentation for more information on this option.

FTP - Pull from PageDNA

For large files (over 5 megs) or other situations where email delivery does not work for vendors, PageDNA can configure FTP access to a directory where these files are accessed and downloaded from our server. Files are stored for 60 days. For access to this feature on a site, contact Support.

All PageDNA customers using the FTP server at ftp.nationsprint.com have the option of using SFTP, which is a more secure method to send files. SFTP encrypts both the login/password information and the file data, which makes it nearly impossible for a third party to view files and order data even if they have access to the network data.

To use SFTP you will need an SFTP-enabled client. A command-line SFTP client is built into OS X and linux. It is also available on Fetch, SmartFTP, FileZilla, and most other FTP clients. ftp.nationsprint.com listens on port 22 (the standard SFTP port), and the login information is the same as for FTP.

In addition to artwork, PageDNA can push delimited text containing order data to your FTP site. Many manufacturers use this data to import information on the orders into their in-house production and billing systems. This data can be tuned to your needs.

FTP - Push to External Site

For $50/month, PageDNA can configure our software to push files to an external FTP site, hosted outside our datacenter. We require an extra fee for this procedure because there are many factors outside of our control that can cause external servers to refuse connections, requiring our involvement.

Our system will automatically try and try again if your FTP site is not accessible, and if it continues to fail, the system automatically notifies support.

Order Delivery via e-Delivery

e-Delivery is an optional service that allows a customer to choose to receive a PDF copy of an item suitable for local printing, rather than having the item printed and shipped. It can be used on its own or it can be combined with another PageDNA feature called Ad Resizing.

To have e-Delivery enabled for your site send an email to support@PageDNA.com. There is a one time per site cost to enable this feature but there are no monthly fees for this service.

e-Delivery sends a PDF file of the item as a link in the Order Confirmation email. Once e-Delivery has been enabled a link to it may be found in the Main Menu under Mailing List Settings - e-Delivery configuration, where the setup can be edited..

By only delivering the artwork via the confirmation email, the system forces the user to complete the ordering process, thus allowing e-Delivered items to have a specific fee for the artwork only. This is a site-wide fee for all artwork. A separate shipping fee can also be set.

The system can offer a different resolution settings to allow to control over the size and quality of the PDF sent as a link in the Order Confirmation email. The choices are High (production quality) or Low (screen quality).

[Tip]Tip

E-delivery can send JPEG files instead of PDFs. This can be configured on a per-item basis in the "custom" screen that is accessible when editing an item in the Item Editor.

Figure 42.1. eDelivery File Types

eDelivery File Types


e-Delivery is an option just like drop-ship or mailing. Items which are set to be e-Deilvered should be ordered separately. Mixing both physical and e-Delivered items in the same basket can result in orders being incorrectly routed for production.

*Design Tip: Most customers are not likely to have access to oversized paper, or a printer that can handle oversized sheets. As such, your items should be set to fit standard consumer paper sizes and should take things like bleed in to account when creating the master artwork. Also remember that non-printing area of most home and office printers do not print true edge-to-edge images. Items which are slated for e-Delivery should be designed with these things in mind. In some cases this may mean building two items of the same artwork; one designed for e-Delivery and another designed for professional printing.

The configuration options for e-Delivery are as follows:

Figure 42.2. e-Delivery Admin Control Panel

e-Delivery Admin Control Panel


  • E-delivery Bill Page: overrides which billing page (which_bill) to select multiple bill from if e-Delivery is selected.

  • E-delivery Clear Variables: Variables to be removed if e-Delivery is chosen. Place one variable name per line.

  • E-delivery Item Price: Price per item for e-Delivery items.

  • E-delivery Quality: File quality (high or low resolution) for e-Delivery items.

  • Enabled: Check this to enable E-delivery

  • Pre Approval Blurb: What to show in the confirmation email if the order requires an approval.

  • Pre Completion Blurb: What to show on the review page regarding e-Delivery.

  • Title: What should appear as the e-Delivery option on the Mailing List Selection page.

Mailing List Setup and Management

The last step in configuring e-Delivery is to go to Mailing List Setup and Management (under the Site Settings section in the menu) where you need to do the following:

  1. In the Settings tab: Enable the checkbox for Enable Mailing List Purchasing.

  2. In the Items tab: Disable all the mailing options' checkboxes for all items except edelivery (if no other mailing options are needed).

[Tip]Tip

After completing the configuration above, you can enable e-Delivery for an item by editing the item in the Item Editor and selecting the Custom link. e-Delivery is under the Shipping section of the Custom page.

About Ad Resizing

Ad Resizing is a feature that allows a builder to create items that can be resized dynamically during the ordering process and results in a PDF rather than a printed item. This allows a builder to create an item at one size and a customer to order that same item at a different size to meet specific requirements, such as for an advertisement.

The amount of resizing that can be done is generally between 10% - 20%. Ad resizing is intended for making small adjustments to items, not large scale transformations. For example, if quarter page, half page, and full page items of the same document are needed by your customer, you'll need to create items that are close to each of those finished sizes. Customers can then place orders based on their exact size requirements.

Creating a resizable item is a complex process and should only be done by advanced builders. It requires a deep understanding of the PageDNA system and generally requires a strong math background on the part of the builder. Style Editor Gold (SEG) must be used when building a resizable item. The Visual Style Editor (VSE) will not work for this process.

If you wish to have PageDNA's Production Services group create resizable items for your storefront, you can learn more about how to engage them here. Depending on the complexity of the item and the amount of artwork preparation needed, we typically estimate that you'll be charged between five and eight hours of production time to build a resizable item for you. Subsequent items of the same content but different size may qualify for a discount.

In order to offer Ad Resizing to your customers, your site must have E-Delivery enabled. There is a one time cost per site to have this set up. Please contact support@PageDNA.com for current pricing and to have this feature activated for you.

Because Ad Resizing items are dynamic you may need to build additional artwork before creating your items. It will also require a lot of testing before you have the item working the way you want. You'll need to account for this extra time and effort when planning to build a resizable item.

We offer two different quality options for resizable items: print quality (high resolution) and a web quality (lower resolution). Each has their specific use. The higher resolution versions will have a larger file size but a quality that is intended for magazines and newspapers. The lower resolution version has the advantage of a smaller file size intended for the internet, but is not at a quality level intended for professional printing.

*Sales Tip: Deciding what to charge your customers for a resizable item sent as a PDF can be tricky since there are no material costs like a typical print item. We've seen our clients charge anywhere from $5 to $30 per resizable item. When deciding on your price consider factors such as how much time you're saving them, other business goals you have with this customer (e.g. is this a value add to a large program for traditional print or is it the core of the entire storefront?), and the amount of resources you have expended in creating the items.

Order Delivery via TopForm Integration

PageDNA can export order data to the TopForm application, for customers using this Print Management software. Contact support for information on this integration option.

Order Delivery via Covalent Integration

PageDNA is able to export order data to the Covalent platform, for customers using this Print Management software. Contact support for information on this integration option.

Shipping Label - Information and Setup

Shipping labels are a PageDNA feature allowing a secondary artwork item (EPS to be automatically created - either one for each order, or one for each variable item in the order. A label attached to each item - done in a different style from the "real" artwork... and perhaps including order information - can be used downstream for shipping, grouping or even within the customer location. Read on to learn about this feature..

Some common examples might help illustrate the convenience of this feature: Shipping labels could allow you to have a separate, business-card shaped artwork file sent for each item in every order for business cards. This could show ( in a large font perhaps ) the name of the person on the card, the quantity, and the shipping address. It might also have a barcode identifying this item... these could be used in grouping / shipping.

In fact, the PageDNA Imposition System (optional) also integrates with the Shipping Label system. You can read about that in the Imposition System docs found here. This document describes how to get these Shipping Labels set up.

Limitations:

  • Be aware, only a single shipping label can be set up for a single site. By default it can only have one size and can only be plated with items that are the exact same size. However there is an easy way around this limitation. If you have need to make shipping labels for business cards as well as letterhead, you can still use the same shipping label style (shiplabel.sty) by enabling the one shipping label per item option. With this feature the page size of the shipping label depends on the item, not on the page size set in the shiplabel.sty.

  • Shipping Labels can only be output as PostScript (no PDF option currently).

How to Activate Shipping Labels

A site shipping label is now easy to set up. Go to the 'Shipping Label Setup' page in the menu. If you have no pre-existing shipping label, you will be asked to create one. A Sample image of the default is shown.

Figure 43.1. Before Activating Shipping Labels

Before Activating Shipping Labels


Once the shipping label style is created, you can change the label name, and enable or disable per-item shipping labels and their attachment to vendor emails. Be sure to re-save your Vendor Email.

Figure 43.2. Editing Shipping Label Settings

Editing Shipping Label Settings


Shipping Label Layout Tricks and Tips

In short, you can have anything you'd have on a normal imprint, but you can also get some order information (eg, order tracking number or date). Visit our Imposition Shipping Label documentation has some applications of shipping labels beyond these basics.

Reports: How to Create, Run, Save and Schedule your Reports.

Available Reports

The "Reports" menu item - found under "Popular" in the menu - provides access to reports for a site. Available reports include:

Saved Orders

This report lists the orders placed on the site but were not completed. This allows site administrators to contact customers who may need assistance completing their order.

Orders

This report lists the orders placed on the site. It provides one tracking number per line, even if an order has more than one item in it.

Items

It provides one line item per line, so that you can see the products ordered.

Product Summary

It totals the number of orders for each product over a time period. The products are listed by tag (stationery_type). "number" is the discrete number of orders placed for this product in the given time period. So if in a given date range you had 4 people order 250 cards and 1 person ordered 500, the "number" would be 5 and the "total_qty" 1500 for that product.

Shipped Items

On sites where the PageDNA Shipping System has been activated, a new report named "Shipped Items" is activated automatically. Details are found in the Shipping System docs.

Inventory

This simple report shows current inventory on hand for all item types with Inventory Management enabled (SosStockingItem, SosMultiSizeItem). Note: If you find old items that remain in this report after being deleted from the site, the workaround is to re-create an item with the same original 'tag' as your problem item, then delete it. This problem has been fixed going forward.

Imposition

For imposition users, this is a somewhat compact report showing which items went onto which plate... includes fields such as name and title on item and whether the order was a rush or not.

Items w/Plate ID

For imposition users, this is similar to the Items report but shows the Plate ID as one of the available fields, to help link an item to a plate that was created using the batching system.

Order Tax Info

Similar to the Orders report, but includes County Tax Rate and County Tax collected as separate fields.

Tax

Tax Collection by County. A simple report that shows the county, county tax rate, total tax rate, total amount charged, and total tax amount charged. To help with tax reconciliation tasks.

If you find that the current range of reports don't meet all of your needs, it may be possible for PageDNA to provide you with a custom report. Please contact to learn more.

Running a Report

After clicking on a report, you can adjust the set of data by changing the report parameters. The currently defined reports share many of the same parameters, however not all reports use all of these parameters.

which_date

This parameter determines which date field gets used to filter records -- or whether to completely ignore dates in filtering.

from_date and to_date

These parameters define the date range. The date range includes the from_date and the to_date. So, if the same day is on both the from_date and the to_date then orders for that day will be included. If the to_date is a date that occurs before the from_date, no orders will be selected.

There are links below the from_date which will set the dates to convenient date ranges.

approved

This parameter has four values that determine which orders to include:

All

All orders, approved, denied, or waiting

Approved

Only approved orders

Denied

Only denied orders

Waiting

Only waiting orders

Note that the 'approved' column in the reports also shows the approval status of an order at the time the report is run. The status is represented by a number. 0 means pending, 1 means approved, 2 means denied.

For more detail on approved, denied and waiting order states, see Admin: Approval Setup and Management.

live

This parameter has three values that determine which orders to include:

All

All orders, whether or not they are test orders.

Live

Only live orders

Test/other

Only test orders

Live orders are orders placed after a site is made Live in the Build/Test/Live menu item. Test orders are orders placed while the site is in another ordering state.

ext_status

You can ignore this field.

columns

Checked columns will be included in the report. The order they will be listed is based on the number to the right of the column.

format

HTML returns the data in a web page. Comma returns the data as comma-delimited text. Excel returns the data in a file; when your browser asks you, choose to open the file in an application, then choose Microsoft Excel or a similar program. If you are asked to save the file, then make sure the filename ends with .xls. The data actually saved in the file is tab-separated text.

Saving Reports

In the parameters screen for a report, below the parameters, you will have options to save the report settings. To make a named report, choose the radio button marked New report and enter a name in the text box.

If the current report settings are already named, a radio button with that name will be displayed. Then, saving a new report will create a copy of the report.

After saving a report, the report data will be displayed. The named reports will be available in the list of reports. Hit back in your browser twice to see the report list.

Saved reports can be deleted, or copied from site to site by using the Manage saved reports link. on the report list. You must have logged in to the PageDNA Hub to be able to use this option.

Scheduling Reports (Automatic Email)

Saved reports can be scheduled to run on a schedule and be sent to one or more email addresses. The schedule can be set to one of the following settings:

  • End of Every Day

  • End of Business Day - (Monday - Friday)

  • End of Week

  • End of Month

  • Twice Monthly - 15th and last day of the month

You can delay running a scheduled report by a number of days. This is usually done because transactions have not completed in time for the report to be accurate.

How to set up a scheduled report:

Once you have a saved report, return to the top level of the Reports menu item, and click the link "Scheduled Reports" link found at the bottom of the page. Within the following interface you can schedule reports and view a list of all scheduled reports.

Routing Orders to Manufacturing / Picking:

Overview

A Manufacturer produces and ships ordered items. Each item on a site must be configured to go to a particular manufacturer. Here are a few examples of Manufacturer setups:

  1. A business card is ordered. The eps file and order information are sent via email.

  2. A business card is ordered. The eps file goes into the Imposition queue, and a manufacturer is notified via email.

  3. A business card is ordered. The eps file and order information is placed on the PageDNA FTP server for pickup.

Setting up Manufacturers on your site

Setting up manufacturers is a two step process. The first step is adding manufacturers to a site. The second step is assigning products to manufacturers. You can have as many manufacturers as you have items, if necessary. Each manufacturer can have its own delivery method - email being the most commonly used method.

The 'Current' section shows Manufacturers which are already linked to the site. Use the action links to edit manufacturer settings, and to modify which products use which manufacturers.

  • edit - Edit properties of this manufacturer.

  • products - Change which products use this manufacturer. You can also edit this through Item Editor and Item Wizard.

    If the user places an order for several items that have different manufacturers, a Vendor email will be sent to each manufacturer containing the order information and files specific to them. They will not receive order information or files not meant for them

  • replace - Replace this manufacturer with another. Re-assign all products.

  • drop - Un-link this manufacturer. Re-assign all products to default manufacturer.

  • make_default - Make this manufacturer the default for all new items

The 'Add' section drop-down menu shows all non-email manufacturers configured for your account. To link those manufacturers to the current site, select a manufacturer from the drop-down menu and click the Apply Changes button.

The 'New' section lets you add new manufacturers to the current site. Type the email address for the manufacturer. If the Organization drop-down list appears at the bottom of the New section, it is important for you to change it from 0: Unconfigured because not selecting your organization will affect shipping access. Click the Apply Changes button.

When additional manufacturers are added, they will initially have no products assigned to them. Click the 'products' tab and you will be allowed to check boxes to indicate which products go to this new vendor in the list.

Editing Manufacturer Settings

Editing manufacturer settings lets you customize delivery methods to your needs. Some common settings let you add email notifications to imposition, or to change whether files are sent as EPS or PDF. (Does not apply to Vendor Email.)

Manufacturers can be shared between sites. When a manufacturer is shared, its settings are shared also. So if you have an export set up to send eps files on site A, it will also send eps files on site B. However, there are certain site-specific fields that can have different values on site A and site B.

When you are editing a shared manufacturer, all shared fields will be read-only. This prevents you from accidently making changes on one site that will affect another site. In the example above, the 'email_cc' field is site-specific; you can have one person cc'd on Site A and a different person cc'd on Site B. If you need to edit shared fields, click the 'Edit Shared' button.

When users from manufacturer organizations are granted access to this menu item, the only actions available to them will be to edit settings for their own manufacturer organizations. Contact PageDNA to request such a grant.

Guest Admins can have access to the Manufacturer Setup. However, the username given must match the Hub username exactly.

Multiple Shipping Origins by Manufacturer

The realtime shipping cost calculation now supports more than one ship origin per order. In Manufacturer Setup, each can have its own shipping origin. When shipping cost is calculated, a separate rate is looked up for each different shipping origin, and those rates are summed together before being displayed on the bill page.

Example 45.1. Example Order

Item 1 (5 lb) goes to Manufacturer A. Manufacturer A uses a ship origin of CA/94103. Item 2 (10 lb) goes to Manufacturer A. Item 3 (2 lb) goes to Manufacturer B. Manufactuer B uses a ship origin of WA/98104.

Shipping for items 1 and 2 will be for 15 lb sent from 94103. For UPS Ground the rate is $10.05.

Shipping for item 3 will be for 2 lb sent from 98104. For UPS Ground the rate is $6.05.

The rate displayed to the user will be $10.05 + $6.05 = $16.10.


[Important]Important

All items in an order must continue to have shipping methods in common for the calculation to work.

Figure 45.1. Editing Shipping Origination

Editing Shipping Origination

Email Manufacturers

Email Manufacturers send an email with files and order information. You can optionally enable order delivery confirmation for emailed orders.

The email_cc field is not shared between sites. Use this if you need to add somebody to the email notification for one site, without changing the email address on your other sites.

To enable order confirmation, you need to check the "require_receipt" box on your Email manufacturer, then edit settings for the email template using the Vendor Email menu item.

Email confirmation is a great way for companies that use email order delivery to make sure that they've received all of the orders placed. When Email confirmation is turned on, every vendor email has the Reply-To field to a special email address at PageDNA. The person who receives the vendor email just replies to the email to indicate they've received it. Daily reminders are sent out for any orders that have not been confirmed.

Canceling an order will automatically stop any confirmation reminders from being sent for that order.

NOTE: most settings for Email Manufacturers, including file type, are still configured using the Vendor Email link from the menu, under the "Email Templates" section.

Imposition Manufacturers

The imposition Manufacturer adds approved items to the imposition queue. It can also send an email notification. Note that imposition manufacturers must be created by PageDNA.

Fields:

  • delivery_info - deprecated. This can be an email address. It is now preferred to put that address in email_notify

  • email_notify - comma separated list of email addresses to send notification (w/o files).

If an Imposition delivery method has already been configured for you by PageDNA Support and you need to add it to another site, select it from the drop-down list in the Add section of Manufacturer Setup and save. It will appear in the Current section after saving. Then use the "products" link to assign items to the manufacturer/delivery method. New orders for these items will go into the Imposition queue.

Export Manufacturers

Export Manufacturers can place files on PageDNA’s FTP server or send them to an external FTP server. Exports can also create a comma or tab delimited file with order information. Note that Export Manufacturers must be created by PageDNA.

After the Manufacturer has been added, you can add extra form variables, i.e. variable fields from an Item Form, to the XML export as in the screenshot below.

Figure 45.2. XML Export Extra Form Variables

XML Export Extra Form Variables


Turnaround Levels

Turnaround Levels Overview

Turnaround Levels allows increased control over the turnaround levels offered to users and also allows calculation of the estimated ship date. The user can be allowed to set the turnaround level for their order by way of a Quotes Rush Charge at the "estimate" step, or on the Shipping Page. The turnaround level and estimated ship date can appear on the Review Page, in the Order Confirmation email, in Approval and Imposition.

Turnaround Levels used with a Quotes Pricing Option can be used instead of an item's pricing or to add a surcharge based on the turnaround timeframe. If using Quotes Pricing Options, do not use the Expedite/Rush Option on the Shipping Page, and vice versa.

Configuring the Turnaround Levels Menu Item

Enable and Configure Turnaround Levels Menu Item

The Turnaround Levels menu item will be visible if your account can use the feature. If its not available for your account, please contact PageDNA Support to find out when this feature will be available.

Go to the Integration section in the menu and click on Turnaround Settings, which is used to configure the feature's basic settings that will be applied to the site. The default settings for Turnaround Levels are in the screenshot below.

Figure 46.1. Turnaround Settings Menu Item

Turnaround Settings Menu Item

  • Turnaround Levels:

    The default options are normal & rush. Change their names or add to the list by entering another option on a new line. There can be more than two options and they need to be one per line. The order of the options is important. The first line should be the normal/defualt service level and increase from there.

    If Expedite/Rush Option is enabled on the Shipping Page and if there are just 2 options, they will be presented using checkboxes. If there are more than two options, they will be presented in a drop-down list.

  • Production Days by Turnaround Level:

    This is an important setting. Use numbers in these fields to represent the number of days until a job ships. The estimated ship date will be based on these values. If you leave a field blank nothing is calculated for the delivery time.

    [Important]Important

    The Production Days can be overridden on a per item basis in the item's custom screen (see the optional step #4 below).

  • Date/Time Settings:

    Care should be taken in setting the Cutoff Time. If there is a one day turnaround option, and the Cutoff Time is 05:00 PM, and the user places an order at 04:59 PM, the order will be due the next day.

  • Item Grouping Logic to Set the Estimated Ship Date:

    Individual items in an order can have different turnaround levels if the user is allowed to set the turnaround level using a Quotes "Rush Charge" for items or if the Shipping Page's Rush/Expedite Option is set "per item."

    "...using the maximum expected ship date" for the first two options in the drop-down list means that the system will use the item in the order with the longest "lead time."

    If you select "Expedited items ship when ready, all others ship using the maximum expected ship date" and the user orders some items with a "rush" turn and some with a "standard" turn, the delivery date for all the items using a "rush" turn will be different from those using the "standard" turn.

    If you select "All items ship together, using the maximum expected ship date" and the user orders some items with a "rush" turn and some with a "standard" turn, all the items in the order will use the "standard" turn to set the delivery date.

    The third option for "All items ship separately" is self explanatory.

    [Important]Important

    If the user is allowed to set the turnaround level for their order on the Shipping Page, there cannot be any rush fees set on the Shipping Page.

Estimated Ship Date

The estimated ship date will be calculated based on the Turnaround Levels, e.g. "normal" and "rush", Production Days by Turnaround level and the Item Grouping Logic specified in the Turnaround Levels menu item. The turnaround level and estimated ship date can appear on the Review Page, in the Order Confirmation email, in Approval and Imposition.

Quotes Rush Charge Overview

A Quotes Config Shared Option for a Rush Charge can be added to be used for more than one item as a surcharge.

A Pricing Option for a Rush Charge can be added to an item to be used as a surcharge to an item's pricing.

A Pricing Option for a Rush Charge can be added to an item to be used INSTEAD of an item's pricing in the item's Quantities screen.

The Expedite/Rush Option on the Shipping Page cannot be used with any of the above.

Quotes or Quotes Plus Rush Charge Shared Option as a Surcharge

Items must have quantities and prices associated with them in each item's Custom screen.

You can add one or more print_service options as a Quotes Shared Pricing Option to be applied to more than one item. This can be done in the Shared Options tab instead of configuring individual rush options for each individual item. The unique identifier is the Name field. Using a Shared Option will reduce or eliminate the need to enter Rush Surcharge quantities and prices for every item.

For example, if all business cards use the same quantities, prices and turnaround surcharges, and all envelopes use a different set of quantities, prices and turnaround surcharges, you could create a Rush Charge with the name print_service_bc for the business cards and another Rush Charge for the envelopes with the name print_service_env. You would enter their respective Rush Surcharge quantities and prices here.

To add a Rush Charge option to the Shared Options tab in Quotes or Quotes Plus, you will find it in the drop-down list to the left of the Change Type button. After adding it, it should look similar to the screenshot below.

Quantities and prices entered here can be added to the basic prices for an item as a surcharge based on the turnaround level the user selects. The quantities must match the quantities offered for an item in its Quantities screen. Enter the additional costs in the Rush Surcharge matrix, where they apply, for a given quantity and delivery time. Enter the item's quantities and basic pricing in its Quantities screen.

Figure 46.2. Adding a Shared Option in Quotes Plus Config

Adding a Shared Option in Quotes Plus Config

Configuring an Item's Rush Surcharge Pricing Option:

[Important]Important

If the Rush Charge is used to set a surcharge to be applied to an item's basic prices: When setting the quantities in the item's Quantities screen, the quantities must match those in the Rush Charge. The Quantities screen should have the item's basic prices for each quantity and the Rush Charge should be used to apply surcharges based on the turnaround level for each quantity.

  • Edit an item in the Item Editor and go to the Quantities screen. Enter the quantities and respective "basic" prices for the item.

  • Edit the same item in the Item Editor and click on the "form" link. Enable Show Quote Form Step so pricing options are displayed to the user in an ordering session for the item.

  • Go to the pricing_options link for the item. If you created a shared Rush Charge, add it by selecting Shared from the drop-down list to the left of the Change Type button and click the Change type button.

  • If you need to create an item specific Rush Charge, select Rush Charge from the drop-down list to the left of the Change Type button and click the Change type button. Enter the quantities and surcharge prices that are to be added to the "basic" prices in the Quantities screen for this particular item based on the turnaround level the user selects in the ordering session.

Configuring a Rush Option INSTEAD of an Item's "Normal" Pricing:

In some cases you may wish to use the matrix style of price entry that the Rush option offers for all prices. Here are the steps to accomplish that:

[Important]Important

If the Rush Charge contains all quantities and prices, i.e. the Rush Options are not surcharges: When setting the quantities in an item's Quantities screen, the quantities must match those in the Rush Charge and be set without any prices. The Rush Charge needs to be used to set the quantities and their respective prices.

  • Edit an item in the Item Editor and go to the Quantities screen. Enter the quantities needed for the item without prices.

  • Edit the item in the Item Editor and click on the "form" link and enable Show Quote Form Step so pricing options are displayed to the user in an ordering session for the item.

  • Go to the pricing_opitons link for the item. Select Rush Charge from the drop-down list to the left of the Change Type button and click the Change type button. Enter the quantities and prices for this particular item that include the item's basic prices plus any additional charges based on the turnaround level.. The matrix for the print_service in the screenshot below is being used to set the item's overall pricing.

Figure 46.3. Configuring an Item's Rush Charge

Configuring an Item's Rush Charge

Item Custom Settings Turnaround Level (optional):

If needed, you can override the number of days for the default Turnaround Levels for the site. The fields are displayed in the screenshot below.

Figure 46.4. Override Turnaround Time in an Item's Custom Settings

Override Turnaround Time in an Item's Custom Settings

Email Templates: How to Edit Emails Sent by the System

Editing Email Templates Using the Email Template Builder

You can use the templates referred to in the sections following this, or use the Email Template Builder, which can be used to configure the emails that PageDNA sends out for order confirmation, approval and vendor notification. The Email Template Builder may not be available for all the existing email templates.

The Email Template Builder can be enabled on a per-email template basis using the links under the Template Builder column header. The Email Templates list shows a green icon in either the Original or Template Builder columns to indicate which tool is active.

Figure 47.1. Email Template List

Email Template List


The Email Template Builder is based on a list of template "chunks." Each chunk type displays a particular part of order or item information. For example, there is an "Order Text Chunk" that contains custom HTML along with variable substitutions. There is an "Invoice Table" chunk that shows the items ordered along with prices, shipping, handling, tax, and totals. The chunks can be dragged to rearrange their order and clicked to edit.

New chunks can be added using the edit icon in the upper right of each chunk (circled in the screenshot below), which works similar to the Form Editor. To move a chunk, click and drag the chunk's edit icon.

Figure 47.2. Email Template Builder Example

Email Template Builder Example


Order Confirmation Email

The menu item titled "Order Confirmation Email" allows you to configure the template sent to the requestor upon completing an order.

By default, this email will appear to come from the email address specified in the "Edit Customer Service Info" menu item. This is important so that if users reply to an order confirmation email, the order will route to somebody who can help them resolve their issue!

Many aspects of this template can be edited, including subject line, message body contents, and file attachment options, depending upon the information collected during an ordering session. You can also add custom fields to your email when necessary.

Since this email template is customer facing, there is also an option to use HTML format and CSS.

To add custom fields to your Confirmation Email (such as form fields from an Item Form that you wish to have sent to the customer), check the box to add "Custom Fields" to your email, and then enter labels and field names (the names given in the form editor) one at a time. If you need more than 10 fields, save the template and re-edit to be given more fields. Fields that are not completed by the user will not be shown in the email sent out.

All uploads, mailing lists, and previews attached to a Vendor, Approval Notification, or Order Confirmation email will use the site file naming scheme, which can be set in Site Variables in the menu.

Shipment Notification Email

On sites where the PageDNA Shipping System [ docs ] is activated, there exists the ability to send a "Shipment Notification Email" to customers after their items have left the shop. This email facilitates a pro-active "push" of order status to your customers, so they can be kept in the loop on their orders without have to inquire.

The menu item "Shipment Notification Email" allows you the ability to edit the email template used for shipment notification. Note that you can configure the "From", "Cc" and "BCc" (blind carbon copy) options on a per site basis. Make sure to make the "From" address a valid email so any customer replies will route to your customer service department.

[Tip]Tip

When the Order Manager is used to resend the Shipment Notification email, this will appear in the order's history. You can use the Find Order tool in the Hub or in the site's menu to see an order's history.

Vendor Email

The menu item Vendor Email, found in Email Templates, allows you to configure the template sent to the manufacturer/vendor after an order has been approved. You can customize many aspects of this email, including the subject line and file type(s) sent for orders (EPS and/or PDF). Some of the information that can be displayed is dependent upon the information collected during an ordering session.

Information about items listed for an order appear in columns in the email, e.g. item name, quantity, price, etc. You can change the names for the column headers and adjust the width of each column. This can be done in the Items List section of the template.

You can also edit and add custom variables to the email body. This can be used to pass custom information to vendors from users' orders.

The system allows for a builder to configure the emails so that they include either the artwork as attachments and/or links to the artwork.

To send the actual artwork files, place check marks next to the formats you wish to have sent attached to the Vendor Email. In order to prevent email systems from bouncing a message for being too big the system will automatically send just links to the artwork if the combined size of all the attachments is too large.

All uploads, mailing lists, and previews attached to a Vendor, Approval Notification, or Order Confirmation email will use the site file naming scheme, which can be set in Site Variables in the menu.

Figure 47.3. Attachment Types

Attachment Types


To send links to the artwork, check either (or both) EPS or PDF in Items List for Show Item file URLs.

Figure 47.4. Link_types

Link_types


To add custom fields to your Vendor Email (such as form fields from an Item Form, typically made using the Form Editor, that you wish to have sent to the vendor), mark the check box next to Include Custom Fields. Enter the labels and field names (the names given in the form editor) in to the boxes provided. If you need more than 10 fields, save the template and re-edit to be given more fields. Fields that are not completed by the user will not be shown in the email sent out.

Figure 47.5. Include_custom

Include_custom


Bottom Message

The Bottom Message field, which is the last field in the Vendor Email template, can be used to display a message for every Vendor email sent.

Order Confirmation Receipt System

PageDNA's Order Confirmation system allows an order to be automatically tracked. Just use the Reply button in your email to acknowledge that you have received the confirmation email. If you've not replied after 48 hours we'll email you a report of the orders that need confirmation as a reminder to ensure proper action is taken and to keep orders moving on their way. This system works by using custom email address (orders+token@nationsprint.com) for each order. You may wish to set up a custom rule in your email application to watch for emails coming from "@nationsprint.com". When our system receives your Reply, we know you've received that particular order.

To activate this feature, visit Manufacturer Setup in the Storefront Main Menu. You will need to edit one manufacturer at a time, checking the Require Receipt oprion and then hitting the Apply Changes button. This will enable the tracking system and automatically change the From address on the Vendor Emails.

Ensuring that vendors reply to the message may require setting the proper expectation in the beginning but it can save time in the long run by preventing due to lost orders.

Profile Password Reminder Email

This menu item lets you edit the settings and text shown in messages sent to people requesting their password.

Approval Notification Email

This menu item allows you to edit the email sent to customers for order approval events (approval_email). Some of the information that can be displayed is dependent upon the information collected during an ordering session. These emails can be turned off using the menu item "Approval Setup and Management".

All uploads, mailing lists, and previews attached to a Vendor, Approval Notification, or Order Confirmation email will use the site file naming scheme, which can be set in Site Variables in the menu.

Approval Granted Email

This email is sent to customers when their order has been approved (approved_email). Some of the information that can be displayed is dependent upon the information collected during an ordering session. These emails can be turned off using the menu item "Approval Setup and Management".

Approval Denied Email

This email is sent to customers when their order is denied. Some of the information that can be displayed is dependent upon the information collected during an ordering session. These emails can be turned off using the menu item "Approval Setup and Management".

Discount Notification Email

This email is sent to the adress specified in the Discount Editor when a discount or coupon has been applied to an order by a user. The only options to configure this email are:

  • Add CC adresses

  • Add BCC addresses

  • Enable the display of bill_code1

Inventory Change Notification Email

This is the email sent to the address specified in the Change Email To field in the Inventory screen that is available when you edit an item with inventory.

This email is sent when you use the Inventory link in the Item Editor to adjust an item's inventory. The only option to configure this email is to "Show Inventory Change Note", which will be included if you add a comment in the Note field when you adjust the inventory.

Low Inventory Stock Notification Email

This email will be sent for an item if the Low Stock Level and Low Email To fields have been configured for it. These fields are available in an item's inventory screen, which you can access when you edit an item with inventory. The only options to configure it are to:

  • Show Unit of Measure

  • Show Catalog Details

Email Configuration Problem

Notifications of configuration problems that prevent a PageDNA email from going out (e.g. Confirmation, Approval, Vendor email) will be sent to the site's technical contact with instructions for fixing.

The subject of these emails will look like this:

PageDNA configuration problem: YOURSITE Approval Notification Email

Oftentimes, simply re-saving the email template will resolve the issue. If this does not fix the problem, please contact PageDNA Support.

Order Action Console

The Order Action Console (OAC) is a tool designed to re-send orders (to manufacturers) and/or order confirmations (to customers). You can optionally override the delivery to send these orders / confirmations to other individuals.

The top part of the Order Action Console shows the 25 most recent items ordered on the site. Only approved orders are shown. To see more orders, you can click a number in the "Show" column. However, it is not necessary to show all orders you are acting on, as you will see below.

The Order Action Console can work on multiple orders at a time. To perform an action on one or more orders, first click the tracking number for the order(s) in question one time, OR you can type the tracking numbers into the text box that is provided at the bottom of this page. For your convenience, a link to the bottom of the page is provided near the top. If you are typing in tracking numbers, be sure to type them in with the proper capitalization (all UPPER CASE for letters) and separate each tracking number with a single space

Now that orders have been selected, you can perform an action. The first action available is called "Re-send Customer's Confirmation Email". The Confirmation Email is the order that routes to customers after they submit an order. Sometimes, customers will enter a bad email address for their order and accordingly will not receive this email. You can use the Order Action Console to override delivery to their real email address. This is the most common use of this part of the tool.

Checking the box in front of the "Re-send Customer's Confirmation Email" option will resend confirmation emails for all selected orders to the email addresses used by those customers. If you wish you can "Override" the delivery of these emails by typing in one or more email addresses into the Override field. Note that all email addresses entered will receive separate emails for each order. If you are entering multiple addresses, separate each email address with a comma. You can optionally explain why you are resending these emails - this message will appear at the top of the emails that go to customers and can help prevent confusion from the customers (eg, "why did I get another copy of my order?"). You can also check the "Include RESEND in subject line" option which will include text in the subject line indicating that this is a resend.

Re-send to Manufacturer is a bit more involved, and its specific behavior depends on your manufacturer settings as well as which manufacturers (as configured in the "Manufactuer Setup" menu item) are involved in a particular order or orders that are selected.

By default, this option will re-send an order (including all items, if more than one is present) to the manufacturer(s) through the mechanism(s) currently configured on the site. Generally, orders are send via email, but there are a variety of export methods (including FTP and others) that PageDNA supports.

Sites with multiple manufacturers will provide an option so you can choose all or one manufacturer to export to... this is helpful if only one vendor needs files resent.

If you wish, you can orderride delivery by typing an email address into the Override field. Note that files that are larger than 5 megabytes sometimes are not allowed by mail servers. If you suspect that you have large files, contact support for assistance.

Lastly, you can opt to regenerate files by checking that particular box. See the next section for details on this process.

Order Regeneration

As part of the PageDNA order management process, we've included the ability to regenerate orders. The goal of this tool is to allow for new production files to be created if it's discovered, after an order has been placed, that an item's style needs to be edited.

For example: An order has been placed by a customer for business card, but upon receiving the production file you discover that two of the type blocks are not properly aligned. You can go in to the item's style, correct the alignment and then regenerate the order. This will create new production files that reflect your changes.

While regenerating orders can be useful it only works in certain situations. This includes things such as block position, page size, and text placement.

This also works if a photo is called for on an item, but only if the photo is being updated. It must have been present in the original order to be included in the regeneration. If the photo was not part of the original order, and was then uploaded to the system it will not be included. However if a user has updated a photo that is using the same variable and filename as the original photo in the order, this will be included when a regeneration is performed.

No other variable information works like that. So any additional changes, such as an address or phone number will not included in a regeneration.

Figure 49.1. Redeilver and Regenerate options in Order Manager

Redeilver and Regenerate options in Order Manager


There are two components to regenerating an order. The first is to simply regenerate it. That will recreate the productions files. The second option you can choose is to also redeliver the files. This will send the production files to the manufacturer for that item. Within the Redeliver option, you can choose to Regenerate the files by use of a checkbox

The Redeliver and Regenerate options are found in the Order Manager under the Production tab.

Saved Orders (Without Profiles)

It is possible to allow users to save an order for a variable item at the Proof or Catalog steps in the ordering process so it can be edited and someone can finish ordering it later. The button on the Catalog Page will appear after an item has been added to the shopping cart.

[Important]Important

The Shopping Cart feature is required for saving orders.

Saved Order Process and Options:

  • The user will encounter a popup window in which they must enter "To" and "From" email addresses.

  • A link to be able to access the order will be sent via email, along with a thumbnail proof. The user can see a larger proof when they edit the order.

  • The link in the email will take the user to the Shipping Page. The user will be able to edit the variable item if the Edit Item Link has been enabled on the Shipping Page.

  • Users do not have the ability to see a list of saved orders. This can only be done with the Profile feature.

[Important]Important

Saved orders only last for 30 days. A new order will need to be placed after 30 days have passed. This is a limitation built into our software for all PageDNA customers' sites.

The instructions below are for Saved Orders (Without Profiles):

Steps Needed to Enable Saved Orders (Without Profiles)

Please follow these five steps to enable saved orders on a site:

  1. Enable the Shopping Cart feature if it has not been enabled on the storefront by using the Baskets/Shopping Cart Converter in the site's menu. This is a one-way change. Please request a clone of the site so you can test these features by using the Clone Site tool in the site's menu.

    [Note]Note

    If you do not see a link for the Shopping Cart Converter in the menu, it is because the shopping cart is enabled. Please continue with step 2.

  2. Go to Web Templates in the site's menu and edit the Save/Send Order template. The Saved Orders feature will be enabled after clicking on the Apply Changes button.

    Figure 50.1. Enable Saved Orders Feature

    Enable Saved Orders Feature


  3. Edit the Preview Footer (located in Web Templates) and scroll down to the Saved Orders section. Change the Save Order Link Text from "Save This Order", which is meant to be used with Profiles, to "Send This Order". Save the Preview Footer.

    Figure 50.2. Change the Button Text from "Save This Order"

    Change the Button Text from "Save This Order"


  4. Edit the Save/Send Order template in Web Templates (or from within an ordering session after selecting the Save This Order button at the Proof step). This template is used to configure Saved Orders with and without Profiles. When configuring the Save/Send Order template without Profiles, it is critical that you set three things that are highlighted in the screenshot below:

    • The "Can user to send order via email" drop-down list MUST be set to "Always."

    • The "Save next page" and "Delete next page" drop-downs MUST be set to something other than Profile Page.

      Figure 50.3. Configure Saved Orders

      Configure Saved Orders


      Once configured, the webpage will apppear to the user something like the following.

      Figure 50.4. Saved Orders Webpage

      Saved Orders Webpage


  5. The "Edit Item Link" needs to be enabled on the Shipping Page so users can edit the item.

Restricting Site Access by IP Address or Usernames and Passwords

The "IP Restriction / Basic Auth" menu item has replaced the "Passwords" menu item. Access to sites can now be restricted to specific IP addresses or on a username and password basis. You should not restrict access using both.

To restrict access based on IP address:

Enter the IP address(es) into the Domains field(s).

To restrict access based on username:

Enter a username in the left column of the Users section and a corresponding password in the right column.

A username can be an actual name (e.g. john, or john.doe), or an email address. Using an email address may be less confusing for users. Usernames and passwords are case sensitive. You will need to collect the first name, last name and email address on the Shipping Page using required fields because this information will be used to send the Order Confirmation email to the user.

This is a different set of passwords than you use to access the site's Menu. You can tell when you are prompted for one of these types of passwords because it appears in a pop-up window as opposed to the normal login prompts, which appear inside a webpage.

[Note]Note

Every user of the site, including site administrators, will need to have a password to get in. Site administrators may need another password to access the Menu.

It is OK for users to share passwords. In fact, it’s recommended that site builders make a single password for internal use on sites that are password protected. That way you will always have a 'skeleton key' that works to get into your sites that use this passwords feature.

[Note]Note

If you get 'locked out' of a site you can still add/edit passwords from outside the site using the Hub-level tool called "Site Passwords".

To delete a user:

To remove a user, delete their password.

Forgotten password:

Once these passwords are saved, they cannot be recovered. They can only be changed to a new value using this interface, or from Site Passwords in the Hub under the Tools tab.

Being asked for passwords twice?

If you have enabled SSL on your site in the "Site Variables" menu item, please note that your users will be prompted twice for a password if they attempt to access the site using the non-secure URL. First they will be prompted for the password for the non-SSL version, and then when our system shuttles the user to the secure site they will be prompted again for a password. For this reason, please instruct your customer to link / bookmark the secure version of the site (starts with: 'https://...' instead of the standard URL which starts with 'http://')

Also make sure there is a final "slash" added to the end of the URL... (ends with: '/')

Figure 51.1. IP Restriction / Basic Auth

IP Restriction / Basic Auth


Button Uploader

The button uploader allows uploaded images to be used in place of system-level buttons on the ordering site. You can also see buttons which were previously uploaded. In addition to "static" buttons, the system can also create "rollover" buttons whereby a different version of the button image is displayed based on whether the cursor is over the button or not.

Button images should be GIF files and we recommend they be no more than 40 pixels tall or 180 pixels wide. Typical buttons will be between 20 and 30 pixels tall and 60 to 120 pixels wide.

When first visiting, all the buttons that could possibly show up on the site are listed. Choosing one of the page names from the drop-down list will list only the buttons next to that page. Not all pages, or all buttons, will always be used in the ordering site. That depends on other parts of the site configuration.

Figure 52.1. Viewing Buttons for one page

Viewing Buttons for one page


For each button, there is a name, two "Browse" or "Choose File" buttons, then the name of the image file(s) currently chosen for that item, and finally a preview of the image(s) currently being used (if any).

The upper "Browse" or "Choose file" button is used for the "normal" state of the button which is when the cursor is not currently "hovering" over the button. If this is the only image uploaded, this will be the only image used. If a second image is uploaded, the system will automatically utilize it for the "over" state of the button.

To upload a button, click the "Browse" or "Choose File" button and choose the image on your computer. Repeat that process if you have more than one button to upload. Then click the "Apply Changes" button.

After uploading, the images you uploaded will be shown next to the button names. If you do not see the images, or see a broken image indicator in your browser, then it is likely that file format of the image is incorrect.

Some buttons will act as a fallback for other buttons, filling in when there is no image for a button. For instance, the "continue" button fills in for the "choose_continue" button, the "corp_continue" button, and so on. The fallback button image will appear listed next to buttons in the button uploader.

You may delete buttons by clicking the "delete" link next to the image. The "delete" link won't appear when the image is actually a fallback image.

Button Designer

The "Button Designer" -- found in "Site Wide Appearance" -- gives you a much faster way to customize buttons on your storefront than previously available.

Rather than laboriously making new images manually in image editing software such as Photoshop, you can now design a button theme and apply it to your entire site with one click. This also allows for easier editing of button text, as you will once again be able to edit button text on individual page templates.

[Note]Note

If you are using custom buttons (uploaded in Button Uploader) you will first need to delete them all before this feature can activate. If you prefer to leave certain button images in place, they will take precedence over the Button Designer based buttons.

Active section: To activate button designer settings.

  • Active: Select this to use the settings below; otherwise the site will use generic web buttons.

Text section: Font options.

  • Text Face: This will be the fonts used on the button if the user's computer/browser has those fonts installed. It's always best to leave the existing three fonts at the bottom of you list of fonts, so there are defaults for users who do not have a specific font.

  • Text Size: Set the pixel height of the text within the button.

  • Align: Horizontal alignment of text within button.

  • Vertical Align : Vertical alignment of text within button.

Size section: Button size options.

  • Size: Overall width of the button. Use this for a hard-coded width. Leave blank to ensure the button adjusts to the length of the button text.

  • Height: Overall height of the button. Be sure this is more than the Text Size above.

  • Padding: Set the space around the type, within the button. Fields are for top, right, bottom, and left side padding.

Colors section: Set the colors for the default(non-hover) button.

  • Text Color: Color of the text within the button.

  • Background Color: Background color of the button.

  • Gradient: Set a top and bottom color to create a gradient effect on the button. Gradient settings take precedence over Background Color setting.

  • Arrow Images: Select to cover >> symbols within button names into graphical arrow images.

  • Arrow Color: Set the color of the generated arrows.

  • Generate Arrow Images: Use this to regenerate new arrow images after Arrow Color has been set or changed.

Border section: Create a border around buttons.

  • Border: Choose border type.

  • Border Color: Set border color.

  • Border Width: Set the thickness of the button's border.

  • Corners: Choose corner appearance.

Hover section: These settings are used to create the look of buttons when hovered over (with the mouse). They work the same way as the Colors section above.

Final Words

The menu is a complicated system. If you run into problems or have questions or suggestions please contact us directly and let us know. We thrive on feedback from real-world users such as you.

Global Site Info: Catalog Item/Tab Settings

The Tab Manager tab in Catalog Admin lets you assign tabs to items using a drop-down list. The item tag and longname appear on the left hand side. Selecting one of the tab names from the list will assign that item to that tab.

You can also add tabs by entering a tab name in the text box labeled "New Tab". When you don't have any tabs on your site, only the text box will show.

When you have some items not assigned to a tab, the first tab in the drop-down list will be selected, but will not be saved to the item(s) until you save the page. However, when using tabs on your site, you should ensure all items are assigned to a tab to ensure they are shown in the site's catalog.

Tax Settings

The Tax Settings page allows you to configure the tax rates that will be applied to the order. The following settings are present:

Tax Calc

This select list lets you choose how the tax rate is calculated, based on the order's information.

Settings appear below the select list that pertain to the currently chosen "Tax Calc".

Additional information on each option is given in later sections.

Tax Handling Costs

Should tax apply to handling costs? (Same as setup for Shipping Rate Editor)

Tax Shipping Costs

Should tax apply to shipping costs? (Same as setup for Shipping Rate Editor)

Figure 56.1. A screenshot or the Tax Settings menu item

A screenshot or the Tax Settings menu item


Typical Tax Scenario: Business in U.S. calculate tax based on ZIP code

Choose "Look up tax based on US ZIP code", and select the states where you have a physical presence. Or, choose "Look up US tax using origin ZIP when shipping to same state", enter the originating city, county, state, zip and country and select the appropriate state. The tax rate will be calculated according to the shipping address of the order.

There is an option to determine if shipping is taxable, which is the default for newly created Lookups,. It is based on looking up the city/state/zip in our tax database, which is updated monthly, and covers the entire US, including city and county taxes.

There are three text fields for customizing the error messages shown to your users (similar to the way field labels work on other menu edit pages). They are primarily for sites in non-English languages (e.g. Spanish). The fields are "Error Text Cannot Find Zip", "Error Text Need State Zip", and "Error Text Zip Not In State". Please contact support@PageDNA.com if you need assistance updating these.

The tax calculation has an option to automatically determine if shipping should be taxed based on a lookup of the destination zip code. This uses our tax database which is updated monthly. To use this, select the "Look up tax based on US ZIP code" or "Look up US tax using origin ZIP when shipping to same state" options and choose "Tax based on zip code lookup".

Mailable items have multiple destinations. So, it's not possible to calculate tax based on destination. However, there is an option to "Tax Mailed Location" which can base tax for mailable items on the Site Origin or on the card_* fields, i.e. fields prefixed with card_. The latter can be used to calculate tax based on the location of the profile ordering.

Figure 56.2. Tax Based on Zip Code Lookup

Tax Based on Zip Code Lookup


Typical Tax Scenario: Calculate taxes based on Origin

Some states or localities in the US require the origin of the shipment be used to calculate the tax rate. For example, in Illinois, an order shipping from Chicago, IL (9%) to Deerfield, IL (7.75%) should be taxed at the Chicago rate because the shipment is within Illinois.

Choose "Look up US tax based using origin ZIP when shipping to same state", and select the states where you have a physical presence, and enter the origin city/state/zip.

Typical Tax Scenario: Canada Tax

Choose "Look up tax based on Canadian province" to use our database of Canadian taxes (updated monthly). GST is automatically used for all provinces; make sure to select the provinces where you have a physical presence to add the PST. Note that only a single taxrate will be reported for the combination of GST/PST.

There are two text fields for customizing the error messages shown to your users (similar to the way field labels work on other menu edit pages). They are primarily for helping you set up French sites. The fields are "Error Text Cannot Find Province" and "Error Text Need Province". Please contact support@PageDNA.com if you need assistance updating these.

Typical Tax Scenario: Outside US or Other

If you want a flat tax (one that doesn't change based on where the order is shipping), choose "Flat tax rate or no tax".

Alternatively, arrange for the taxrate variable to be set (for example, by adding 'taxrate': '8.0' the Extra Variables in the divisions editor, or as a field in the Address List Editor). When the taxrate variable is present in an order, it takes precedence over the tax rate determined by the tax settings.

Typical Tax Scenario: Flat Tax per State

The Flat Tax Rate per State option allows you to manually assign a specific tax rate per state.

Enter the two letter state code in the first box and your desired tax rate in the second box. The third box allows you to describe the Tax District for integration purposes.

By default, only a few lines are displayed. As you add information and click the save button, additional empty lines are added so you can enter further flat tax rates.

Figure 56.3. Flat Tax per State

Flat Tax per State


Migration of Tax Settings

The "Tax Settings" menu item centralizes the tax settings for the entire site. Before the introduction of the "Tax Settings" menu item, tax was either entered in the "Review Page" menu item (for flat tax) or the "Shipping Page" menu item.

Settings from the review page are copied automatically. If the shipping pages have tax-related settings, then they must be moved. Until the shipping page settings are moved, a warning appears above the "Tax Settings" screen. The shipping page settings will take precedence (they set the taxrate variable).

A link to the shipping page with the tax-related settings is shown with the warning. When there are multiple shipping pages, all of the ones with tax-related settings are shown. In many cases, a button labelled "Fix" will appear below the link or links. This will copy and then remove the tax-settings from the shipping pages. Visiting each shipping page to check for alerts is a good idea as well.

The "Fix" button may appear because the Tax Settings menu item already has some settings. In that case you can change the setting to a flat 0%. Or, the shipping pages may have differing settings. Or, some of the shipping page may be locked. In any case, when the "Fix" button does not appear, the course of action is to visit the shipping page; make note of the tax-related settings; uncheck the "Calculate Tax For These States" box; and save the shipping page.

Figure 56.4. Tax Settings with a "Fix" button shown

Tax Settings with a "Fix" button shown


Order Manager

Order Manager tabs

Order Manager has tabs for each of the various stages of an order. The tabs are described in the following sections.

Quotes||Waiting

Manage quotes: orders that have not been completed, and need a sales person to enter a price.

Filter fields for Approval Filtering

Quotes||Finished

Manage quotes waiting for the user to finish: orders that have not been completed, and that have a price entered by a sales person.

Filter fields for Approval Filtering

Approval||Waiting

Manage orders in WAITING state: orders that have been completed, but need to be APPROVED to go to production or DENIED because they should not be delivered.

Filter fields for Approval Filtering

Approval||Denied

Manage orders in DENIED state: this allows you to rescue orders that were accidentally denied or make them unavailable for reorder.

Filter fields for Approval Filtering

Production

These are items in APPROVED orders that have been sent to production (they may be queued for sending to manufacturer).

Filter fields for Production Filtering

Shipping||Unshipped

Items in production that have not yet been shipped.

Filter fields for Shipping Filtering

Shipping||Shipped

Manage shipped items

Filter fields for Shipping Filtering

Shipping||All

Show all approved items with shipping status

Filter fields for Shipping All Filtering

Billing||Credit

Manage approved orders that contain credit card information

Filter fields for Credit Card Filtering

Billing||No Credit

Manage approved orders that do NOT have credit card information

Filter fields for Credit Card Filtering

Production||Unshipped

Items in production that have not yet been shipped.

Filter fields for Production Filtering

Order Manager Details

The link for Order Details Table (in the upper right of the Order Manager) allows Menu Users to see a detailed, printable 'audit report' of any filtered set of orders they are viewing in the Order Manager. After selecting the link, the report opens in a new window. The new report includes the columns from their current Order Manager view plus item tag, longname and preview.

Order Manager filters

Each tab restricts which items/orders are shown (e.g. Production only shows approved orders), but you can also add additional restrictions with filter fields:

Approval Filtering

The filter allows you to search for specific orders. The "Search" input box accepts names, order numbers (tokens), and divisions. You can enter multiple words in the "Search" box, so you can enter more then one name or a name and a order number.

The filter will return the orders that are inside the date range and where the words in the "Search" box match a token, the beginning of a name or a any part of a division.

Example: Search: "G407QY Jo Card" Date Range: "last 90 days" Will find the order with token G407QY and the orders in the divisions "Business Cards" and "Postcards" and all orders with a name starting with "Jo", like John, Jonathan,

Note that the "Date Range" drop down is just a convenient way to select a "From Date" and a "to Date". Also note that name in this context is a requester's name or email, or the imprint first or last name. Finally, it is best to use the "Tokens" ("More..." link) by itself, i.e. no input in the Search box, otherwise you might not find the orders you are looking for

FieldDescription
SearchSearch takes names, order numbers (tokens), divisions. Search is case insensitive and match a token, the beginning of a name or a any part of a division. A name in this context is a requester's name, email or the imprint first or last name.
From DateThe beginning of the date range.
To DateThe end of the date range. Note that when you use the "Date Range" drop down list the end date will be the day you open this page.
Order Numbers (tokens) 

Production Filtering

The filter allows you to search for specific orders. The "Search" input box accepts names, order numbers (tokens), and divisions. You can enter multiple words in the "Search" box, so you can enter more then one name or a name and a order number.

The filter will return the orders that are inside the date range and where the words in the "Search" box match a token, the beginning of a name or a any part of a division.

Example: Search: "G407QY Jo Card" Date Range: "last 90 days" Will find the order with token G407QY and the orders in the divisions "Business Cards" and "Postcards" and all orders with a name starting with "Jo", like John, Jonathan,

Note that the "Date Range" drop down is just a convenient way to select a "From Date" and a "to Date". Also note that name in this context is a requester's name or email, or the imprint first or last name. Finally, it is best to use the "Tokens" ("More..." link) by itself, i.e. no input in the Search box, otherwise you might not find the orders you are looking for

FieldDescription
SearchSearch takes names, order numbers (tokens), divisions. Search is case insensitive and match a token, the beginning of a name or a any part of a division. A name in this context is a requester's name, email or the imprint first or last name.
From DateThe beginning of the date range.
To DateThe end of the date range. Note that when you use the "Date Range" drop down list the end date will be the day you open this page.
Order Numbers (tokens) 

Shipping Filtering

The filter allows you to search for specific orders. The "Search" input box accepts names, order numbers (tokens), and divisions. You can enter multiple words in the "Search" box, so you can enter more then one name or a name and a order number.

The filter will return the orders that are inside the date range and where the words in the "Search" box match a token, the beginning of a name or a any part of a division.

Example: Search: "G407QY Jo Card" Date Range: "last 90 days" Will find the order with token G407QY and the orders in the divisions "Business Cards" and "Postcards" and all orders with a name starting with "Jo", like John, Jonathan,

Note that the "Date Range" drop down is just a convenient way to select a "From Date" and a "to Date". Also note that name in this context is a requester's name or email, or the imprint first or last name. Finally, it is best to use the "Tokens" ("More..." link) by itself, i.e. no input in the Search box, otherwise you might not find the orders you are looking for

FieldDescription
SearchSearch takes names, order numbers (tokens), divisions. Search is case insensitive and match a token, the beginning of a name or a any part of a division. A name in this context is a requester's name, email or the imprint first or last name.
From DateThe beginning of the date range.
To DateThe end of the date range. Note that when you use the "Date Range" drop down list the end date will be the day you open this page.
Order Numbers (tokens) 

Shipping All Filtering

The filter allows you to search for specific orders. The "Search" input box accepts names, order numbers (tokens), and divisions. You can enter multiple words in the "Search" box, so you can enter more then one name or a name and a order number.

The filter will return the orders that are inside the date range and where the words in the "Search" box match a token, the beginning of a name or a any part of a division.

Example: Search: "G407QY Jo Card" Date Range: "last 90 days" Will find the order with token G407QY and the orders in the divisions "Business Cards" and "Postcards" and all orders with a name starting with "Jo", like John, Jonathan,

Note that the "Date Range" drop down is just a convenient way to select a "From Date" and a "to Date". Also note that name in this context is a requester's name or email, or the imprint first or last name. Finally, it is best to use the "Tokens" ("More..." link) by itself, i.e. no input in the Search box, otherwise you might not find the orders you are looking for

FieldDescription
SearchSearch takes names, order numbers (tokens), divisions. Search is case insensitive and match a token, the beginning of a name or a any part of a division. A name in this context is a requester's name, email or the imprint first or last name.
From DateThe beginning of the date range.
To DateThe end of the date range. Note that when you use the "Date Range" drop down list the end date will be the day you open this page.
Order Numbers (tokens) 

Credit Card Filtering

The filter allows you to search for specific orders. The "Search" input box accepts names, order numbers (tokens), and divisions. You can enter multiple words in the "Search" box, so you can enter more then one name or a name and a order number.

The filter will return the orders that are inside the date range and where the words in the "Search" box match a token, the beginning of a name or a any part of a division.

Example: Search: "G407QY Jo Card" Date Range: "last 90 days" Will find the order with token G407QY and the orders in the divisions "Business Cards" and "Postcards" and all orders with a name starting with "Jo", like John, Jonathan,

Note that the "Date Range" drop down is just a convenient way to select a "From Date" and a "to Date". Also note that name in this context is a requester's name or email, or the imprint first or last name. Finally, it is best to use the "Tokens" ("More..." link) by itself, i.e. no input in the Search box, otherwise you might not find the orders you are looking for

FieldDescription
SearchSearch takes names, order numbers (tokens), divisions. Search is case insensitive and match a token, the beginning of a name or a any part of a division. A name in this context is a requester's name, email or the imprint first or last name.
From DateThe beginning of the date range.
To DateThe end of the date range. Note that when you use the "Date Range" drop down list the end date will be the day you open this page.
Order Numbers (tokens) 

Order Manager actions

Enter Quote

Manually force order approval. Used mostly when the approver is not responding to approval messages. Note that you cannot force approval through production holds (such as for USAData mailing lists). If multi-level approval is in use, this only forces the current approver -- the next approver in line will get an approval message. When all approvers have approved and all production holds are removed, the order will go to production.

No input fields

Deny Order

Manually deny orders. Denied orders will not be sent to production.

FieldDescription
Reason for denial(Required)
Disallow re-orderPrevent requester from re-ordering
Skip EmailDon't deliver denied email to requester

Send Approval Reminders

Unless approval forwarding is enabled, orders can sit in WAITING state forever. Send Reminders allows you to manually remind the approver (or someone else) that the order needs approval to move to production.

You can send approval reminders to the current approver for each order, the original order requester, or you can send all the approval messages to an override email address.

The Approver Reminder Email is editable under Email Templates in the Menu.

FieldDescription
Send reminder to 
EmailAddress to send reminder to if target is 'other'

Resend Confirmation Email

Resends Confirmation Email to original requestor or to email override (useful if original was caught by spam filter)

FieldDescription
Override Email 

Approve Order

Manually force order approval. Used mostly when the approver is not responding to approval messages. Note that you cannot force approval through production holds (such as for USAData mailing lists). If multi-level approval is in use, this only forces the current approver -- the next approver in line will get an approval message. When all approvers have approved and all production holds are removed, the order will go to production.

FieldDescription
Reason for approval(Optional)
Skip EmailDon't deliver approved email to requester

Reassign to New Approver

If the current approver is not responding or another person needs to look at the order before going to production, you manually change the current approver. Assigning to a new approver automatically sends email.

If multi-level approval is enabled, reassigning a new approver only affects the current approver -- if the new approver approves the order, the order approver will proceed to the next approver to approve or deny.

FieldDescription
New ApproverEmail address of new approver (required)

Undo cancellation/denial

Undenying orders is similar to reassigning to new approver -- the order gets moved back into WAITING state and an e-mail gets sent to the new approver. The new approver must either approve or deny the order.

FieldDescription
New ApproverEmail address of new approver (required)

Block Re-orders

Denying an order does not by itself prevent reorders (although usually the person denying has the option to prevent reorders). If an order has been denied without being marked un-reorderable, Mark Un-reorderable allows preventing reorders without going through the approval cycle.

FieldDescription
Confirm Block Re-ordersCheck the box to confirm you wish to mark the orders as un-reorderable

Confirm Receipt

Because e-mail is unreliable, the system has the option of requiring each manufacturer who receives items in an order to acknowledge receipt by clicking on an URL. If a manufacturer does receive production files but fails to click on the URL, you can use Confirm Receipt to manually acknowledge receipt of items.

No input fields

Redeliver Orders

Re-send selected items to original manufacturer or email address. You can filter items sent by setting Manufacturer: only items delivered to that manufacturer will be re-sent. However, if Override Email is set, the filter is ignored and all selected items are sent to the e-mail address.

FieldDescription
Override EmailAddress to send items to (overrides Manufacturer)
ManufacturerFilter sends only items matching this manufacturer (ignored when Override Email set) -- use Send Elsewhere to force different manuf
RegenerateCheck the box to regenerate the order items to be redelivered

Regenerate Items

Regenerate previews, EPS, and PDF files and shiplabels. Used when one or more of the following is true: files need to be re-sent to manufacturer and the files were deleted (generally files get deleted after sixty days); style files were updated;

No input fields

Send Items to Different Manufacturer

Select a manufacturer to force items to get re-sent to, regardless of original manufacturer. Use Redeliver Orders to send items to override email address.

FieldDescription
Manufacturer 

Cancel Whole Orders

Cancel an approved order -- works like denying, but also marks order as canceled and attempts to cancel any pending manufacturer sending. This cancels the entire order.

FieldDescription
Reason for cancelling(Required)
Prevent requester from re-ordering 

Create Shipment

Shipments are used to inform customers that their orders have shipped; they also provide a mechanism to give customers a ship tracking number (e.g. FedEx/UPS) so that the shipment can be monitored. A shipment can contain a partial order (useful when orders are split across multiple manufacturers or when some items are rush delivery). Shipments can also contain items from multiple orders (useful for minimizing shipping costs).

Note that the optional Shipment Cost for a shipment is separate from the shipping cost associated with an order.

FieldDescription
Shipping Method 
Shipment DateYYYY-MM-DD [HH:MM:SS]
Tracking #Shipper tracking number (e.g. FedEx/UPS)
Shipment CostOptional
Send shipment notification message to order requester 

Resend Shipping Notifications

Resend shipping notifications to original recipients.

No input fields

Cancel Item Shipments

Remove items from their associated shipments. When the last item in a shipment is removed, the shipment gets deleted. This is mostly useful for returned items or correcting items that were mistakenly added to a shipment.

No input fields

POST Orders

NOTE: This only applies to sites with realtime credit cards enabled. Please contact support if you need realtime credit cards.

Charge money for orders in AUTH state. Sites can be set to either AUTH-only or POST mode. In AUTH-only state, orders get credit card information verified, but NOT charged. To charge cards, you either need to use POST Orders or your credit card gateway's web-based terminal.

FieldDescription
PasswordPassword for decrypting creditcard info

Manually Charge Orders

This action allows you to manually charge orders that do not have credit card information (for example, to allow users to order using a company credit card that they do not have access to). This action requires that realtime creditcards are enabled, and it will generate a SALE transaction.

No input fields

Coupons and Discounts

Discounts and Coupons are tools you can enable on your Storefront that allow a customer to redeem special offers by entering a code during the checkout process.

Some examples of using Discounts on the PageDNA system could include:

  • Let users redeem a one-time use coupon code from a flyer or other promotion

  • Give a repeat customer an automatic 10% on their next order

  • Give free shipping on orders over $100

  • Run promotion where a certain product line receives an automatic discount over a date range ("10% off all envelopes, this month only")

These are just a few examples and you are not limited to just these. The Discount feature allows you to set up a wide range of different discount or coupon types.

Activation:

To begin using the Discounts, click on the Discount Editor link in your Storefront menu. If you've not previously enabled Discounts on your site, you will need to purchase the Discount system. There will be a green box with a checkbox displayed in the Discount Editor if you have not already purchased this feature. Mark the checkbox, click the Purchase button and agree to the pricing. You'll then be granted access to the Discount Editor.

Use:

Discounts are displayed on the billing page. The available discounts can optionally be shown in the site header. You will have to edit your Billing Page(s) and turn on the new Discount Code field if user input is required.

Any existing discounts you have set up will be listed in the Discount Editor. If you don't have any discounts set up yet, or to add a new discount, click the Add New Discount link. This will take you to the Menu Editor for discounts available to this site.

Menu Editor:

Figure 58.1. Discount Menu Editor

Discount Menu Editor


There are seven tabs that you can use to configure your discounts. The function of each tab is as follows.

Name:

Figure 58.2. Discount Name Tab

Discount Name Tab


  • Discount Type

    • Your choices are: Site Wide, Code, Per User, Profile Group, and Profile Field

      [Note]Note

      The Per User discount type is designed to work with profiles (each user logs in with a unique account). This would trigger the discount to apply to their order on the fly.

  • Code

    • Enter your coupon codes here if you have selected Code as your discount type.

  • Name

    • The name you enter will be displayed to the user

  • Prodcode

    • This is the product code that will be displayed in reports, emails and such for tracking purposes

  • Source

    • This is the product code that will be displayed in reports, emails and such for tracking purposes

Active:

Figure 58.3. Discount Active Tab

Discount Active Tab


To turn on and off a discount, check or uncheck the Active box. If your discount is only going to be active for a certain period of time, enter the beginning and end dates in the Valid From and Valid To fields respectively.

Calculations:

Figure 58.4. Discount Calculations Tab

Discount Calculations Tab


This tab determines how the discount is calculated. Marks each of the boxes that apply for you discount.

Notify:

Figure 58.5. Discount Notify Tab

Discount Notify Tab


In order to be notified when a discount has been used, you can enter an email address in this box. Multiple addresses can be used if you separate them with commas.

Product Tags

Figure 58.6. Discount Product Tags Tab

Discount Product Tags Tab


If your discounts are item specific, enter the item tags for the items that you want to have the discounts apply to. Leave that field blank to have the discount apply to all items. To exclude certain items from being eligible the discount, enter those product tags in the Excluded field.

[Caution]Caution

Product or item tags must be separated by just a comma. Do NOT add a space.

Restrictions:

Figure 58.7. Discount Restrictions Tab

Discount Restrictions Tab


This tab allows you to set certain restrictions and options to the discount. Those include if the discount is part of a budget, a minimum amount that needs to be ordered before a discount can apply, a minimum quantity that must be ordered before a discount can apply, if the discount is only available on reorders, if the user can reduce the amount of the discount, and if the discount can be combined with other discounts.

Subkey:

Figure 58.8. Discount Subkey Tab

Discount Subkey Tab


The subkey is used to determine who is eligible for this discount. In the subkey field, enter the variable that you want to select for that will be able to use the discount. The subkey ID field displays to the use who is eligible for the discount. The Subkey Valid When is where you can enter an error message that will display to a user who has tried to use a discount but is not eligible for it according to the value you've set in the subkey field.

Value:

Figure 58.9. Discount Value Tab

Discount Value Tab


The value tab is where you can set the actual amount of the discount. The Usage dropdown box allows you to choose between a single use coupon, a multi use gift certificate, or a permanent discount.

If you want to offer a straight amount off in dollars, enter that in the Value field. If you prefer to offer a percent off, enter that in the next field. The Qtyfree allows you to set an amount of the ordered item that you want to give away free. The Qtyfree Param and Value Param allow you to assign field names for those discounts.

List of Discounts:

After adding a discount by saving it, you will see a table with a list of all the discounts on a site. The columns in the table are configurable. There is a link above the top right corner to Configure Columns.

Storefront Language Translation

Our pricing on adding storefront translations -- wherein the storefront display and copy change to another language - is $150 per language to turn on the feature, with discounts available for multiple languages.

VERY important: Storefront copy translations are NOT a situation where one just waves a magic wand. Please read these caveats:

  • Bing does a rough pass on the translation

  • The translation happens in a PageDNA provided tool, the user can elect to use the Bing translation or enter their own on the fly.

  • All editing must be done via the translations tools. The PageDNA web Templates interface is for making large scale changes to the english portion of the storefront.

  • The store should be complete in all respects in English prior to adding any other languages. This will reduce errors in the long run.

  • These translations are never perfect and need to be edited to improve correctness

  • Translations can be edited individually, or via a Spreadsheet upload

  • If using a spreadsheet - translation text needs to be checked for line breaks and wraps

  • We aren't language experts so can't advise you as to whether a translation is right or not

  • Currency: A storefront can only show and transact business in a single currency.

  • Typesetting: Some languages need language specific fonts for use in typesetting. Not all fonts contain all possible characters. Some adjustments may need to be made over time.

How to Test Your Site

Site and system testing may be the most important step of the build process. That said, testing is unfortunately often left until the last minute - or completely ignored - in favor of going live faster. "We'll use the first few live order to test the system" is an often heard response to "Have you tested your site all the way through?".

We can not overstate both the critical nature of testing, or how important it to be as through as possible when going through your testing suite.

Some customers make a check list of items or questions which need to be gone through for every site build prior to being released as live for ordering. The guide may serve as a complete or partial check list for you and your company.

Guide to Placing Test Orders

The primary task in testing is to place complete orders for all products all the way through to the end of the process.

During the order process review not only items but each and every page of the system, review text instructions, images, buttons, messages, double check the cancel and contact customer service links - does the correct contact information show?

Review the item pricing, sales tax, shipping options and pricing. - Note establishing a test ship to location may help in trouble shooting and problems. Check rush and handling fees, ensure that they are labeled correctly on each paged of the site.

After completion of the orders check all the system emails. Does the order confirmation have everything you expect and your client will need. Did the vendor email go to the correct place, was the correct artwork attached, has that art been run to either press or imagesetting to check that the files run as expected. Double check that pre-printed images are not passing, images which need to pass are passing.

Show the output from the system to data entry - whoever will need to enter information to make job tickets, make sure that the accounting group gets a chance to review the sample orders, they amy see something that will keep the job from being paid.

If the site will be using real time credit cards, make sure that you accounting group has received training on how to use the "Credit Card Manager" menu item, and that they have all passwords to access order data. Note - the credit card gateway will also provide a virtual terminal which can be used to access credit card data. sample orders should be placed and checked in the Virtual Terminal as well to ensure that the systems are correctly communicating.

Troubleshooting Common Issues

Trouble shooting common issues:

[Tip]Tip

Note some of these steps or checks may require additional PageDNA administrator accounts to be created. For example - to lookup an order you need to be logged in as a PageDNA admin.

The "User Management" link in the Hub is the best and fastest way to manage new "PageDNA admin" (internal administrator) user accounts. Note establishing a non-builder user such as a CSR as the designated tester will serve two functions. 1 - It will help front line staff become comfortable with an ordering system and 2, will establish a second set of eyes to review decisions and point out areas which are unclear.

  • When testing I get an email but no attachments. - PageDNA will convert the attached files to links on the fly if all the attachments exceed 6MB in file size when added together. - The item being ordered is not set to send files - such would be the case of a Static or Stocking item

  • When testing I get files, but they are the wrong format - The "Vendor Email" menu item allows you to set which files to attach, currently we support: EPS, PDF and GIF (proof image).

  • When testing I get files but they have missing or extra images - The most likely cause is the layers assigned to the blocks in your styles. Use the Block list tool to see all the blocks in your style sorted by layer. Layers marked as PREVIEW_LAYER will show on the proof and not pass to the production file while OUTPUT_LAYER will not show on the proof but will pass to the production files. layers -1 thru -1499 will both show on the proof and pass to production with -1 being higher in the stack than -1499. higher layers knockout lower layers

  • On the billing page I don't see sales tax - Sales taxes are set in the Sales tax menu item, by default they are set base on the ship to city state and zip. Check the states fr which your company needs to collect sales tax. You may wish to consult your accountant about which states to select. PageDNA purchases a third party data base which is updated regularly with the newest tax information for the US and Canada. Check the shipping address used in the order, sales tax will not be set correctly if the ship to state is spelled out or the ship to country is not set. The tool assumes USA for tax settings.

  • On the billing page I see shipping methods but the prices look incorrect - Check the weights loaded into the product Info section of your item with item editor. To correctly set the weight for your item calculate the weight of 1000 pieces plus packaging. If your item is sold as an "each" item such as a business cards weigh 1000 cards, if the item is sold as a "pack" or "box" weigh 1000 packs or boxes to find the correct weight per/1000. Check your origin state and zip in the shipping rate editor setup tab. Check your ship to address make sure that the city state and zipcode match. If you are not calculating sales tax you may need to enable the city state zip code checking feature, that will help ensure correct addresses. You may also need to enable the ship to country to get the correct rates to show. Check the shipping methods themselves - are they setup as real time shipping rates - if not, are rates filled in.

  • On the billing Page a price for Rush is showing but rush was not enabled/selected on the shipping page - Do you have handling fees enabled in either the item level or the shipping rates level? By design the handling and rush fees share the same line item on the billing page - normally this is a simple labeling issue - change the rush label on the bill page to read Rush/Handling

  • On the shipping page no ship to address auto populates - This can be caused by ordering an item which does not have an imprinting address - the imprint address flows forward onto the shipping page. One way to combat the issue is to enable the drop down shipping address list on the shipping page. Note - best practices for shipping addresses include only using the correct state abbreviation and the drop down shipping country list.

  • During testing the product being ordered should/should not have asked for a mailing list - Mailing list settings are controlled in the Mailing list setup and management link. Check the settings in the Items tab, ensure the correct options are enabled for your items.

  • During testing the proof of the item is too large/small - preview size settings are controlled in the preview tab of the style as a percentage - form items around business card size the recommended size is 200% while the recommended size for items up to a letterhead is 100% - larger items should be shown at a smaller size. The maximum recommended width is around 600 pixels. Some items will display nicely with the addition of a zoom proofing block. Note - larger previews can be achieved by using the pdf preview link option or by adding a clickable popup link to a larger view of the proof.

  • The catalog/item choice page doesn't show item thumbnails in all browsers - Images which have a color space of CMYK will not display correctly with the Internet explorer browser.

  • The links in the progress bar don't work. - The progress bar is designed to show users where they are in the ordering process, not be navigation to the different sections of the site. Allowing a user to randomly jump around inside the ordering process could result in unexpected results. If that progress bar is distracting it can be removed by editing the site header.

Theme Manager

The Theme Manager is a powerful tool for saving, copying and managing the look and feel of an entire site.

The Theme Manager lets you save and update all settings on the working site. This includes buttons, steps, catalog settings and the global look and feeling settings, as well as custom CSS set in the Site Header and Site Footer.

Theme settings do not include ordering page text or the site logo.

Themes can be shared across all sites within an organization, which can allow more development on a test site without affecting a live site.

The Theme Manager interface:

Some common tasks in the Theme Manager include:

  1. Previewing a theme

  2. Saving/Backing-up your themes

  3. Using Library themes

  4. Using saved themes

  5. Copying themes between sites

Previewing a Theme

To preview a theme, click the New Window icon under the Preview column for the corresponding theme. This will pop open a new window showing the catalog, and provide links for the form and shipping pages, which show the ways in which the given theme will affect various parts of the site.

Saving a Theme

Near the top of the Theme Manager is a link 'Save Current'. Clicking this will prompt you to save your theme. Choosing a name which is memorable, such as 'Acme clean white and gray design' can help to quickly distinguish which theme you wish to use.

A preview is also generated when saving a named theme, allowing better and fast distinction between themes without changing the current site's appearance.

Using Themes

To use a theme, click the Use link for the corresponding theme. Library themes are global, stock themes which can be used and modified on the working site as much or as little as desired.

[Tip]Tip

Be sure to preview a theme first to make sure it is the correct one.

[Tip]Tip

Saving the sites existing theme is a good idea before using another one, just in case the new theme is not really what is desired.

Clicking OK to the confirmation, the page Theme Manager page will refresh with the new settings in place. After that, settings can be changed. Backups are made periodically, but saving the theme manually from time to time will ensure the theme is saved with a preview to a known name.

Reverting to a manual or automatically saved backup is done the same way: clicking the 'Use' button will restore from the saved theme, reverting any previous changes.

Copying Themes Between Sites

To copy an in-use theme from one site to another, select the source site from the Copy Site dropdown then click the Go button.

[Tip]Tip

If the site list is long, typing the site name in the text box will begin filtering out sites in the list which do not match.

This then copies the theme on the source site to the current working site. The theme copied is the theme active on the source site, not a saved theme.

Deep Linking to an Item, Catalog Tab or Division

Deep-linking allows you to link past the normal login pages on a site. There are various levels available for deep linking. You can link directly to an item, a division or a tab in the Catalog. Clicking on the link for each of these options will open a pane with an example link and the current available options with the links you need to provide your customer in order to deep link.

You will find Deep Linking Specifications in the site's menu under the Integration section.

Site Translation

PageDNA supports the ability to translate a site so the user can "toggle" to another language. You will need to contact PageDNA Support to have this enabled on your site. When first building the site, get all the English text in place before translating it.

Costs are as follows:

PageDNA SETUP PLUS CUSTOMER TRANSLATION AND ENTRY: $150 per site for 2-3 languages (including English). This includes all work to enable translation, re-save web pages so translation capabilites are enabled, generate machine translation and setup the site so you can add translated text. Translation service and inputting different variations is not included. The customer will need to check the machine translation and translate any text not machine translated.

PageDNA SETUP AND ENTRY: $500 setup per site plus $50 per webpage. This includes all work to enable translation and input translated text. Translation service is NOT included, i.e. the cost to translate English text to a foreign language is not included.

After translation has been enabled, all editing in a language other than English must be done from within an ordering session.

When you toggle to another language a cookie is stored in your browser.

[Important]Important

Best Practices are that you use two browsers, e.g. Safari and Firefox. Open one browser to the menu so you can administer the site. The browser with the menu should ALWAYS be toggled to English. Open a different browser to an ordering session toggled to the foreign language. All translation needs to take place in the browser with the ordering session. NEVER translate from the menu or by opening a webpage template.

If you enter an ordering session as a PageDNA administrator you will see gold "edit" links for text on the page. Toggle to the foreign language at the beginning of the ordering session. When opening the "edit" links, if they say "Message Editor", you can change the text to whatever the popup window indicates is the Current Language. You can also use the Message Editor drop-down list. If you are NOT in a window that indicates you are using the Message Editor, you will ALWAYS be editing English text, and any changes you make will overwrite English copy.

[Caution]Caution

Clicking the link in the upper-left corner to edit the entire webpage template, or editing a webpage template from the menu, should only be done when the site has been toggled to English. Otherwise, you will affect the translation.

Clicking a Restore Original button for a text field will revert the field to the default English text.

Important Points:

Changing languages can be done via links or a drop-down list. The setting for this can be found in the Site Header (located in the menu > Site Settings section > Site-Wide Appearance).

Do NOT toggle back and forth between languages in an ordering session.

Set the language you will be editing at the beginning of the ordering session and edit the webpages as you move forward in the ordering session.

Do NOT use the browser's back button. Use the navigation buttons at the bottom of the webpages. If a back button is not available, cancel the order and begin another order.

When the site is toggled to English:

  • You can edit using the menu or open a webpage template.

  • Or, use the text area "edit" links on the page when in an ordering session toggled to English.

  • For text on the page for which there is no "edit" link, use the link to the page in the upper-left corner when in an ordering session, or edit the webpage template from the menu.

When the site is NOT in English you MUST translate from within an ordering session:

  • Begin translation by using the Show Embedded Messages link at the top of the page.

  • For text not editable using Show Embedded Messages, use the gold "edit" links next to each text element.

  • Contact PageDNA Support if you encounter text that you are not able to access for translation.

[Caution]Caution

When NOT toggled to English, do NOT edit web templates from within the ordering session, e.g. by clicking on the link to the Index Page, or from the menu because this accesses only the English text. Translated text will revert to English.

Dealing with button images:

  1. Create buttons in English and in the foreign language. The file naming convention for the foreign language GIFs, for French for example, needs to be button_name.fr.gif and button_name_hover.fr.gif (with "fr" standing for French).

  2. For the English buttons: Use the Button Uploader (located in the menu > Site Setting section > Site-Wide Appearance) and upload the English buttons.

  3. For the foreign language buttons: Use the File Uploader (located in the menu > Site Content section) and go to the "img" directory. (The File Uploader initially opens to the "con" directory.)

Filtering items by language:

It is possible to display or hide items based on the currently selected language. For example, a site might have English and French versions of the same product, and display one or the other depending on the user's currently selected language. This can be configured on a per-item basis in the Custom section of and item when edited in the Item Editor. The option is called "Restrict by Language" and will show multiple checkboxes for sites using more than one language.

Figure 63.1. Filter Item by Language

Filter Item by Language


PageDNA-Promail Bridge

Introduction

The PageDNA-Promail Bridge is an integration option PageDNA offers to allow PageDNA features to be accessed within the SMA-Promail e-commerce system. This in turn allows existing Promail storefronts to add PageDNA functionality such as variable data capabilities without requiring creation of a new, independent storefront.

How does it work?

A customer, or user on the ProMail Storefront selects a PageDNA flagged item
The user "punches into" the PageDNA storefront to configure and then proof an item
The user returns to the ProMail basket
PageDNA releases items once the order has been approved within Promail

What do I need from Promail?

How much does the integration cost -- from PageDNA’s side?

  • $1000 setup - one time for your account - covers all current and future integrations

  • No additional recurring hosting fees

How do I request this integration?

  • Email support@PageDNA and let us know the first storefront you wish to have integrated.

How long does it take to get started?

  • About 2-3 weeks.

How to Demo ProMail Integration

SMA-ProMail has created a demo storefront integrated with PageDNA:

http://promail5demo.sma-promail.com/v5fmsnet/MainProgs/GlobLogin.asp?pos=merint

  • Login: pagedna

  • Password: page2000

You will find the PageDNA item under the "Health" category. The ProMail sales team can help you understand more about this integration from the Promail side of things.

PageDNA-EPMS Bridge

What is it?

PageDNA-EPMS Bridge is an integration option PageDNA offers to allow our storefronts to push order data into the Enterprise Print Management Solutions (EPMS) Print MIS platform in an automated fashion. These removes data entry tasks between the system - saving time and preventing transcription errors in the process.

How does it work?

  • Standalone PageDNA Storefront ---> pushes orders into EPMS upon approval.

What do I need from Enterprise?

How much does the integration cost -- from PageDNA's side?

  • Please see your pricing sheet under "Standard XML Integration" for pricing.

How do I request this integration?

  • Email support@PageDNA and let us know the first storefront you wish to have integrated.

How long does it take to get started?

  • About 2-3 weeks.

PageDNA-EPMS Bridge Reference Customer

Ronald Johnson

Financial Manager

SOS Printing, Inc.

8135 Ronson Road

San Diego, CA 92111

858-292-1800

PageDNA-PressWise Bridge

What is it?

  • Standalone PageDNA Storefront ---> pushes orders into PressWise upon approval.

What do I need from PressWise?

How much does the integration cost -- from PageDNA’s side?

  • Please see your pricing sheet under "Standard XML Integration" for pricing.

How do I request this integration?

  • Email support@PageDNA and let us know the first storefront you wish to have integrated.

How long does it take to get started?

  • About 2-3 weeks.

Order Management Frequently Asked Questions

Frequently Asked Questions about Order Management Questions

A.1. How do I cancel orders?
A.2. How do I require credit cards for some users but not for others?
A.3. How do I cc: someone on an order email?
A.4. Can there be more than one manufacturer and price per item?
A.5. I can't find an order in the Order Manager
A.6. Can a profile user be allowed to cancel an order?

A.1.

How do I cancel orders?

Go into site menu Order Manager, tab Production. Select the orders you want to cancel, then click Cancel Order at the top. Fill in a reason for cancelling and click the Cancel Order button.

Note that only approved orders show up on tab Production, use tab Approval to deny unapproved orders.

A.2.

How do I require credit cards for some users but not for others?

Use Multiple Bill feature to create different billing pages; one with credit card fields and one without; then assign your users to different divisions.

A.3.

How do I cc: someone on an order email?

You have several options. The most common is to edit Order Confirmation Email and specify someone to copy, which sends immediately when an order is finished. You can modify your manufacturers email to copy people (this is useful if you want people to see final orders after they are approved or if you want them to receive artwork). You can specify a CC on the Approval Granted Email if approval is enabled.

Finally, you can allow your users to specify a CC on the Shipping Page with Order Notification

A.4.

Can there be more than one manufacturer and price per item?

It is possible to have more than one manufacturer associated with an item if the item is a DualItem, and have alternate pricing.

An example of when this might be used is if a business card is "flat" printed except for vice-presidents and above, who get thermographed cards. You would create a field using the Form Editor that the user could select in an ordering session at the point where they enter their information to be typeset.

You can have alternate pricing and an alternate manufacturer.

Documentation for DualItems can be found here:

http://www.nationsprint.com/hub/docs/html/SiteConfiguration/dual-items.html

A.5.

I can't find an order in the Order Manager

Orders are site specific. Make sure you are on the right site when searching for an order in the Order Manager. You can check the site by using the Find Order tool in the Hub. The first line with the "placed" information will have the site name following the email address of the person who placed the order. There will also be a link to the site's menu in the top left of the window. You can use this link to easily get to the site's Order Manager.

If you have used filtering in the Order Manager or restricted the date range, the filtering and/or date range can be retained and interfere with the ability to locate other orders. Please be sure to clear filtering when looking for an order. If you have added a search restriction using the "more" link, you should clear this before starting another search.

A.6.

Can a profile user be allowed to cancel an order?

A profile user can be allowed to cancel an order on the Tracking Results Form page. The cancel column can be activated in theTracking Results Form template, which can be found in the site's menu in Web Templates, by enabling the "Include links per order to cancel the order" checkbox. Shipping Tracking needs to be enabled on the site for the user to be able to access the Tracking Results Form page. Please see our documentation on the Shipping System to expose Shipping Tracking to users: http://www.nationsprint.com/hub/docs/html/ShippingSystem/

Shipping Frequently Asked Questions

Frequently Asked Questions about Shipping Questions

B.1. Why don't Fedex and Ground realtime shipping quotes show?
B.2. How do I validate ZIP codes?
B.3. How do I verify real time UPS rates?
B.4. How do I change the shipment date for an order?
B.5. Why am I getting taxed when handling fees are not taxed?
B.6. Can I have a split shipment and ship to more than one address for an order?
B.7. Is it possible to resend orders to OnPoint?

B.1.

Why don't Fedex and Ground realtime shipping quotes show?

If the user enters bad shipping information, such as a bad zip code, the Fedex realtime rate quote will fail and not return a quote and therefore won't show one to the user. To deal with this go to the shipping page and search for ship_zip. Then click on the checkbox that says "Verify city/state matches ZIP code database". This will check the shipping information the user entered to prevent a realtime rate quote error.

Also, real-time rates may not appear if you have an item with zero weight and/or if the minimum weight for a chosen shipping method is above the weight for a current item.

Finally, you may need to set up the Shipping Rate Editor setup tab with correct origin.

B.2.

How do I validate ZIP codes?

Visit the "Shipping Page" in "Web Templates" and check "Verify city/state matches ZIP code database". (This is a separate option for each Shipping Page if you have multiple Shipping Pages.)

Note: we only validate US ZIP codes; other countries are currently not supported

B.3.

How do I verify real time UPS rates?

See http://www.nationsprint.com/hub/docs/html/SiteConfiguration/SRE-realtime-checking.html

B.4.

How do I change the shipment date for an order?

Use Order Manager's Cancel Shipments feature, then use Create Shipment to recreate the shipment with the correct date.

B.5.

Why am I getting taxed when handling fees are not taxed?

You have an item-level rush fee, which is considered part of the item price even though it is displayed as a separate line item on the Bill Page.

B.6.

Can I have a split shipment and ship to more than one address for an order?

Split shipments are not an option. Although, we support a work around that uses the Comments Box on the Shipping Page. Users would place an order for all the items needed and use the Comments Box on the Shipping Page to indicate which items need to go be shipped to a different address and the address to use. However shipping cost and sales tax would only be calculated for the one "official" shipping address that is entered into the Ship To Address fields on the Shipping Page, using the selected Shipping Method.

B.7.

Is it possible to resend orders to OnPoint?

In the Order Manager, go to the Production tab, find your orders and use the Send Elsewhere option to send the orders to OnPoint.

Site Management Frequently Asked Questions

Frequently Asked Questions about Site Management Questions

C.1. How do I clone an existing site/storefront?
C.2. How do I rename my storefront?
C.3. Can I delete a storefront?
C.4. How do I run reports and get them to my customer?
C.5. Help! im locked out of my site. Why am I being asked for a password?
C.6. How do I allow orders for bundled/kitted items when some components have inventory and some do not?
C.7. What does the error message "No keys starting with sr_" mean?
C.8. Can PageDNA setup a new gateway (other than current supported gateways)?
C.9. How can I resolve a bad cost configuration error?
C.10. How do I send a copy of the Order Confirmation email based on Division?
C.11. How do I enable barcode display of the order number on the vendor email?
C.12. How do I add Imposition as a delivery method on my site?
C.13. My site times out. What can I do?
C.14. How do I delete a division on a Mega-Site?
C.15. Email Configuration Problem

C.1.

How do I clone an existing site/storefront?

Visit the Site Clone tool in the menu of the site/storefront you want to clone. Enter a new name for the clone and click the Request Clone button. Please allow up to 24 hours for the clone request to be processed.

C.2.

How do I rename my storefront?

Please email support@pagedna.com with the desired name.

C.3.

Can I delete a storefront?

Not directly. However, you can mark the storefront as "RIP" in the Site Mode menu item and the storefront will be deleted in 45 days.

C.4.

How do I run reports and get them to my customer?

You may not be able to create a single report that covers all your customer’s needs. However, reports can be combined in any spreadsheet program, like Microsoft Excel. Please search our documentation using the search word: reports

You have two options in regard to "delivery" of a report to your customer:

1) You can schedule reports to run and be emailed to your customer.

2) You can use Guest Admins in the site menu and create a customer account with access to just the reports they need. Please be careful what you grant them access to. For information on Guest Admins, please search our documentation using the search word(s): guest or guest admin

C.5.

Help! im locked out of my site. Why am I being asked for a password?

Your site has a "Site Password" enabled. If you are ever locked out, there is a way to make a "skeleton key" - here is how: login at PageDNA.com and visit the Hub. Go to "Site Passwords" in the Hub.

Choose your site in the list and create a new username/password to get back into your site. In the menu, you can disable this site-level password entirely or add/remove users in the "Passwords" menu item. If you are using User Admin on your site, please search our documentation using the words: user admin

C.6.

How do I allow orders for bundled/kitted items when some components have inventory and some do not?

Below is to remedy a situation in which the bundled item is visible in the catalog but cannot be ordered because one or more components with inventory control does not have inventory and this is preventing users from ordering the item. This could be the case if the component item’s Product Type is "hidden" (SosHiddenItem).

You can check inventory levels by running an Inventory report, or by going to the Item Editor and selecting the Inventory link.

Edit the bundle item (not the bundle’s components) and delete the value in the Condition Unavail field.

C.7.

What does the error message "No keys starting with sr_" mean?

This error appears when you have a Special Request item, which allows the user to upload their own artwork, and the variable name for the file upload field is incorrect for this item type. Quotes and Quotes Plus items are often Special Request items.

The variable for the file upload field needs to begin with sr_. For example: sr_file_upload. ("sr" stands for "special request".)

This requirement is only for Special Request items.

Please see our documentation for Special Request items: http://www.nationsprint.com/hub/docs/html/SiteConfiguration/content-special-request-items.html

C.8.

Can PageDNA setup a new gateway (other than current supported gateways)?

We currently support four gateways: Authorize.net, Cybersource, and PayflowPro. Periodically, we receive a request to support an additional gateway. It is time and cost intensive to develop the ability to support an additional gateway and go through the security testing. The cost to develop another gateway would be born by the customer requesting it, and estimates have been declined every time we have provided one. As such, we no longer provide estimates to support an additional gateway because the time needed to do the research takes our developers away from assigned tasks.

C.9.

How can I resolve a bad cost configuration error?

There are a couple of common reasons for this error.

1) This error is due to a space in the name of a pricing option in a Quotes item.

Edit the item in Item Editor and select the link to pricing_options. Edit an option in the list at the top of the screen. Select each of the options on the left and edit the Name on the right, replacing the spaces with underscores. This should resolve the pricing option.

2) If you are allowing the user to select the size for the item, the Size option needs to be at the top of the list.

C.10.

How do I send a copy of the Order Confirmation email based on Division?

It is possible to CC the Order Confirmation email on a division by division level, and works on a Mega-Site

In the menu go to Web Templates > edit the Customer Service Info link and go to the Customer Service Info section. Leave the Email field for the Customer Service Primary Contact empty and enable the checkbox for Per-division Multiple Contacts.

In the menu go to Web Templates > Divisions Editor and edit a division. In the Extra Vars section set mgr_email in the left column and the cc email address in the right column. Save.

Now the conformation emails should be cc’d based on the division.

C.11.

How do I enable barcode display of the order number on the vendor email?

1) Edit the Vendor Email template

2) Enable the checkbox for "Display Tracking # in Barcode font HTML email format used".

3) The Barcode Font field must contain a barcode font you have installed locally.

4) Enable the checkbox for "Show Item Barcode HTML email format used — see Barcode Font option above".

C.12.

How do I add Imposition as a delivery method on my site?

If an Imposition delivery method has already been configured for you by PageDNA Support and you need to add it to another site, select it from the drop-down list in the Add section of Manufacturer Setup and save. Then use the "products" link to assign items to the manufacturer. New orders for these items will go into the Imposition queue.

C.13.

My site times out. What can I do?

Your site may timeout if you have variable items on your site using large files, or if users place orders for a large number of items.

Sites can be configured to build EPS and/or PDF files and send emails and exports in a back-end process, preventing timeouts for sites with large artwork or large numbers of orders. Contact PageDNA Support to set this up.

C.14.

How do I delete a division on a Mega-Site?

The steps for deleting a division on a Mega-Site are as follows:

1) Delete all the users in the division.

2) Delete the division

3) Change all the item tags that had been used by the deleted division OR delete the items. Changing or deleting the item tags will prevent reorders.

If you do not change or delete the item tags, a user could place a reorder and could see all the other divisions on the Mega-Site.

C.15.

Email Configuration Problem

Notifications of configuration problems that prevent a PageDNA email from going out (e.g. Confirmation, Approval, Vendor email) will be sent to the site’s technical contact with instructions for fixing.

The subject of these emails will look like this:

PageDNA configuration problem: YOURSITE Approval Notification Email

Oftentimes, simply re-saving to update the code for the email email template will resolve the issue. If this does not fix the problem, please contact PageDNA Support.